Home

Honeywell GNS-XL GPS Receiver User Manual

1. o_o 9 m Lies The BACK Key is used to erase i errors and page backward i when the cursor is not dis ai Ue played It can also be used to gei change data in a field if the cur sor is present Nav Sc Jole F c eG GJ S pvd oO usi eX SPACE SP KEY SP Key is used to enter a space when entering mes en sage AFIS Page This e ne key is not functional if AFIS is en ne not installed in the system 2 ne fem c FIJATE F omo X9 wx etctec muse When the ENT Key is Ly gL depressed data is entered into 5 m CI fed the computer memory el SH DISPLAY SELECTOR
2. ALPHA KEYS al BH HEJ The alpha keys are used to SH enter the 26 letters of the alpha SH He bet and He Jet 9958 9 SVQ 3 33 EX C3 3 900 MoTo aou exce tais NUMERIC KEYS 2 oh es The numeric keys are used to e e enter numbers 0 to 9 and He He e GH He 2553 E If the cursor is positioned over a waypoint identifier it is oes sci appropriate to program a Holding Pattern at that way DD point depressing the HOLD e ll Key accesses the Holding ai Ley Pattern page ei If the cursor is not displayed En depressing the HOLD Key e accesses the POSITION FIX zc POOLE Page and is used for position pice 2 HOYOS updates and verification as well 55200 22 the primary naviga 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System 1 5 Description
3. 7 57 Printing Weather 7 58 SELECTING OPERATING MODES For AFIS Users NOT Equipped with Satellite Data Communications System 7 60 i esee EC eoe eck aie end 7 60 Turning AUTO REPORT 7 60 Returning to AUTO REPORT 7 61 Auto Weather Update 7 62 Turning AUTO WX OFF _ 7 62 xiv Rev 3 GNS Xz Flight Management System Oct 02 Rev 3 Oct 02 Table of Contents Returning to AUTO WX 7 63 Ground Network Operating Modes 7 64 AUTO to MAN or OFF Mode 7 64 Returning to AUTO 3 seen See eee 7 65 Updating AFIS Flight Plan and Weather 7 66 Updating AFIS Flight Plan 7 66 Selecting Update as Active Flight Plan 1 67 Updating SIGMETS 4 5 be ve vel ghee 7 68 Updating Weather 7 69 To Update Terminal Weather Data Pages 7 70 To insert a new identifier 7 70 Updating Winds Aloft 7 70 To update the Winds Aloft Data Pages 7 71 To insert a ne
4. RIT 3 111 3 112 Overlay ce ap aM E 3 37 3 39 P Parallax Adjustment 1 4 3 1 Parameters 0 00 cece cece eee eee eee 2 30 2 58 3 63 3 79 3 105 2 2 Path Descent 2 33 2 37 2 39 2 41 3 74 3 78 3 81 3 83 ata tetas ede ae 1 2 2 65 2 69 3 127 3 129 PIREBS eid tad mai 7 13 Plan Crossing menage 2 41 POSITIONED Co 1 5 2 30 2 63 2 72 3 112 3 113 Position 3 110 3 113 3 118 PPM PS 7 15 7 17 7 41 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X1 Flight Management System r9 Index ds RR dace vues 3 1 3 71 7 1 7 27 55 em sear cea e on a 2 39 3 84 3 86 PRED IN 55 2 2 22 2 51 bee shal 2 5 2 7 2 58 3 73 3 77 7 48 7 58 Preselector PRESL 2 38 3 72 3 84 6 5 sees 6 5 Procedure Turn 2 4 2 8 2 10 2 13 2 15 2 17 2 19 2 64 3 33 3 39 3 42 3 44 3 62 3 75 6 4 6 5 Programi oo aetate ue a aUe 1 5 3 57 3 63 3 74 3 8
5. 2 4 2 64 3 16 3 33 3 37 6 5 Missed Approach Procedure 2 9 3 36 3 38 3 48 3 49 eis beg E ERR ERR REM De ak re P 6 6 7 1 N soos o Moe EE MEE 2 58 3 11 6 4 7 15 7 39 Naming 1 2 3 18 3 47 ed fd cena deni dens end aen 7 11 7 62 RDY VERIFY 3 110 Navalls 1 2 2 65 3 15 3 91 3 126 Navigate 3 15 7 28 Navigational 4 1 4 2 Liens onan aa 1 3 3 90 LaL 2 67 NDB 2 8 2 66 2 67 2 76 3 8 3 37 6 5 6 7 NDBAWW es de dre ipani iiaei 2 76 NO AFIS FLT PLANS 015 7 3 NO APPROAGH AVAILABLE 2 catia age rds dae mer dared 2 7 No APPROACH Available 2 7 NO 1 2 54 3 45 3 61 NO AUTO LEG 2 76 3 54 3 108 3 109 3 122 3 123 NO COURSE INTERCEPT 2 54 3 61 No Data RECEIVER 2 1 NO DISK dat dun
6. 2 34 3 78 3 85 3 87 Duplicate 3 11 External Waypoints 2 76 3 122 Identifiers 1 2 2 3 2 10 2 38 2 67 2 69 3 3 3 8 3 11 3 17 3 18 3 26 3 100 3 107 3 128 7 4 7 7 7 12 7 13 7 28 7 33 7 35 7 63 7 65 Intersection Waypoint 2 69 Rev 0 GNS X Flight Management System 1 13 Index Obsolete 2 65 2 73 Oceanic Waypoint cem cede 2 50 3 130 Offset Waypoint 2 70 3 51 3 54 3 81 3 100 3 107 3 112 3 123 3 127 3 130 Pilot Entered 3 53 3 123 3 128 Power Off Waypoint senisest dict geek genta Ee 2 72 3 126 Special 2 2222222 3 123 VNAV Profile 3 84 VNAV 2 39 3 73 3 77 3 79 3 83 3 116 Waypoints of STAR 2 7 Weight off wheels 2 48 3 15 3 16 3 104 3 117 2 48 3 104 2 21 2 48 2 49 2 76 3 105 6 1 7 9 7 10 2 14 2
7. 222 22 3 17 ade wae 2 9 AIWA 2 2 9 Upper 2 9 VOR AIWAY ee esr s Qupd 2 9 oae 1 4 2 13 2 14 2 32 2 78 3 67 3 86 Altitude 2 38 3 72 3 84 3 85 Altitude TrajeCtory ie use teasing a Vase Mean 2 34 2 40 Analog Interface e rebors ed ob bye RR TRI eee emer hed od 1 1 2 18 2 75 3 40 3 41 3 45 6 1 APPROACH 1 2 2 3 2 5 2 7 2 12 2 18 2 30 2 38 2 54 2 64 2 75 2 78 3 8 3 10 3 16 3 17 3 20 3 27 3 29 3 32 3 42 3 44 3 49 3 51 3 54 3 61 3 63 3 73 3 75 3 78 3 80 3 82 3 114 3 116 6 1 6 3 6 6 Approach Armed 3 37 3 114 APPROACH 3 35 3 36 3 54 ARING iine rk reri mede 6 1 7 1 7 7 7 19 7 20 7 22 ANIM OG 2 75 3 36 3 37 3 39 3 41 3 44 3 46 3 114 S 2 65 2 68 3 3 3 4 3 54 3 75 3 85 6 1 AsteriSkc Rer eren 1 5 2 69 2 73 2 75 2 78 3 123 7 24 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS Xi Flight Management System 1 1 Index At or Above Below 2 12 2 33 2 37 2 40 3 72 3 73 3 80 6 1 AIG atin cares Saves Goren n
8. NAVIGATION 3 4 Page of 4 NAVIGATION 4 4 Page 4 0f 4 VLF SUBSECTION PAGES VLF SUBSECTION 1 4 Page 1044 VLF SUBSECTION 2 4 Page 2 of 4 VLF SUBSECTION 3 4 Page 30f4 VLF SUBSECTION 4 4 Page 4044 IRS INS SUBSECTION PAGES IRS or INS SUBSECTION 1 2 Page 1 042 IRS SUBSECTION 2 2 Page 2 of 2 VPU SUBSECTION PAGES VPU SUBSECTION 1 4 Page 1 of 4 VPU SUBSECTION 2 4 Page 2 014 VPU SUBSECTION 3 4 Page of 4 VPU SUBSECTION 4 4 Page 4 of 4 GPS SUBSECTION PAGES GPS SUBSECTION 1 3 Page 1 of 3 GPS SUBSECTION 2 3 Page 2 of 3 GPS SUBSECTION 3 3 Page 3 of 3 VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION VNAV KEY VNAV 1 3 Page 1 of 3 First line GNS Xz Flight Management System Table of Contents VNAV MODE Second line 2 32 VNAV 2 3 Page 2 of 3 FLIGHT PLAN WayPoint 2 37 VNAV DATA 1 1 1 071 2 38 VNAV WAYPOINT 1 1 1 041 2 40 AFIS SECTION AFIS KEY 2 42 PLAN
9. 7 9 7 30 Leg Change 2 15 2 17 3 55 3 56 3 59 3 61 3 109 CCP 2 46 3 103 609 3 96 3 98 7 28 7 29 LIMITATIONS oae aene E uenire RE e fima 3 16 7 60 Lifiesofssiglit sec a Ur YR We nb Eu eds 2 27 E 3 22 3 30 3 38 3 65 3 75 7 4 3 37 LON eiat hn eet eme ers 6 4 7 8 7 11 7 18 7 50 7 58 7 64 Longit deMnsett no 3 5 3 53 3 54 3 107 3 112 cians 7 9 7 30 2 14 2 62 3 124 6 4 Magnetic Variation 2 19 2 66 2 70 2 74 3 115 3 118 3 124 3 129 6 7 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS Xi Flight Management System Index gt REPRE dS 2 74 3 119 MAN TAS REQ D acted etate ettet ac e tci 2 74 3 118 Manual Fuel 2 49 3 95 3 102 Manual Ground 2 45 MAX 2 62 ga depre Sun ate uo RE 2 12 2 32 inta equa qv eda a e quide 2 76 2 78 3 8 3 128 MEM Nail 2 79 3 8 3 128 Message Section 2 73 5 2 77 Missed Approach
10. 046 1 P ELMAA 33 N47 08 9 W123 24 5 THIS CHART FOR ILLUSTRATION PUPOSES ONLY 5 HOQUIAM 117 7 At above Figure 3 20 N46 56 8 W124 08 9 Overfly then Intercept Procedures For procedures that require over flying a waypoint Figure 3 21a then a turn to intercept a course to the next waypoint follow these operational requirements for the example following 1 Prior to departure when the first waypoint is designated fly over select MAN leg change mode on NAV Page 1 and press ENTER 2 Select the FMS as the NAV source Accurately fly the runway course or heading 4 Immediately after passing ZH582 do a Direct To ZH554 enter 255 in the DTK field on NAV Page 1 and press ENTER NOTE This is known as the FMS Pseudo Vortac procedure Rev 4 3 17a GNS X1 Flight Management System Nov 04 System Operation ZH582 LSZH LASUN N47 27 7 E008 29 7 Procedure Requirement Fly straight ahead over fly ZH582 left turn intercept 255 course inbound to ZH554 ZH554 N47 24 8 ZH569 E008 18 5 N47 24 3 21 Overfly then DIRECT Procedures For procedures that require over flying a waypoint Figure 3 21b then a Direct To the next waypoint follow these operational require ments for the example following 1 Prior to departure select MAN leg change mode on NAV Page 1 and press ENTER Select the F
11. OK ENTER The intercept messages are Figure 3 103 based on the current aircraft heading and track Once the selected heading has been established the HEADING VECTOR Page may be viewed to determine the inter status If NO COURSE INTERCEPT or ARC INTERCEPT occurs the message light will illuminate and these messages will be displayed on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page To view one of these messages on the HDG Page use the Line Select Key to remove the cursor from the page NOTE BUSY STANDBY may be displayed in yellow momentarily while the intercept is calculated 10 ENT Key DEPRESS to accept data and return to NAV page 1 The cursor is positioned over the Leg Change Mode if the DTK has been entered manually on the Heading Page PROGRAMMING A HEADING INTERCEPT TO THE FINAL APPROACH COURSE This procedure non precision approach may be accomplished using the following steps 1 HDG DEPRESS to dis HEADING VECTOR 1 1 play the HEADING VEC TOR Page 2 Type in the assigned heading Figure 3 104 3 ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor moves to the SUS heading mode field Figure 3 104 Rev 1 Tut GNS Xi Flight Management System 3 61 System Operation 4 BACK Key DEPRESS to display the INTERCEPT HEADERS MEETER prompt Figure 3 105 5 ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor moves to the TO field 6 BACK Key DEPRESS until the FAF waypoint is MISSE displayed 7 ENT Key DEPRESS Fig
12. EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN This procedure gives the pilot three options to exit a Holding Pattern exiting the next time over a holding fix going Direct To the holding fix or performing a Leg Change Rev 0 3 66 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation EXITING HOLDING PATTERN NEXT TIME OVER HOLDING FIX 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION NAVIGATION 1 4 Page 1 2 or 3 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over MANU AL Figure 3 112 3 BACK Key DEPRESS to display AUTO Figure 3 113 Figure 3 112 4 ENT Key DEPRESS The NAVIGATION Page NAVIGATION 1 4 indicates that the aircraft will EXIT HOLD the next time over the holding fix aircraft will complete the loop around the holding pattern Figure 3 114 NOTE The next NX way point information may also appear if the exit is made during Waypoint Alert Figure 3 113 NAVIGATION 1 4 Figure 3 114 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 67 System Operation EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY GOING DIRECT TO HOLDING FIX 1 Key DEPRESS to DIRECT 1 2 display Direct To Page with cursor over current HP Waypoint Figure 3 5 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to display HOLDING PAT TERN Page with cursor over CANCEL Figure 3 116 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to go Direct To current TO Waypoint Holding Fix and cancel Holding Pattern Figure 3 115 HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 EXITING HOLDI
13. will change to reflect the Identifier chosen by the system Figure 3 151 NOTE No prompt is dis played adjacent to the IDENT field when system is in AUTO TUNE mode 5 FREQ RANGE and BRG CHECK that the FREQ of the control head and CDU display agree and that range and bearing are reasonable System Operation TUNE 2 3 Figure 3 151 TRANSPONDER AND ADF KEYBOARD TUNE TUNE Key DEPRESS to display the page with XPDR and ADF Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the 1 2 desired code or frequen cy field Figure 3 152 Code or Frequency INSERT and verify new value Figure 3 153 ENT Key DEPRESS MAN field disappears indicating radios have been keyboard tuned Verify the code or fre quency changes on CDU and control head displays NOTE MAN adjacent to ADF or XPDR indicates that the frequency or code has been entered manually from the control head Rev 0 Oct 96 TUNE 3 3 Figure 3 152 TUNE 3 3 Figure 3 153 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 93 System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 3 94 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation PLANNING PROCEDURES FUEL PLANNING 1 PLAN Key DEPRESS to display FUEL STATUS Page NOTE REMAINING and RESERVE quantities are stored in non volatile memory after system shutdown Upon system turn on VERIFY INPUTS is displayed and REMAINING RESERVE and FLOW values
14. temor te ee he d 3 95 TRIP PLANNING eoim ore Ee 3 96 viii Rev 0 GNS Xz Flight Management System Oct 96 Table of Contents To Enter Manual Groundspeed 3 98 To Return to Automatic Groundspeed 3 98 To update the TRIP PLAN leg to the current TO waypoint with an Active Flight Plan selected 3 100 FLIGHT PLAN FUEL PLANNING 3 100 To Enter Manual Groundspeed 3 102 To Return To Automatic Groundspeed 3 102 To Enter A Manual Fuel Flow 3 102 To Return to Automatic Fuel Flow 3 102 VERIFYING OR CHANGING DATE AND TIME 3 104 VERIFYING OR CHANGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT PARAMETERS 3 105 RESETTING FUEL USED 3 106 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 3 107 PILOT ENTERED LEG CHANGE 3 107 PREVENTING AUTOMATIC LEG CHANGES 3 109 DEAD RECKONING DR TO PRIMARY NAVIGATION MODE VLF RPU ONLY EQUIPPED 3 110 POSITION CHECK AND UPDATE PROCEDURES 3 110 USING a Sensor cse e ER he Carat ree M ees 3 110 Over Known Point 3 111 Using An Offset
15. 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO 3 BACK Key DEPRESS Cursor field displays MAN to inform the pilot of the pending change Figure 3 176 4 ENT Key DE PRESS The cursor disappears and MAN remains in the field confirming that leg changes must be made manually NO Figure 3 176 AUTO LEG CHG mes sage appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page however the MSG light does not illuminate NAVIGATION 1 4 Returning to Automatic Leg Change Mode 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over MAN 3 BACK Key DEPRESS Cursor field displays AUTO to inform the pilot of the pending change 4 ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor disappears and AUTO remains in the field confirming return to the Automatic Leg Change Mode NO AUTO LEG CHG message on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page disappears unless the current TO waypoint is the last waypoint on the Active Flight Plan NOTE Certain HDG Intercept and Pseudo VORTAC Procedures automatically put the leg change mode into MAN The pilot must determine if MAN or AUTO is appropriate then select the desired leg change mode Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 109 System Operation DEAD RECKONING DR TO PRIMARY NAVIGATION MODE VLF RPU ONLY EQUIPPED NOTE System automatically reverts to the Primary Navigation Mode 30 seconds after the NA
16. 13 ENT Key DEPRESS WINDS ALOFT Menu Page appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected If there is no data available for the new identifier it will appear in parentheses TO DELETE TEXT WHEN THERE IS NO DATA ENTRY PROGRESS 14 Place cursor over identifier on AFIS WINDS ALOFT page 15 Depress BACK key the the ENT Key RECALLING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN This procedure allows a previ ously accessed AFIS Flight AFIS MENU Plan and associated weather to be recalled from the Global Data Center lt a RECALL OPTION 1 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page ES NO 2 Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 5 RECALL AFIS FPL Figure 7 63 3 ENT Key DEPRESS RECALL AFIS FPL Page appears Figure 7 63 RECALL AFIS FPL 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor next to FPL field 5 FPL INSERT desired AFIS Flight Plan number 7 64 Figure 7 64 Rev 3 7 36 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 6 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor is positioned over TRANSMIT REQUEST Figure 7 65 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to ini tiate recalling of AFIS Flight Plan from Global Data Center NOTE For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit if DATA LINK DISABLED mes sage appears DEPRESS momentary AFI
17. DEPRESS to position cur 03125 sor over OFF option of AUTO REPORT field Figure 7 111 RUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITR RUICOM 5 BACK Key DEPRESS PRINTER CTRL ON appears in the cursor RCTIUE LINK 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to Figure 7 111 turn ON the AUTO REPORT function Figure 7 112 AFIS OPERATING MODES NOTE f all ground networks are OFF then AUTO REPORT RUTO REPORT j AUTO WX UPDT will be OFF SITR RUICOM PRINTER CTRL RCTIUE LINK Figure 7 112 Rev 3 Oct 02 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 61 AUTO WEATHER UPDATE When the system is initialized AFIS MENU the Automatic Weather Update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown The following procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON lt a a NOUFUONPFE TURNING AUTO WX UPDT OFF 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page Figure 7 113 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8 OPERATING RFIS OPERRTING MODES MODES Figure 7 113 RUTO REPORT RUTO WX UPDT RRINC 3 ENT Key DEPRESS SITR RUICOM PRINTER CTRL 4 Line Select Key n DEPRESS to position cursor over ON option of AUTO Figure 7 114 WX UPDT field Figure 7 114 5 BACK Key DEPRESS ES RFIS OPERRTING MODES OFF appears in the cursor Figure 7 115 RUTO REPORT RUTO WX UPDT RRINC 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn OFF the AUTO WX UPDT PRINTER
18. NOTE The ACTIVE LINK information at the bottom of the ARINC page indicates the network that SITR RUICOM is being serviced at that time 7 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over AUTO option of Figure 7 96 desired ground network Rev 3 AD GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 49 TURNING AUTO OFF NOTE SITA AVICOM are two different ground networks covering different regions The appropriate network is automatically selected for operation based on current Lat Lon location of aircraft if mode is set to AUTO 8 BACK Key DEPRESS until MAN or OFF appears ESI 46 8031 in the cursor UHF LINK CONTROL 9 ENT Key DEPRESS to 9 select MAN or OFF SITR RUICOM NOTE If MAN is selected all other networks will indicate OFF Figure 7 97 10 Repeat Steps 7 through 9 to turn OFF desired ground Figure 7 97 networks or DEPRESS ENT Key to cursor through option fields and return to AFIS OPERATING MODEs Page RETURNING TO AUTO 11 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF or MAN 12 13 14 option of desired ground network BACK Key DEPRESS until AUTO appears in cur RFIS OPERRTING MODES sor Figure 7 98 UHF LINK CONTROL ENT Key DEPRESS to 1 select AUTO option SITR RUICOM Repeat Steps 11 through 13 to return desired ground networks to AUTO or DEPRESS ENT Key to cur sor through option fields and return to AFI
19. To Restore a Sensor a NAV Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 4 b Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over sensor to be restored c BACK Key DEPRESS IN appears to inform the pilot of the pending change d ENT Key DEPRESS to restore the sensor NOTE If GPS is deselected the remaining sensor radial error fields will turn from yellow to green indicating that those sensors are now contributing to the composite position Under normal circumstances the GPS is the sole contributor to the composite position The IRS Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 121 System Operation EXTERNAL WAYPOINT ACCEPTANCE Up to 99 external waypoints may be accepted from an interfaced radar or EFIS system When a waypoint is generat ARRERA y 9 DIRECT ed from this equipment a TO EX 03 DIRECT TO leg change is Em made to that waypoint The generated waypoint will be designated EX 01 to EX 99 Figure 3 194 As the External Waypoint EX is off the Flight Plan it will be separated from the Active Flight Plan waypoint sequence by a fence NO AUTO LEG CHG nal sage will appear on the SYS TEM MESSAGES Page The following procedure may be used to link the EX way point into the Flight Plan sequence 1 Key DEPRESS The display will show Direct To the EX way Figure 3 195 point with the waypoints of the Active Flight Plan listed below Figure 3 1
20. 0196 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 101 System Operation To Enter Manual Groundspeed a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value field b Groundspeed INSERT c ENT Key DEPRESS MAN will appear adjacent to the GS field To Return To Automatic Groundspeed a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value field b BACK Key DEPRESS AUTO appears in the GS field to inform pilot of the pending change and current GS is dis played under the cursor c ENT Key DEPRESS 10 Fuel Flow VERIFY Current aircraft total fuel flow is displayed unless a manual entry is made To Enter A Manual Fuel Flow a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over FLOW value field b Fuel Flow INSERT c ENT Key DEPRESS MAN will appear adjacent to the FLOW field To Return to Automatic Fuel Flow a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over FLOW field b BACK Key DEPRESS AUTO appears adjacent to the FLOW field to inform pilot of the pending change and current flow is displayed under cursor c ENT Key DEPRESS 11 Data CHECK When DIRECT is displayed all data is continu ously updated If data is not continuously updated it will be recal culated each time a The TRIP PLAN Page has changes in FR TO leg or GS Rev 0 3 102 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation b The FUEL PLAN Page is selected c Leg or GS change is ma
21. 2 77 3 11 3 24 ls 2 21 2 79 0 110 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Runway 5 2 68 RUNWAYS RWY reres pe 2 8 2 65 3 33 3 35 3 36 SATOOM dug es 7 19 7 48 7 52 SAID pei aedi M PPM A 2 31 2 50 3 131 3 132 dis ees b edet eee 2 18 3 36 3 39 3 41 3 44 3 46 RP PUE ER 7 3 E E doa 2 8 3 33 3 36 SEL RWY FROM 5 2 8 3 33 3 36 SEL RWY From STAR 2 8 3 33 3 36 Selected Crosstrack cose ee 2 19 3 114 6 6 SUBE 2 1 3 1 3 126 5 2 18 2 75 3 36 3 37 3 54 Sensor Messages 1 4 2 24 2 26 2 73 2 78 3 2 3 15 3 121 3 125 SEQUENCES aa tatiana 2 9 3 42 3 47 Shutdown 1 4 2 12 2 32 2 43 3 3 3 5 3 95 3 129 7 43 7 46 7 48 7 54 7 56 7 58 SID 1 2 2 3 2 4 2 6 2 10 3 8 3 10 3 16 3 23 3 29 3 30 3 73 3 75 3 80 3 82 3 116 6 6 SIGMET zip oe 7 11 7 12 7 62 Signal 2 77 6 6 Signal to noise 2 2 2 25 4 2 4 44 2 2 31 6 6 Software M
22. 3 129 PERFORMING FDE PREDICTION FOR OCEANIC REMOTE OPERATION 3 130 SECTION 4 VLF OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES 4 1 VLF COMMUNICATIONS 4 1 OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK 4 1 OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK Continued 4 2 SECTION 5 DATABASE UPDATE ovis rptu acid des ed needa aerate 5 1 DATA BASE UPDATE PROCEDURES 5 1 TO UPDATE 2455 5 irme Cut ss saps 5 1 WHEN UPDATE IS COMPLETE 5 2 IF UPDATE FAILS o RERO ERES 5 2 X Rev 0 GNS Xz Flight Management System Oct 96 Table of Contents SECTION 6 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 6 1 SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION elu ie retenti apie eee 7 1 Global Data Center GDC 1 2 Data Transfer Unit DTU 7 2 Data Management Unit DMU 7 2 Antenna Switching Unit ASU 7 2 Satellite Communications Unit SCU 7 3 High Power Amplifier Low Noise Amplifier HPA LNA 7 3 Satellite Antenn c tie bk den Pe 7 3 PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS 7 3 AFIS Flight Plan List Page
23. 7 3 Flight Plan Progress NAVIGATION 5 7 4 AFIS Menu Page 7 6 AFIS FLT PLAN Pages 7 7 AFIS FET PEAN rw edi ape 7 7 Fuel and Time Requirements 7 7 AFIS FET P AN Page 2 ea take CR ex ERR RR 7 9 Weights Flight Level and Route 7 9 AFIS FLT PLAN Page 3 22222209004 eee tees 7 10 Operator Inputs oid erre ERE 7 10 AFIS FLT PLAN Page 4 7 11 Performance Bias aseo tpe 7 11 SIGMETS Pages 22222222 ved yeu ve eR ab a Ra 7 11 TERMINAL WEATHER Pages 7 12 TERMINAL WX DATA Pages 7 13 xi Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System Table of Contents WINDS ALOFT Pages 7 13 WINDS ALOFT Data Pages 7 13 RECALL AFIS FPE Page uentis pee URP ELS 7 14 SEND AFIS MESSAGE Page 7 15 PPM MENU Page Preprogrammed Messages 7 17 PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE Pages 7 17 DISPLAY AFIS MSG Page 7 18 OPERATING MODES Page For AFIS Users Equipped with Satellite Data Communications System 7 18 AUT
24. Cross Side FMS True Air Speed Vertical Deviation In addition to the GPS sensor position information is accepted from up to eight navigation sensors such as an optional VLF Omega RPU inertial position sensors or VOR DME radios These navigation sensor inputs can be blended to form a single composite position Accuracy of this composite position is enhanced by using the best Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System 1 1 Description characteristics of each type of sensor For example an Inertial Reference System IRS has excellent short term characteristics while VLF Omega has excellent long term stability The internal GPS sensor has excellent overall characteristics and will usually be the dominant sensor during blending However when RAIM is available the GPS sensor is the sole contributor to the composite position NOTE RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring is a quali ty factor used to determine the accuracy of the GPS position It is an internal function of the GPS receiver and determines the accuracy of it s navigation solution The navigation data base is updated on a 28 day cycle by way of a memory card This card is inserted in a Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA slot located under the lower portion of the alpha keyboard This worldwide database contains over 50 000 waypoints navaids and airports It also contains alti tudes at appropriate waypoints SID STAR AIRWAY a
25. Lateral and Vertical way points listed in order of occurrence with respect to the vertical profile with con straint altitude and applicable waypoint offset where FL Flight Level A At or Above or Below G Glide Path and a blank Figure 2 43 space At constraint Figure 2 43 UNRU 3 3 One of the following system generated VNAV profile points may also appear TOC Indicates the Top of Climb target altitude Indicates the of Descent target altitude Figure 2 44 Figure 2 44 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 37 Page Display Definitions PRESL Indicates the estimated position where the aircraft will arrive at the altitude shown on the Altitude Pre Selector Field does not appear unless the system is configured for an altitude preselector and the aircraft is flying toward this altitude Figure 2 44 A discontinuity in the flight plan that separates the missed approach waypoint from the rest of the approach Figure 2 43 No Auto Leg change will occur beyond this point WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS May consist of from one to UNRU 1 X six alphanumeric characters If more identifiers are present than can be listed on this page subsequent pages will list the remaining waypoints Figure 2 45 NOTE Waypoints cannot be added to the active flight plan from the VNAV section Figure 2 45 Enter new waypoints on ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page ERASE Used to era
26. ed in the VPU database the identifier will be dis played and the KEY annunciation will shift to the identifier line Figure 3 148 6 RANGE and BRG CHECK NOTE MAN adjacent to the FREQ field indicates that TUNE 2 3 NAU 1 KEY a FREG 115 58 10 0 302 MAN 114 20 35 0 035 Figure 3 148 the frequency has been entered manually from the NAV control head Auto Tune Method Certain control heads will require placement in the Remote Mode at the control head in order to recognize the tuning data from the GNS XL Only NAV DME radios may be placed in the AUTO TUNE mode DME HOLD Manual Control Head Tuning Keyboard Tuning or use of the AUTO MAN Switch will take the GNS XL out of the Auto Tune Mode 1 TUNE Key DEPRESS to display the NAV TUNE Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to place cur sor over IDENT or FREQ field of NAV 1 or 2 Figure 3 149 3 BACK Key DEPRESS AUTO is displayed in place of KEY or MAN Figure 3 150 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to place system in AUTO TUNE Mode After a brief pause the CDU and control head information TUNE 2 3 NRU 1 KEY FREQ RANGE BRG NRU 2 FREQ PRESET BRG NRU 1 FREQ RANGE BRG NRU 2 FREQ PRESET BRG ngaa 10 0 302 MAN 114 20 35 0 035 Figure 3 149 TUNE 2 3 RUTO MAN 114 20 35 0 Figure 3 150 Rev 0 3 92 GNS Xi Flight Management System
27. 2 78 3 37 3 86 Displacement 2 18 7 7 7 43 0 Oct 96 GNS Xi Flight Management System r3 aiU 2 02 3 64 3 66 6 4 DME Arc 2 4 2 8 2 10 2 13 2 15 2 17 2 19 3 33 3 39 3 41 3 44 3 47 3 60 6 1 DNE R 2 34 2 41 3 74 6 2 7 24 7 42 ANGIE aes da a RE 2 19 ger 3 41 DTK 2 14 2 45 2 54 3 14 3 40 3 45 3 49 3 51 3 52 3 54 3 62 3 99 3 107 6 2 dl 1 1 2 32 2 72 2 76 3 39 3 46 3 122 6 2 ELEV e RR RR TERERRRE CARA GR DOS 2 66 6 2 siu 3 60 ENRTE REY GERE AG XP RR RR d e Red 2 18 6 2 3 TL 2 79 3 125 ENTR SET ADG cascada utere de diatur dre etr dede nua 2 79 3 125 EMOS D NE E UE E 1 6 3 118 E MERC EE 2 34 2 40 6 2 Estimated Fuel Remaining 2 18 Estimated Position Uncertainty 2 29 Estimated Time Enroute 2 4 2 11 2 14 2 16 2 17 2 34 2 39 2 45 2 78 3 44 3 47 3 85 3 86 3 99 3 114 6 2 7 6 7 8 7 28 Estimated Time of Arrival ETA 2 4 2 11 2 13 2 15 2 18 2 44 3 49 3 72 3 99 3 115 6 2 7 5 7 28 Estimated Time of
28. 6 6 I 2 23 Top of Climb 06 2 33 2 34 2 37 3 72 3 04 6 6 Top of Descent TOD 2 33 2 34 2 37 2 39 2 78 3 72 3 78 3 84 6 6 TOtANFUCl sting state he qon etant dr tun Per 2 42 2 47 3 102 7 5 Track Angle 2 18 2 20 6 6 Trajeto 2 34 2 40 ES 2 39 3 71 6 7 TrarsCelVBl sc 2 ch over ieee sens 7 2 1 3 Transition Level 2 38 3 71 3 73 3 80 6 7 3 35 MT 4 1 7 2 Transponder 2 57 3 93 6 7 2 18 3 39 3 41 3 44 3 46 6 7 True Airspeed 5 2 19 2 48 2 62 2 74 2 76 3 16 3 104 3 117 6 6 7 6 TUNS 25e 2 55 2 57 3 28 7 19 7 22 7 59 U Mcr 2 9 Unavailable 2 30 2 31 2 51 3 126 3 133 UNGER M 2 29 Eu 2 21 2 24 Rev 0 1 12 GNS Xz Flight Management System Oct 96 UPDA dta 7 61 UPDASXAXX 7 4 Update 1 5 2 20 2 32 2 42 2 43 2 63 2 75 3 2 3 95 3 100 3 103 3 105 3 110 3 113 3 117 3 118 3 123 3 127 5 1 7
29. CH 3 The station identifier and frequency for the third station that is being received This frequency is not displayed on the control head and is automatically tuned by the system RNG Same as for CH 2 NOTE When the DM441B DME dedicated DM441B or dedicated DME42 is configured the VPU SUBSECTION 3 4 page is different The bearing information is suppressed and DME is annunciated instead of NAV VPU SUBSECTION 4 4 Page 4 of 4 Pressing the NXT Key again will display the fourth VPU SUBSEC TION Page and the following can be observed If the VPU has multi ple channel DME inputs VPU SUBSECTION 4 4 appears and dis plays NAV 2 data The page appears the same as VPU SUBSEC TION 3 4 Rev 1 2 28 GNS X1 Flight Management System 98 Page Display Definitions GPS SUBSECTION PAGES Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4 4 Page if AFIS is installed in the system access is through the NAVIGATION 4 5 Page by press ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the GPS sensor then pressing ENT GPS SUBSECTION 1 3 Page 1 of 3 See Figure 2 35 POS The current composite posi tion latitude and longitude computed in degrees min utes and hundredths of min utes GPS The current GPS position This information is only displayed when GPS is in the NAV mode DIF GPS SUBSECTION 1 3 Figure 2 35 The difference between the composite position and sensor computed position in degrees minutes and hundredth
30. Figure 2 12 SELECT ENDING WPT Select the desired ending waypoint on the airway by moving the cur sor up or down and depress ENT Figure 2 12 Rev 1 5 Jul 98 GNS XL Flight Management System 2 9 Page Display Definitions ACTIVE FPL Flight Plan Page FR ACTIVE FPL Current FROM waypoint May also display DIRECT PSEUDO VORTAC DME ARC or PROCEDURE TURN Figure 2 13 lt lt DEPART in ARRIVE Current TO waypoint APPROACH Figure 2 13 l ve Figure 2 13 Waypoint Identifiers Up to 100 waypoint identifiers may be placed on the Active Flight Plan Pages An identifier may be used more than once on the same Flight Plan Indented Waypoints indicate a SID STAR or APPROACH Procedure is part of the Flight Plan Figure 2 13 DFW HP Holding Pattern indi ACTIVE FPL cates a holding pattern is ie programmed at a particular waypoint Figure 2 14 PT Procedure Turn indi cates a procedure turn is programmed at a particular SENE waypolnt APPROACH fence separating the current FR TO leg from the Figure 2 14 originally selected Active Flight Plan when the TO waypoint is not on the original Flight Plan Also sepa rates non continuous Flight Plan segments Figure 2 13 No Auto Leg change will occur to waypoints that appear after the fence This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the active flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint
31. Flight Plan status con meee tinue with Step 6 APPRORCH b to INVERT and transfer the Stored Flight Plan Figure 3 16 with waypoint sequence Rev 3 oan GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 13 System Operation reversed to Active Flight Plan status press the BACK Key to display INVERT Figure 3 17 c 6 ENTKey DEPRESS KDTW 7 ACTIVE FPL CON ES DEPART FIRM Observe that the Stored Flight Plan trans ee ferred to the ACTIVE FPL Page as SELECTED or INVERTED Figure 3 18 FLIGHT PLAN 5 3 3 Figure 3 17 INITIAL LEG SELECTION ACTIVE FPL 1 3 KSNA KDTW An initial From To Leg or MUSEL Direct To Leg must be estab HEMET lished order for the system TRM to provide guidance along g the Flight Plan From the ACTIVE FPL Page the fol ARRIVE lowing procedure is used APPROACH 1 NAV Key DEPRESS Figure 3 18 2 FR Waypoint VERIFY The first waypoint on the Active Flight Plan will appear in the FR field To change the FR waypoint insert the desired identifier 3 ENT Key DEPRESS The next waypoint in the Active Flight Plan sequence will appear in the TO field 4 Waypoint VERIFY To change the TO waypoint insert the desired identifier 5 ENT Key DEPRESS NAVIGATION 6 DIS DTK CHECK for BG reasonableness Figure 3 19 DIS If this leg selection is part of ae an active flight plan involving GS Oceanic Remote operation WIND u
32. Latitude INSERT or 5 first then degrees minutes and hundredths 6 characters b ENT Key DEPRESS c Longitude INSERT E or W first then degrees minutes and hundredths 7 characters ENT Key DEPRESS Waypoint Sequence DIRECT 1 2 VERIFY that the way point is in the proper location Figure 3 92 8 ENT Key DEPRESS Display automatically advances to NAVIGA TION Page 1 NOTE If Direct To a pilot entered waypoint is desired Figure 3 92 a latitude and longitude entry may be required Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 53 System Operation A Latitude Insert N or S first then degrees minutes and hun dreaths 6 characters B Longitude Insert E or W first then degrees minutes and hundredths 7 characters If Direct To an offset waypoint is desired the radial and distance entry from the parent waypoint may be required NOTE If ENT Key is not depressed prior to leaving DIRECT Page the waypoint identifier will not appear on the Active Flight Plan the aircraft will not proceed DIRECT TO this waypoint and will need to be re entered 9 DIS DTK CHECK NOTE A Direct To function may also be accomplished from NAVI GATION Page 1 2 or 3 by placing the cursor over the TO waypoint and typing in the desired waypoint if required Depress the ENT Key and the system will proceed Direct To the selected waypoint If the selected waypoint was not on the active FPL a fence
33. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over DIS or ALT field 8 BERRY Figure 3 184 pisi 3 BACK Key DEPRESS to display desired option Figure 3 184 Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 115 System Operation 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to select option Figure 3 185 SELECTING NAV PAGE ETA OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION NAV Page 1 2 or 3 The pilot can view the esti mated time of arrival or alti tude constraint of TO way point on the NAV Pages Selecting ALT Display 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display the NAVIGA TION Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the ETA field Figure 3 186 3 BACK Key DEPRESS ALT appears in cursor 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to display Altitude Constraint Figure 3 187 3 116 ACTIVE FPL FR RW19R T0 ORD lt DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH Figure 3 185 NAVIGATION 1 4 DIRECT TO BDF Figure 3 186 NAVIGATION 1 4 DIRECT T0 BDF Figure 3 187 GNS X1 Flight Management System 05 22 Rev 0 Oct 96 System Operation To Return to ETA 5 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the alti tude constraint field BACK Key DEPRESS ETA appears in cursor 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to display ETA INITIALIZATION ENROUTE VLF RPU ONLY This procedure allows the pilot to initialize the system in flight when only VLF is available If the aircraft has los
34. MESSAGE KEY ANNUNCIATOR MSG 1 4 ALPHA KEYS rep t punte eee det a deg adis 1 5 NUMERIGKEYS ova siete be REI PER EEG 1 5 HOLD KEY et dario tte t Dt dde peer ee tate Gre 1 5 ee tb sies 1 6 SPAGE SP KEYS upset pana et EE TERRE ns 1 6 ENTER ENT octets en ee a 1 6 DISPLAY SELECTOR KEYS 1 6 PREVIOUS PRV KEY 1 7 NEXTANXT KEY isis ete Re e or RE Ree nis andes demere 1 7 EINE SELECT KEYS an eins ERE edes 1 7 UP DOWNIKEYS RECUERDE 1 7 COEORS 4 Rr D Pn 1 8 SECTION 2 PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS 2 1 PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER UP 2 1 SELF TEST PAGE oe acre roe ma nage E RD he 2 1 INITIALIZATION PAGE 2 1 FLIGHT PLAN SECTION FPL KEY 2 2 FLIGHT PLAN PAGES treten P Ee eens 2 2 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System Table of Contents FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 1 Page 1of1 FLIGHT PLAN X 1 1 1of1 NAVIGATION SECTION NAV KEY NAVIGATION PAGES NAVIGATION 1 4 Page 1 0f 4 NAVIGATION 2 4 Page 2014
35. The FROM waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the first waypoint origin on the selected flight plan The FROM waypoint is usually replaced by DIRECT Figure 2 53 TO The TO waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the last waypoint destination on the selected flight plan Figure 2 53 GS The ground speed in knots is input automatically when the ground speed is valid or can be input manually which is indicated by MAN GS value and MAN will be yellow Figure 2 53 FLOW The fuel flow in pounds or kilograms is input automatically from fuel flow indicators transmitters or can be inserted manually which is indi cated by MAN Figure 2 53 LEG FUEL The amount of fuel in pounds or kilograms used on the current FROM TO leg or from the aircraft s present position to the current TO waypoint based on groundspeed fuel flow and distance Figure 2 53 Rev 0 2 46 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions FPL FUEL The total amount of fuel anticipated to be consumed to the last way point on the flight plan that precedes a fence This calculated value is based on the current fuel flow groundspeed values and distance Figure 2 53 REM Appears only if a DIRECT TO leg is displayed It indicates the amount of fuel remaining overhead at destination or the last way point on the Flight Plan that precedes a fence under current condi tions This value
36. 1 7 3 7 4 7 7 7 12 7 18 7 19 7 21 7 24 7 29 7 34 7 43 7 47 7 54 7 56 7 57 7 60 7 65 ice n E e deos 7 24 USING 2 77 3 119 3 126 2 30 VANS code dee dee 2 48 3 104 WAMIATIONS 1 2 5 does 7 15 lec 3 39 3 44 Velocity 5 2 20 2 30 3 112 3 113 3 118 3 122 7 6 7 14 Linie PP 1 5 2 42 3 95 7 23 VERIFY 2 74 3 110 3 117 VERT D 2 32 2 34 2 39 6 7 Vertical 1 1 2 33 3 74 3 78 3 83 3 85 3 114 6 7 Vertical 2 40 3 84 VNAV Direct Moka eae wees 3 81 3 83 VNAV ertt hri 2 32 2 37 VNAV 2 12 a 7 28 cuu uu 2 78 W Warm up 1 4 Scere toe 2 74 2 75 2 77 3 37 3 63 Waypoint to waypoint 3 75 Waypoints Database 2 73 3 107 3 108 3 129 Descent Reference
37. 10 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to verify display 3 GMT INSERT if required hours and minutes If the GMT is incorrect update manually 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to verify display 5 MSG Key DEPRESS to verify Database Expiration Date and review other System Messages Continue depressing MSG Key to review SENSOR MESSAGES and to return to INITIALIZA TION Page Rev 2 3 2 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation INITIALIZATION POSITION The Initialization Position for non IRS equipped systems should be the departure runway threshold For IRS equipped systems the ramp or alignment LAT LONG position should be inserted as Initialization Position NOTE Once the INITIALIZATION Page appears and after a brief delay the IDENT field normally prefills with the ICAO ident of the air port closest to the aircraft position at shut down provided the air craft s real position and system position were the same at system shutdown The Departure Position may be entered using either Option 1 Using the IDENT field for non IRS equipped systems Option 2 Using the POS field Option 1 Using the IDENT field for non IRS equipped systems Entering Alpha and Numeric Identifiers on the Initialization Page 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the IDENT field if required Enter letters of the departure airport s ICAO identifier Enter let ters and numbers of the departure airport if it is a non ICAO iden tif
38. 17 3 118 7 6 7 13 7 14 7 19 7 22 7 35 WPT MEMIPUUL 2 78 3 8 3 128 WPTS ch RASA RA EAE 2 69 3 33 aa neoe 2 23 4 1 eri PREMO ERES 2 5 2 14 3 7 3 44 3 46 3 66 1 1 2 57 3 93 6 7 2 18 2 32 3 114 6 7 Y Z Rev 0 1 14 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Honeywell International Inc One Technology Center 23500 West 105th Street Olathe Kansas 66061 FAX 913 791 1302 Telephone 913 712 0400 006 08852 0000 Rev 4 Nov 04 Honeywell
39. 2 7 30 AFIS Flight Plan Page 3 7 31 AFIS Flight Plan Page 4 7 31 SIGMETS Review update 7 32 Terminal Weather Menu Data update and Review 7 33 To insert a new identifier 7 34 To delete text when there is no data entry in progress 7 34 Winds Aloft Menu Data update and Review 7 34 To insert a new identifier 7 35 To delete text when there is no data entry in progress 7 36 Recalling AFIS Flight Plan 7 36 Recall Option 1 7 36 Recall Option 2 7 37 Sending a Text Message or pde 7 38 To Return to the AFIS Menu Page 7 40 Sending building a Preprogrammed Message 7 41 Editing entering a Preprogrammed Message 7 42 Continue Sending Message 7 42 AFIS Messages Review 7 43 Selecting Operating Modes For AFIS Users Equipped with Satellite Data Communications System 7 43 Auto Reporting met 7 43 Turning AUTO REPORT au
40. 201 Figure 3 200 SPECIAL WPT Rev 0 3 126 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 8 BACK Key DEPRESS to return to HOLD Page NOTE An Offset Waypoint amp OFF can be input with a radial based on the LAST TK value and distance calculated from the LAST GS value as well as the time elapsed from power off provided significant changes to aircraft track or groundspeed have not been made If the aircraft has turned or if the speed has changed the pilot should esti mate the track and distance traveled since the loss of power 9 Offset Waypoint IDENT INSERT 10 ENT Key DEPRESS OFFSET WPT 1 1 11 Recorded or Estimated Radial INSERT LAST TK value or averaged value Figure 3 202 12 Distance INSERT cal culated distance in NM and tenths 13 ENT Key DEPRESS 14 Waypoint Coordinates VERIFY for reasonability 15 ENT Key DEPRESS 16 DIF CHECK If Update Desired 17 ENT Key DEPRESS The VLF RPU sensor and the VPU interfaced to the updated CDU are updated as well as the com posite position If Update Not Desired 18 NAV PLAN FPL TUNE VNAV HDG or Key DEPRESS to cancel the HOLD Figure 3 202 CREATING CHANGING PILOT ENTED PERSONALIZED WAYPOINTS A personalized waypoint may be created by entering a non NDB Nav Data Base waypoint identifier and inserting the desired position coordinates on the Waypoint Page Rev 0
41. 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option of PRINTER CTRL field 5 ENTER Key DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO PRINT MSG 7 BACK Key DEPRESS to toggle Auto Print Message field between YES and NO 8 ENTER Key DEPRESS to set Auto Print Message field to its present value YES or NO AUTO PRINT WX The Auto Print Weather field is used to select or deselect the auto matic printing of weather If AUTO PRINT WX is set to YES then weather will automatically be printed upon receipt If AUTO PRINT WX is set to NO then weather will not be printed upon receipt 1 AFIS key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES ENTER Key DEPRESS 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option of PRINTER CTRL field 5 ENTER Key DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO Rev 3 7 56 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 PRINT WX 7 BACK Key DEPRESS to toggle Auto Print Weather field between YES and NO 8 ENTER Key DEPRESS to set Auto Print Weather field to its present value YES or NO PRINTING PROCEDURES PRINTING FLIGHT PLANS Following is a step by step procedure to print a flight plan in the air craft Note The aircraft must be specially REGISTERED with the Gl
42. 4 WINDS ALOFT Figure 7 59 Figure 7 59 Rev 0 7 34 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to display WINDS ALOFT Menu Page Figure 7 60 AFIS WINDS ALOFT 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over the desired Wind identifier 5 ENT Key DEPRESS If the desired identifier is enclosed in parentheses Figure 7 60 pressing the ENT Key will cause it to blink indicating no weather information is available for that identifier TRANSMIT REQUEST If no identifiers are displayed they may be inserted by pressing the Line Select Key which will create a cursor over the first blank identifi er position INSERT an identifier Usually a VOR or intersection 6 ENT Key DEPRESS 7 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST 8 ENT Key DEPRESS Identifiers listed on this page will be trans mitted to the ground via the data link NOTE Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple WINDS ALOFT requests 9 If there are identifiers upon depressing the ENT Key the WINDS ALOFT Data Pages pertaining to the selected identifier appear Figure 7 61 10 Wind information _ REVIEW Figure 7 61 TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER 11 Press Line Select Key to position the cursor over the identifier field 12 IDENTIFIER INSERT The data text fields will go blank Rev 3 aw GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 35
43. Airport the mes sage NO SIDS AVAILABLE appears and the ident field flashes Depress the FPL Key to return to the Active Flight Plan 5 Line Select Key DE PRESS to position the cursor over the desired SID if required Figure 3 23 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to select SID NOTE Cursor moves to the first TRANSITION identifier on the list The TRANSITION Figure 3 23 field is highlighted in yellow 7T Line Select Key DEPRESS to position DEPRRTURE cursor over the desired TRANSITION if required Figure 3 24 8 ENT Key DEPRESS to select TRANSITION NOTE If the SID and TRAN SITION are runway depen dent and a runway has not 5 prefilled the cursor moves to Figure deas Rev 4 iod GNS XL Flight Management System 3 19 System Operation DEPARTURE KSEA RUNWAY 9 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired runway Figure 3 25 10 ENT Key DEPRESS to select RUNWAY DEPARTURE KSER 11 Departure SID Waypoints REVIEW Figure 3 26 then DEPRESS the ENT UU EIE Key to select the SID and insert it into Active Flight Plan The display will automatically return to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page Figure 3 26 REVIEWING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the DEPART field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page WAYPOINTS OF SID 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to review SID Fig
44. CDI sensitivity is as follows Enroute 5NM full scale deflection Terminal 1NM full scale deflection Approach 0 3NM full scale deflection Rev 0 2 18 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions SXTK The selected crosstrack distance entered by the pilot to provide steering to an offset course parallel to the desired track 99 9 NM maximum Figure 2 22 NAVIGATION 3 4 Page 3 of 4 Pressing the NAV Key again will display the third NAVIGATION Page and the following can be observed FR DIRECT HOLD PROCEDURE TURN DME ARC Same as NAVIGATION 1 4 TO AT AR HP PT Same as NAVIGATION 1 4 NX Holding Status Same as NAVIGATION 1 4 DRIFT NAVIGATION 3 4 The drift angle in whole degrees left or right of air craft heading compared to current track Figure 2 23 VAR The magnetic variation value in whole degrees computed automatically between N70 00 0 and S 60 00 0 latitude d Manual variation can be entered and overrides the automatic computation Manual entry of variation is required north of N70 00 0 and south of S60 00 0 latitude MAN will be displayed in the VAR field after a manual entry is made See Section 3 for procedures Figure 2 23 TAS The aircraft true airspeed in knots received from the Air Data Computer If TAS is manually inserted MAN will be displayed Figure 2 23 NOTE The maximum enterable manual TAS is 850 knots The TAS field is enterable only if aird
45. Definitions ADVISORY continued System Message Explanation DR HDG TAS DR TK TAS DR TK GS DR HDG GS EXT WPT REJECT HIGH HOLDING SPD IRS ONLY gt 30 MIN IRS ONLY gt 10 MIN MEM FAIL NAV RDY NDB FAIL NDB OUTDATED NDB WW EXP 270CT NO AUTO LEG CHG The system is in the Dead Reckoning DR Mode and is using one of these four combi nations of inputs to compute position CDU has rejected an external waypoint input from a radar or EFIS Maximum 99 external waypoints received or 999 waypoints stored During Holding or when system is about to enter a Holding pattern TAS is high enough to cause the aircraft to stray outside the boundaries of protected airspace System has been operating enroute in IRS Only Mode for more than 30 minutes The message annunciator will not illuminate if the aircraft is Weight On Gear System has been operating in the terminal area in IRS Only Mode for more than 10 minutes The message annunciator will not illuminate if the aircraft is Weight On Gear Non volatile memory has failed at least par tially The system is ready to be placed in the Primary Navigation Mode Message annun ciator will not illuminate This message is displayed only when GPS is unavailable and another senbeor is being used Database has failed Expiration date of the database has been reached Database should be updated Worldwide WW or North American European NA database and expi
46. ENT message appears Figure 3 100 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to select TO Waypoint and return to NAVIGATION Page 1 The cursor may be positioned over the Leg Change Mode field NOTE If the Desired Track Figure 3 100 is changed Pseudo VORTAC is programmed If the DTK entry positions the aircraft on the FROM or far side of the TO waypoint the Leg Change Mode displayed on NAVIGATION Page 1 switches to MAN otherwise it remains in AUTO The pilot must determine if MAN or AUTO is appropriate OK ENTER CANCELING HEADING SELECT MODE Initiate a DIRECT TO procedure using the gt and ENT Keys which immediately cancels the commanded heading or perform the follow ing 1 HDG Key DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over HDG SELECT BACK Key DEPRESS until CANCEL is displayed ENT Key DEPRESS to cancel Heading Vector and return to NAVIGATION Page 1 NOTE The system may turn the aircraft to intercept the current TO FROM leg at up to a 45 angle PROGRAMMING AN INTERCEPT 1 HDG Key DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with cursor over the HDG field 2 Heading INSERT desired Heading in whole degrees preceded by R or L if applicable to indicate a turn direction NOTE R or L should be used for a heading change greater than 180 from the present heading indicates the system is operating in the true heading mode Rev 1 rae GNS
47. ES RFIS Plans stored on the disk FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 4 Figure 7 1 NO DISK Either no disk was inserted into the DTU prior to power up or the DTU cannot read the disk READING DISK The DTU is transferring data from the disk to the DMU AIRCRAFT TYPE The Global designated aircraft type as trans ferred from the disk or obtained by an Update or Recall procedure Figure 7 1 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 3 NOTE Once the system is initialized the page appears between the Active Flight Plan Page and the first GNS X FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page AFIS FLT PLAN LIST A list of AFIS generated Flight Plan ori AFIS gin destination identifiers with FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 4 date of issue Figure 7 2 NOTE Additional pages can be accessed when more than 6 Flight Plans are listed by DEPRESSING the FPL Key to access page LOADING FLIGHT PLAN system is loading select Figure 7 2 ed AFIS Flight Plan REPLACE ACTIVE FPL Allows a selected AFIS Flight Plan to replace an existing Active Flight Plan UPDA XXXX Where is an ident Indicates a Flight Plan Update for an active Flight Plan has occurred FLIGHT PLAN PROGRESS NAVIGATION PAGE 5 HEC KVNY Current FROM and TO waypoints Figure 7 3 The FROM waypoint can be NAVIGATION 5 5 replaced by DIR TO for DIRECT TO FL AFIS planned flight level for leg being flown NOTE Field is dashes when aircraft is pro
48. FLIGHT PLAN LIST the cursor will automatically be positioned over the first matching Flight Plan 1 2 2 GNS X1 Flight Management System 98 Page Display Definitions FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 1 There are seven pages pos sible with a maximum of 56 flight plans stored in non volatile memory Each stored flight plan s origin and destination points are listed in alphabetical order Figure 2 3 A new FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page is created when the Figure 2 3 previous page has eight flight plan origin destination pairs on it Using the PRV or NXT Key pages through the Flight Plan List subsection Figure 2 3 FLIGHT PLAN X 1 1 Page 1 of 1 X can be Flight Plan num FLIGHT PLAN 6 1 1 bers 1 through 56 Figure Ie 2 4 This stored flight plan page is accessed through the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page by pressing the Line Select DEPART ARRIVE Key corresponding to the desired flight plan number thus placing the cursor over that number then pressing ENT Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Waypoint Identifiers Waypoint identifiers may consist of from one to six alphanumeric characters Up to 50 waypoint identifiers may be placed on each stored Flight Plan An identifier may be used more than once on the same Flight Plan Figure 2 4 Other indications can be as follows Indented Waypoints Indicates a SID STAR or APPROACH pro cedure is part of the Flight Plan Figure 2 4 Rev 0
49. FPL CONFIRM Updated Flight Plan becomes the Active Flight Plan Figure 7 129 Figure 7 128 Rev 3 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 67 UPDATING SIGMETS 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 2 SIG METS Figure 7 130 TO 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to display first SIGMETS Page RFIS SIGMETS 1 2 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over FROM field 5 Desired Identifier INSERT 6 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE Parentheses appear indicating a request has not yet fm been sent or received TO Figure 7 130 RFIS SIGMETS 1 2 7 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over TO field 8 Desired Identifier INSERT 9 ENT Key DEPRESS 10 Line Select Key Figure 7 131 DEPRESS to position cur sor over TRANSMIT REQUEST Figure 7 131 11 ENT Key DEPRESS to ini tiate a SIGMET update NOTE When an updated SIG MET is received it replaces all previous SIGMETS If NAT is entered as option a North Atlantic Tracks update is sent Figure 7 132 Wait for DATA CENT AK if sending multiple requests RFIS SIGMETS 1 26 TO Figure 7 132 7 68 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Rev 3 Oct 02 UPDATING WEATHER 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to dis AFIS MENU play AFIS MENU Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 3 TERMINAL WX Figur
50. FUEL REMAINING quantity and input for basic operating weight and PAYLOAD input FPL LDWT Flight planned landing weight of aircraft at des tination as transferred from disk or received via the data link FLT LVL Planned flight level s as transferred from disk or received via the data link ROUTE Planned route of flight as computed by Global Data Center and transferred from disk or received via the data link NOTE Pressing the AFIS or NXT Key displays the remainder of the route up to 50 waypoints AFIS FLT PLAN 2 4 Figure 7 11 UPDATE Waypoint identifier defining position of aircraft at time of last update request Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 9 AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 3 OPERATOR INPUTS FROM Origin airport identifier as transferred from disk or received via the data link or UPDATE waypoint defining position of air craft at time of last update AFIS FLT PLAN 3 4 request Figure 7 12 TO Destination waypoint trans ferred from disk or received via the data link DEP TIME Estimated time of departure in GMT This field changes to UPDATE TIME when a flight plan is updated and indicates time of issued update Figure 7 13 BASIC OP WT AFIS planned basic operating weight as trans AFIS FLT PLAN 3 4 ferred from disk or received via the data link PAYLOAD AFIS planned pay load weight as transferred from disk or received via data link RAMP FUEL AFIS planne
51. Figure 2 39 REQUIRED FPM Required vertical speed in feet per minute to make the altitude constraint based on current ground speed UP indicates a positive vertical speed and DN indicates a negative vertical speed Figure 2 40 This field will display TOD FPM DN when the Vertical TO Waypoint is the Top of Descent and indicate the descent target vertical speed Figure 2 39 ACTUAL FPM Actual vertical speed in feet per minute UP indicates a positive vertical speed and DN indicates a negative vertical speed Figures 2 39 and 2 40 VERT DEV Vertical deviation of aircraft from this descent path in feet HIGH indicates aircraft is above the path Figure 2 40 LOW indicates aircraft is below path CLIMB GRAD xxx NM is displayed during CLIMB mode to indicate current aircraft climb performance in feet per nautical mile Figure 2 38 NOTE VERT DEV data field is dashes if the ETE to descent path inter cept is greater than one minute This line will be blank if no FPA is pro grammed at descent reference waypoint In this case TOD will be deter mined using the default FPA from the VNAV DATA Page However the FPA must still be entered for the system to provide a path 0 2 34 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions DATA A prompt to access the VNAV DATA Page by placing the cursor over the DATA field and pressing the ENT Key Figure 2 40 Figures 2 41 and 2 42 further illustrate the me
52. Figure 2 38 UNAU 1 3 CRUISE FL358 FL35 RANGE NM 1214 4 ETE FPM DN ACTUAL FPM UP VERT DEU DATA Figure 2 39 UNAU 1 3 PATH DESCENT t 5 EST CROSSING REQUIRED FPM DN ACTUAL FPM DN VERT DEU HIGH IDATA Figure 2 40 One of the following system generated VNAV profile points may also appear as the TO waypoint TOC Indicates the Top of Climb target altitude This point becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint once the aircraft has passed the final climb constraint waypoint and is climbing Figure 2 40 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X Flight Management System 2 33 Page Display Definitions amp TOD Indicates the Top of Descent target altitude where the aircraft should begin its descent in order to arrive at the Descent Reference Waypoint at the required altitude Figure 2 39 NOTE If no Descent Reference Waypoint with crossing altitude is pro grammed the system will use the arrival airport elevation to fix the TOD as long as an airport is the last waypoint on the Active FPL EST CROSSING Altitude trajectory computed by the system to the Vertical TO waypoint based on current groundspeed and vertical speed Figure 2 40 This field will display RANGE NM in miles and tenths when the Vertical TO Waypoint is a TOD or TOC profile point Figure 2 39 ETE The estimated time enroute in hours minutes and tenths from the aircraft present position to the Vertical TO Waypoint TOC or TOD
53. Flight Management System Revision History and Instructions Manual GNS XL Operator s Manual Revision 1 July 1998 Part Number 006 08852 0000 This revision consists of the following Add Company Routes vi 2 2 3 36 1 3 36 2 1 2 Add Dedicated DME Interface 2 57 Add Approach Note 3 36 3 Add Waypoint Type Identifier 2 54 3 48 3 49 3 62 Revise Procedure Turn 3 41 3 42 3 43 3 44 Remove Hot Key 3 57 3 58 3 61 Add Fuel Use Reset Function ix 2 48 3 105 3 106 Typographic Administrative Corrections Front Covers 2 1 2 4 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 27 2 28 2 79 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 40 3 42 3 43 3 45 3 59 3 60 7 12 7 15 7 20 7 22 7 54 7 55 7 56 7 57 7 58 7 59 Back Covers R 1 Rev 1 Jus GNS XL Flight Management System Revision History and Instructions Manual GNS X_ Operator s Manual Revision 0 October 1996 Part Number 006 08852 0000 This revision is a complete manual revision and supersedes previous revi sion level manuals Superseded manuals should be discarded R 1 Rev 0 Feb 96 GNS XL Flight Management System Table of Contents SECTION 1 DESCRIPTION 2 522 e re me eee des e on dd 1 1 OVERVIEW b VE PES 1 1 GENERAL TERMS REICH v ee ga 1 3 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 1 4 ON cart utatur ineo La 1 4 BRIGHTNESS BRT 1 4
54. GNS Xi Flight Management System VHF OMEGA Transmitter sites SECTION 4 VLF OMEGA TRANSMITTER SITES VLF COMMUNICATIONS STATIONS LETTER DESIGNATION WASHINGTON WSH Jim Creek Washington USA AUSTRALIA AUS Northwest Cape Australia ANTHORNE ANT Anthorne England MAINE MNE Cutler Maine USA HAWAII HAW Lualualei Hawaii USA GREAT BRITAIN GBR Rugby England or PUERTO RICO PTR Puerto Rico ANNAPOLIS ANN Annapolis Maryland USA OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK LETTER DESIGNATION NORWAY NOR Aldra Norway LIBERIA LIB Liberia Africa HAWAII HAW Haiku Hawaii USA NORTH DAKOTA DAK LaMoure North Dakota USA LA REUNION REN Reunion Island Indian Ocean Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 4 VHF OMEGA Transmitter sites OMEGA NAVIGATIONAL NETWORK CONTINUED ARGENTINA ARG Gulfo Nuevo Argentina AUSTRALIA AUS Darriman Australia JAPAN JPN Tsushima Japan 4 2 GNS XL Flight Management System Rev 0 Oct 96 Database Update SECTION 5 DATABASE UPDATE DATA BASE UPDATE PROCEDURES 1 Apply aircraft power 2 Open the hinged door located at the top of the CDU 3 Insert current Data Base Update card firmly into the slot The double row of holes on the forward edge of the DATA BASE UPDATE card must be inserted first with the write pro tect slot toward the right edge of the card Insert ENTER CHOICE the card at the same BEGIN UPDATE level as the eject button l
55. HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI GATION Page 2 Rev 1 re GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 45 System Operation USING OWN NAVIGATION TO FLY DME ARC 1 FPL Key DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL Page Figure 3 77 2 Approach and Waypoint Sequencing VERIFY they appear as selected 3 MSG Key VERIFY approach is armed within ACTIVE FPL 1 1 of the airport and the HSI scaling output has changed to TRMNL on NAVIGATION Page 2 Figure 3 77 4 FMS Mode SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guid ance 5 Flight Director or Autopilot ENGAGE the appropriate mode Waypoints and HSI Course VERIFY proper sequencing during the approach 7 Approach Annunciator When over the FAF VERIFY annuncia tion and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI GATION Page 2 The following is a brief description of the screen displays typically seen flying a DME Arc NOTE Certain EFIS map displays do not support curved lines to draw DME Arcs In this case the map will only display waypoints up to and including the IAF waypoint at the beginning of the arc No waypoints will be displayed while on the arc Once the aircraft has passed the arc end waypoint the map will display the remaining waypoints of the active flight plan Although no waypoints will be dis played during the DME Arc Procedure the FMS page NAVIGATION 1 4 displays will be as depicted in Figures 3 78 throu
56. KEYS d Navigation VNAV wird 9 00909 Vertical Navigation AFIS 01 0190 Airborne Flight Information 52290 R J JOO Aw PLAN conn eSI 95019 e Heading TUNE Radio e oo Tuning amp Direct are 9 used to select the pages Sp taining to that particular section ET is The first page of a section is dis E IE played first when a Display SH Selector Key is pressed With e each subsequent press of the 4 HBG HBE Key the next sequential page 0090 i i Jk MMIII uL E HOO DOU x ee voee Rev 0 1 6 GNS XL Flight Management System Oct 96 Description w a BHL PREVIOUS PRV KEY GH He The PRV Key is
57. Key DEPRESS to display applicable page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired HP waypoint NOTE On NAVIGATION Pages only the TO Waypoint can be select ed and on the Active Flight Plan the TO Waypoint can only be reviewed 3 HOLD Key DEPRESS to display HOLDING PATTERN Page Figure 3 110 4 Holding Pattern REVIEW HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 77 OK ENTER CANCEL Figure 3 110 Rev 0 0196 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 65 System Operation EDITING 5 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired field a INSERT value for INBOUND CRS LEG TIME or LEG DIST or b BACK Key DEPRESS to change TURN DIR or EXIT MODE 6 ENT Key DEPRESS The OK ENT prompt will appear NOTE A re entry to the Holding Pattern must be flown if the Inbound Course or Turn Direction are changed while holding at the HP Waypoint No XFILL capability is available to the other system in a dual system installation from one or both systems when a holding pattern is in progress 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to return to the NAVIGATION DIRECT TO or FPL Page CANCELING HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the CANCEL prompt Figure 3 111 2 ENT Key DEPRESS The HP annunciation is erased from NAVIGA TION DIRECT TO and Figure 3 111 FPL Pages NOTE If canceling holding pattern at the current TO Waypoint HP or AT is replaced by TO
58. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST TRANSMIT REQUEST Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 33 8 ENT Key DEPRESS Identifiers listed on this page will be trans mitted to the ground via the data link NOTE Wait for DATA CEN AK message if sending is multiple requests TERMINAL WEATHER 1 5 9 If there are identifiers Placing the cursor over the selected identifier on the ter minal weather and pressing ENT will display the weather information for the airport Figure 7 57 Figure 7 57 10 Weather information REVIEW TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER 11 Line Select DEPRESS to position the cursor over the identifier field 12 IDENTIFIER INSERT The data text fields will go blank 13 ENT Key DEPRESS The TERMINAL WX Menu Page appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected If there is no data available for this new identifier it will appear in parentheses TO DELETE TEXT WHEN THERE IS NO DATA ENTRY IN PROGRESS 14 Place cursor over airport identifier on TERMINAL WX page 15 Depress BACK key DELETE will appear 16 ENT Key Depress to delete the airport identifier RFIS MENU WINDS ALOFT MENU DATA UPDATE AND REVIEW 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option
59. Management System AFIS Operation 1 23 SYSTEM MESSAGES PAGE AFIS related messages appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page see Section 2 of the lg SYSTEM MESSRGES 1 1 Operators Manual When new messages are added the MSG Key will flash and a flashing asterisk will appear next to the new message SYSTEM MESSAGES ADVISORY Figure 7 38 The following are the advisory messages which pertain to AFIS and may appear on the GNS XL SYSTEM MESSAGES Page SYSTEM MESSAGE EXPLANATION WX UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS terminal weather update from the Global Data Center WINDS UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS Winds Aloft update from the Global Data Center SIGMETS UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS SIGMETS update from the Global Data Center FPL UPDATED The DMU has received an AFIS Flight Plan update from the Global Data Center 1NOCOMM AFIS update request initiated by the pilot has not been acknowledged by the ground communications network DOWNLINK FAIL The last AFIS downlink request contained an invalid character and was not transmitted to the ground network UPLINK FAIL The last AFIS uplink attempt by the ground network was not accepted by the DMU FPL RECALLED The DMU has received a previously accessed AFIS Flight Plan from the Global Data Center DATA CENT AK Global Data Center has acknowledged a downlink request AFIS CONFIG CHG Configuration information in the DMU has been changed to agree with interfaced
60. NRU REMOVE CARD Figure 5 4 DATA BASE UPDATE ENTER CHOICE RETRY UPDATE 2 RESTART NRU REMOVE CARD Figure 5 5 GNS Xz Flight Management System Rev 0 Oct 96 SECTION 6 List of Abbreviations amp Definitions LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ADC ADF AFIS AFM AHRS ALT APRCH AR ARINC ARP ASU ATC AUTO AZ B Baro BASIC OP WT BRG BRT Rev 0 Oct 96 DEFINITION AT or ABOVE Ref to VNAV Altitude Constraint Air Data Computer Automatic Direction Finder Airborne Flight Information System Aircraft Flight Manual Attitude Heading Reference System Altitude Approach DME Arc Aeronautical Radio Inc Airport Reference Point Antenna Switching Unit Air Traffic Control Automatic Satellite Azimuth Relative to Aircraft Position AT or BELOW Ref VNAV Altitude Constraint Barometric Altitude Basic Operating Weight Bearing to Waypoint Bright GNS X1 Flight Management System 6 1 List of Abbreviations amp Definitions CDI CDU CH CLIMB GRAD CRUISE ALT DB DEF DIF DIR DIS DME DN DTK EFIS EL ELEV ENRTE EST CROSSING ETA ETA ETE EXP 6 2 DEFINITION Course Deviation Indicator Control Display Unit Channel Current Aircraft Climb Performance in feet per Nautical Mile Cruise Altitude Direct To Laterally Database Default Difference Direct Distance Distance Measuring Equipment Down Desired Track
61. ON The ACTIVE LINK information at the bottom of the page indi cates the network that is being serviced at that time If the system is operating in automatic mode and the network selected by the present position informa tion is turned OFF or none are operational NONE will be dis played Rev 3 AFIS MENU Figure 7 122 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITR RUICOM PRINTER CTRL ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 123 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITR RUICOM PRINTER CTRL ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 124 Oct 02 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 65 UPDATING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN AND WEATHER UPDATING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN 1 FPL Key DEPRESS to dis play Active Flight Plan Page 2 Active Flight Plan VERIFY the Active Flight Plan route or AMEND as necessary 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS until cursor is positioned over AFIS UPDATE Figure 7 125 4 ENT Key DEPRESS AFIS FPL UPDATE Page appears with cursor positioned over AFIS FPL UPDATE ACTUAL FL value field Figure 7 126 NOTE Values entered are checked against aircraft limita tions stored in GDC computers Invalid entries prevent cursor movement and cause the field to flash Amend and re enter to advance cursor Figure 7 126 NOTE SIGMETS Winds and Terminal Wx are automatically updated when a AFIS FPL update is received 5 ACTUAL FL value VERIFY or INSERT actual f
62. Oct 96 GNS Xi Flight Management System 2 3 Page Display Definitions HP Holding Pattern Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at a particular waypoint Figure 2 5 PT Procedure Turn Indicates a procedure turn is programmed at a particular XFILL waypoint ARRIVE SELECT 88 APPROACH ERASE FLIGHT PLAN 6 2 2 e A flight plan dis continuity fence separating Figure 2 5 the missed approach way point from the rest of the approach Figure 2 5 The system will fly current track beyond the last waypoint prior to the fence but no Auto Leg change will occur No Altitude constraints will be displayed beyond the fence This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the active flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond the fence is selected using the function IAF Initial Approach Fix Automatically loaded from the data base when a non precision approach is selected ARC DME Arc end waypoint Automatically loaded from the data base when a non precision approach is selected FAF Final Approach Fix Automatically loaded from the data base when a non precision approach is selected MAP Missed Approach Point Automatically loaded from the data base when a non precision approach is selected fence indicating a discontinuity in the flight plan No Auto Leg changes will take place beyond the last waypoint prior to the fence and no ALT ETE E
63. PROCEDURES The following are various procedures that can be performed during navigation when applicable PILOT ENTED LEG CHANGE 1 7 NAV Key DEPRESS to select NAVIGATION Page 1 A pilot entered leg change may be accomplished on any NAVIGATION Page with a FR TO field However NAVIGATION Page 1 is rec ommended to simplify a reasonability check of DIS and DTK Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the FR field FR Waypoint Identifier INSERT or VERIFY ENT Key DEPRESS f inserting a Waypoint Identifier not found in the Active Flight Plan or an offset waypoint a Waypoint Page appears The following procedure should be performed If Waypoint Page Appears a Waypoint Page Coordinates VERIFY Database Waypoint or INSERT Waypoint Data To Insert Waypoint Coordinates cursor over POS Field 1 Latitude INSERT N or S first then degrees minutes and hundredths 2 ENT Key DEPRESS 3 Longitude INSERT E or W first then degrees utes and hundredths b ENT Key DEPRESS If VERIFYING current FR NRUIGRTION 1 4 Waypoint DEPRESS ENT and cursor box expands to enclose both FR and TO Waypoint Identifiers which activates the TO field TO Waypoint Identifier INSERT or VERIFY Figure 3 173 Figure 3 173 ENT Key DEPRESS Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 107 System Operation If Waypoint Page Appears a Waypoint Page Co ordinates V
64. Page AFIS MENU 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 8 OPER ATING MODES Figure 7 88 NOOUFONF Figure 7 88 3 ENT Key DEPRESS 4 Line Select Key 1 Z ued M ss DEPRESS to position cur sor over OFF option of AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT field AUTO WX UPDT Figure 7 89 UHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL 5 BACK Key DEPRESS ACTIVE LINK ON appears in the cursor Figure 7 90 Figure 7 89 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn ON the AUTO WX AFIS OPERATING MODES UPDT function AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT NOTE A Weather Update UHF NETWORK Request must be performed to SAT NETWORK notify the GDC of the change in PRINTER CTRL status of AUTO WX UPDT ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 90 Rev 3 aw GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 47 VHF AND SATELLITE NETWORK OPERATING MODES The status of each network is held in non volatile memory When the system is initialized AFIS MENU all networks will prefill with the status at system shut down The following procedures allow the VHF and satellite networks to be manually operated turned OFF or returned to AUTO TURNING VHF NETWORK OFF The VHF network has prece Figure 7 91 dence over the satellite network in areas of shared coverage and must be turned OFF in order for SATCOM to be the Active Link 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to em display AFIS MENU Page UT NE PDT UHF NETWORK 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS S
65. Pilot initiated changes made to the FLOW field on the FUEL STATUS Page are reflected on the FUEL PLAN Page 1 PLAN Key DEPRESS to display FUEL PLAN Page NOTE Initially the FUEL PLAN 3 8 PLAN will display the Active FUEL PLAN Flight Plan if selected The initial leg displayed will be DIRECT TO the current TO waypoint from NAV page 1 Figure 3 164 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the FUEL PLAN field Figure 3 164 Rev 0 3 100 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 3 Desired Flight Plan INSERT Flight Plan PLAN 3 8 Number Figure 3 165 FUEL PLAN or A for Active Flight Plan 4 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE If a flight plan num ber is left in the Fuel Plan field and not returned to A no updated Active Flight Plan information will appear Figure 3 165 5 FR Waypoint VERIFY Figure 3 166 or PLAN 3 8 INSERT as required FUEL PLAN ENT Key DEPRESS 7 TO Waypoint VERIFY or INSERT as required NOTE With FUEL PLAN A selected the FUEL PLAN leg automatically advances to display DIRECT TO the NAVIGATION Page TO Figure 3 166 waypoint each time the FUEL PLAN or TRIP PLAN Page is accessed 8 ENT Key DEPRESS twice to display LEG and FPL FUEL information Figure 3 167 9 Groundspeed VERIFY The current aircraft groundspeed is dis played unless a manual entry is made Figure 3 167 PLAN 3 8 FUEL PLAN Rev 0
66. SITA SATCOM Figure 7 29 NONE All networks are turned AUTO REPORT OFF or current position does not correspond with the manual SAT NETWORK ly selected boundaries PRINTER CTRL NOTE The VHF network has ACTIVE LINK precedence over the satellite network in areas of shared Figure 7 29 erage and must be turned OFF in order for SATCOM to be the Active Link AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT and OPERATING MODE selection status are stored in non volatile memory If the operator turns to OFF the operator must reselect to turn ON Rev 3 aw GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 19 VHF LINK CONTROL PAGE This page is accessed when the VHF Network is turned ON AFIS OPERATING MODES ARINC SITA AVICOM UHF LINK CONTROL Ground networks that AFIS ARINC interfaces with to establish a SITA AVICOM data link with the Global Data Center AUTO The VHF network will automatically be selected when ever the aircraft present position is within the appropriate bound Figure 7 30 aries Figure 7 30 MAN manual The desired network will be maintained independent of the present position In manual the system will only allow trans mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries All other networks will be turned OFF if one is in MAN OFF Network is not enabled SAT LINK CONTROL PAGE This page is accessed when the SAT Network is turned ON SAT COMM AUTO T
67. System 2 59 Page Display Definitions Turn Anticipation Holding Course Entry Course A Holding Fix 70 1 Holding Course 70 Teardrop Entry Pattern Figure 2 71 Rev 0 2 60 GNS XL Flight Management System Page Display Definitions Leg Length Out Bound End Turn Point S Note Path of 1st lap of holding pattern after entry procedure Entry 1 lt L Course 1 Holding Course Parallel Entry Pattern Figure 2 72 Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 2 61 Page Display Definitions HOLDING indicates the system has entered the Holding Pattern Figure 2 73 EXIT HOLD indicates the system will exit the holding pattern the next time over the holding fix INBOUND CRS course The inbound holding course in whole degrees This field can be True or Magnetic according to the display mode selected by the TRUE MAG switch input A T appears if in the True mode Figure 2 73 The T field will be blank if the sys tem is Magnetic mode Figure 2 73 MAX HOLDING TAS This field is computed based on configuration module max holding indicated airspeed and worst case winds represents the maximum true airspeed in the holding pattern that will assure that the aircraft remains in protected airspace Figure 2 73 TURN DIR direction RIGHT indicates the standard default holding pattern turn direction The non standard LEFT turn can be
68. X1 Flight Management System 3 59 System Operation 3 ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor advances to HEADING VECTOR 1 1 Heading Mode field 4 BACK Key DEPRESS to select INTERCEPT Figure 3 101 5 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor moves to the TO Waypoint field 6 BACK Key DEPRESS Figure 3 101 if required to cycle through waypoints on the Active Flight Plan or HEADING VECTOR 1 1 INSERT an alternate waypoint Figure 3 102 7 ENT Key DEPRESS If Waypoint Page Appears a Waypoint Page Coordinates VERI FY or INSERT Figure 3 102 b ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor moves to DTK field 8 Desired Track DTK VERIFY or INSERT NOTE If the Desired Track is changed a Pseudo VORTAC is pro grammed If the DTK entry positions the aircraft on the FROM or far side of the TO waypoint the Leg Change Mode on NAV page 1 switches to MAN otherwise it remains in AUTO The pilot must determine if MAN or AUTO is appropriate NOTE If a DME Arc endpoint is selected as the TO waypoint a default DTK will be displayed based on the point at which the ARC will be intercepted and DTK is not selectable Rev 1 3 60 GNS Xi Flight Management System Jul98 System Operation 9 ENT Key DEPRESS An Intercept Message may HEADING VECTOR 1 1 appear NO COURSE INTERCEPT NO ARC INTERCEPT or INTER CEPT BEYOND FIX Figure 3 103 If no mes sage appears the intercept will occur on the TO side of the selected TO waypoint
69. and STARS In these cases the waypoint identifiers are renamed in the database as a 6 character identifier Two naming conventions are used one for four character identifiers and one for five character identifiers Four character waypoints have the first four characters but add the last two characters of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the fol lowing example 11 at KPRC becomes MA11RC in the database Five character waypoints have the first five characters but add the last character of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following example MA27L at KOAK becomes MA27LK in the database ENTERING A SID ON THE ACTIVE FPL NOTE These procedures may also be used with a stored flight plan 1 FPL Key DEPRESS to display Active FPL Page 2 Line Select Key DE 4 PRESS to position cursor ARRIVE over the DEPART field 240957 Figure 3 22 ACTIVE FPL Figure 3 22 Rev 4 3 18 GNS X1 Flight Management System Now04 System Operation 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to display DEPARTURE Page 4 DEPARTURE Airport Identifier VERIFY or INSERT valid ident NOTE If the first waypoint on the Flight Plan is an airport the Departure ident prefills and the cursor is positioned over the first SID identifier on the list If the first waypoint on the Flight Plan is a runway the RUNWAY field also prefills and the cursor is over the first SID identifier on the list If there are no SIDs associated with the Departure
70. are compatible This is done by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field Press the Line Select Key to position the cursor over the desired RUNWAY Press ENT to load the desired RUNWAY on the SID 8 ENT Key DEPRESS to select the edited SID as displayed and insert it into the flight plan NOTE Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any waypoints are out of sequence Delete waypoints as necessary ERASING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position Saale cursor over DEPART field on the Flight Plan Page WAYPOINTS OF SID 2 ENT Key DEPRESS 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE Figure 3 32 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to erase SID and return to Flight Plan page Figure 3 32 0 3 22 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation ADDING OR DELETING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A SID NOTE When a SID is modified by adding or deleting waypoints the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a SID To Add a Waypoint 1 Line Select Key E RCTIUE FPL 1 1 DEPRESS to position cursor over the SID way point identifier that will follow the new entry on 2 the Flight Plan page See Figure 3 33 DEPART Waypoint Ident INSERT ARRIVE APPROACH 3 ENT Key DEPRESS twice Figure 3 33 NOTE The previously in dented SID waypoints move over one space to the left on the screen and are treated as normal wa
71. beyond the fence is selected using the B function NOTE When a fence appears in an Approach it separates the missed approach holding fix from the rest of the approach Figure 2 14 No Auto Leg change will occur to waypoints beyond the fence KKKKKK Same as stored Flight Plan Page 2 Rev 1 2 10 GNS X1 Flight Management System Jul98 Page Display Definitions DEPART Same as stored Flight Plan Page ARRIVE Same as stored Flight Plan Page APPROACH Same as stored Flight Plan Page ETA ETE DIS ALT Estimated Time of Arrival at ACTIVE FPL each waypoint on the Active Flight Plan based on current groundspeed Figure 2 15 NOTE When the cursor is placed over the ETA field and DEPART the BACK Key is pressed ARRIVE ETE DIS or ALT can be played Press ENT to select the desired option No ETE i ETA ALT or DIS information 218 is displayed for waypoints beyond the missed approach fence or the flight plan discontinuity ETE Estimated Time Enroute between waypoints on the Active Flight Plan based on current groundspeed DIS ACTIVE FPL Distance between each way point on the Active Flight MAP Plan ALT DEPART ARRIVE point offset of programmed VNAV waypoints for applica ble waypoints on the Active Flight Plan Figure 2 16 Constraint altitude and way Figure 2 16 Rev 1 p GNS XL Fl
72. default descent Flight Path Angle can be manually entered in degrees and tenths 0 1 to 6 0 range Figure 2 46 DEFAULT FPA is used to calculate TOD to the first altitude con straint on the Active Flight Plan However an FPA must be entered on the VNAV waypoint page to establish a PATH DESCENT and for Vert Dev or vertical deviations to be valid Figure 2 46 NOTE Pilot enters numbers only as the decimal point prefills as a default PRESEL ALT If configured Preselected Altitude input from system in feet or Flight Level Figure 2 46 NOTE An analog type preselector only displays PRESEL ALT when the aircraft is within 1000ft of actual altitude RANGE NM If configured Range to Pre selected Altitude in nautical miles and tenths 0 0 to 999 9 range Figure 2 46 ETE If configured the estimated time enroute to the Pre selected Altitude in hours minutes and tenths Figure 2 46 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 39 Page Display Definitions VNAV WAYPOINT 1 1 Page 1 of 1 Accessed by placing the cursor over a lateral WPT and pressing the VNAV Key or by placing the cursor over a WPT in the VNAV section and pressing ENTER key WAYPOINT VNAV waypoint will consist of from one to six alphanumeric charac ters ALT Constraint altitude prefills from database or can be manually entered Any altitude entered greater than the transition level from the VNAV DATA Page is converted and displa
73. display FLIGHT Figure 3 8 PLAN Page Figure 3 8 NOTE The XFILL prompt will only be displayed if the air plane is configured for dual systems 4 Type the appropriate departure airport or waypoint identifier in the cursor field NOTE Identifier may contain from 1 to 6 characters any combina tion of letters and numbers If an entry error is made press the BACK Key to erase a character then enter the correction 5 6 ENT Key DEPRESS Waypoint Coordinates and Data VERIFY If a specific runway is desired depress the appropriate Line Select Key to place the cursor over the desired runway Rev 0 0196 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 7 System Operation 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to add waypoint to the FPL 8 Repeat Steps 4 through 7 for the remaining waypoints The des tination airport identifier should be the last waypoint on the flight plan NOTE Waypoints are generally obtained from the Navigation Data Base NDB Pilot entered offsets and waypoints may also be entered See CREATING CHANGING PILOT ENTED WAYPOINTS for a more in depth discussion NOTE SID s STARS Enroute Airways and non precision approach procedures may also be entered on either the stored or active flight plan See SIDs STARs APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS for more details A maximum of 50 waypoint identifiers can be entered on Stored Flight Plans and 100 on the Active Flight Plan Attempting to enter more than the maximum a
74. displayed proceed to Step 4 To access the desired flight plan 1 8 FPL Key DEPRESS to locate the desired Flight Plan on the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Pages Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired Flight Plan Number ENT Key DEPRESS Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over identifier to be reviewed ENT Key DEPRESS Waypoint Coordinates or data VERIFY ENT Key DEPRESS The Flight Plan is displayed with the cur sor over the next waypoint Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for remaining waypoints NOTE This procedure may also be used for reviewing waypoint information on the Active Flight Plan Page Rev 3 3 12 GNS XL Flight Management System Oct 02 System Operation ERASING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN 1 Key DEPRESS to display desired FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page 2 Line Select Key DE PRESS to position the cursor over the num ber of the FPL to be erased ENT Key DEPRESS Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE ENT Key DEPRESS All waypoints of the stored FPL will be erased NOTE If the Active Flight Plan is erased all waypoints except the FR TO are deleted A fence is displayed indicating no auto leg change beyond the TO waypoint Rev 3 Oct 02 GNS Xi Flight Management System 3 12a System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 3 3 12b GNS Xi Flight Management System Oct 02 System Operation FLIGHT PL
75. entering the VOR identifier will result in the database replac ing the VOR identifier with the usable DME identifier When this occurs the RANGE and BRG displays remain associated with the VOR even though it is no longer displayed This ambiguity will occur when the frequency rather than the identifier is entered When the CDU keyboard is used to tune a navaid the local VPU database is searched for the tuned frequency If found it is paired with the nearest usable Navaid identifier associated with that fre quency If the station identifier tuning method is used to tune the radio the identifier ultimately paired with the tuned frequency may differ from the identifier originally entered If the navaid is unusable that is out of range or a frequency conflict exists dashes will be dis played in the IDENT field and the new frequency will be displayed 5 Frequency VERIFY that the ACTIVE frequency on the control head and CDU displays agree If Station Frequency is Used 1 TUNE Key DEPRESS until NAV TUNE Page is displayed 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired FREQ field 3 Frequency INSERT or VERIFY Figure 3 147 TUNE 2 3 NOTE Trailing zeroes are not required 4 ENT Key DEPRESS 5 Frequency VERIFY that control head display is tuned to the desired fre quency Figure 3 147 Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 91 System Operation When the station is locat
76. identifiers transferred via the disk and or received via the data link Additional requests can be entered RECALL AFIS FPL Allows operator to recall a previously accessed flight plan and associated weather from the Global Data Center via the data link SEND AFIS MSG Allows operator to send non flight related text messages via the satellite data link and flight related text messages via the satellite or VHF data link DISPL AFIS MSG Allows operator to display flight related mes sages received via the data link OPERATING MODES Allows operator to select operating mode for e AUTO REPORT AUTO WX e VHF NETWORK ARINC SITA AVICOM and if applicable SAT satellite NETWORK e PRINTER CTRL AFIS FLT PLAN PAGES The AFIS Flight Plan Pages are accessed by selecting Option 1 on the AFIS MENU Page AFIS FLT PLAN 1 4 FUEL TIME AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 1 FUEL AND TIME REQUIRE MENTS FR The origin airport identifier Figure 7 8 When there is an enroute update to the flight plan the identifier will change to Figure 7 8 UPDATE Rev 3 ico GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 7 UPDATE refers to the Lat Lon position of aircraft at time of last AFIS FLT PLAN 1 4 update request Figure 7 9 FUEL TIME TO The TO waypoint identifier TO FUEL Projected fuel required from FROM waypoint to TO waypoint as transferred from disk or updated enroute via the data link TO TIME The estimated
77. is in dead reckon mode When the posi tion is valid and sufficient satellite measurements are unavailable the receiver will continue to output valid position for a maximum of 30 seconds while using the last known velocity and track information The position is invalid after 30 seconds MODE Possible receiver modes are ENROUTE OCEANIC REMOTE TER MINAL and APPROACH These modes are used to determine what accuracy parameters should be used for a particular phase of flight ALT AIDED Indicates the GPS receiver is using an externally supplied altitude input for position calculation Rev 0 2 30 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions RAIM FDE Indicates RAIM and or FDE is AVAILable or UNAVAILable SATS TRACKED Indicates the number satellites presently being tracked GPS SUBSECTION 3 3 Page 3 of 3 Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third GPS GPS SUBSECTION 3 3 SUBSECTION Page and the SAT AZ EL SNR HLTH T following can be observed This page displays the GPS receiver status The GPS receiver is an 8 channel receiver therefore up to 8 lines of satellite information is displayed The information displayed is as follows Figure 2 37 GPS SAT This is the satellite PRN number AZ This is the satellite azimuth position displayed in degrees EL Satellite elevation displayed in degrees above the horizon SNR This the received signal to noise ratio for each satel
78. is programmed during the hold procedure the aircraft will sequence to the next waypoint on the Active Flight Plan the next time the hold fix is crossed This field can be edited using the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field Figure 2 20 AT Figure 2 20 The Holding Pattern procedure is in progress at the TO waypoint and the ETA next time over the holding fix if ETA has been selected and the system has a valid ground speed This field can also display the following Figure 2 20 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 15 Page Display Definitions HP Holding Pattern Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at the TO waypoint Procedure Turn Indicates a procedure turn is programmed from the database at the TO waypoint The airplane will fly the procedure turn The next time over the PT waypoint the system will sequence to the following way point on the flight plan AR DME Arc Indicates a DME Arc is programmed at the TO waypoint HOLDING STATUS MESSAGE Line 4 DIRECT ENTRY Indicates the system will use a direct entry to the holding pattern This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the holding pro cedure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix Figure 2 20 TEARDROP ENTRY Indicates the system will use a teardrop entry to the holding pattern This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the hold proce dure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the f
79. number is now displayed in the EXCLUDED SATS LIST field Figure 3 208 Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 131 System Operation NOTE Entering a number already listed and pressing ENT will remove the number from the list Pressing the Line Select Key next to CLEAR ALL and pressing ENT will remove all satellites from the exclusion list 19 ENT Key DEPRESS when all desired satellites are entered PLAN 7 8 FDE Page will again be displayed 20 START CALC ENT is displayed at the bottom of the screen See Figure 3 210 FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1 1 EXCLUDED SATS LIST CLEAR ALL OK ENTER Figure 3 209 PLAN 7 8 FDE EXCLUDE SATS QTY START CALC ENTER Figure 3 210 Rev 0 3 132 GNS Xi Flight Management System 21 ENT Key DEPRESS PLAN 8 8 FDE COMPUTA TION Page is now displayed COMPUTING STANDBY will flash while FDE predic tion is being calculated and the percentage completed will be shown When the prediction calculation is com plete an FDE and NAV AVAILABLE or UNAVAIL ABLE message will be dis played as shown in Figures 3 212 and 3 213 Rev 0 Oct 96 System Operation PLAN 8 8 FDE COMPUTATION CANCEL COMPUTE Figure 3 211 PLAN 8 8 FDE COMPUTATION Figure 3 212 PLAN 8 8 FDE COMPUTATION Figure 3 213 GNS XL Flight Management System gt 3 133 System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 3 134
80. of fuel and RANGE are calculated to the RESERVE fuel not 0 fuel unless the RESERVE fuel is 0 To change the unit of measurement LB or KG a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the REMAINING field DEPRESS the Line Select Key above to position the cursor over the unit field LB or KG b BACK Key DEPRESS The field will display LB PLRN or KG to notify the FUEL STRTUS pilot of the pending change Figure 3 155 c ENT Key DEPRESS The units field on the title line and specific range line will change All fuel Figure 3 155 figures are recalculat ed to reflect the new units of measurement TRIP PLANNING The TRIP PLAN Page provides the capability to calculate information for Active or Stored Flight Plans DIRECT TO legs or Random legs without affecting any of the system s navigation functions 1 PLAN Key DEPRESS to display TRIP PLAN Page NOTE Initially the TRIP PLAN Page will display the viet Active Flight Plan if pre sent The initial leg dis played will be DIRECT TO the current TO waypoint on the active flight plan or the first TO waypoint on the flight plan selected Figure 3 156 Figure 3 156 Rev 0 3 6 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position PLRN 2 8 TRIP PLRN the cursor over the TRIP PLAN field 3 Desired Flight Plan INSERT Flight Plan Number Figure 3 157 or for Active Fl
81. on current Lat Lon location of aircraft AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO TO MAN OR OFF MODE AUTO REPORT 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to AUTO WX UPDT display AFIS MENU Page ARINC SITR RUICOM 2 Line Select Key PRINTER CTRL DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 8 OPER ATING MODES Figure 7 ACTIVE LINK 119 Figure 7 120 ENT Key DEPRESS 4 Line Select Key AFIS OPERATING MODES DEPRESS to position cur sor over AUTO option of AUTO REPORT desired ground network AUTO WX UPDT field Figure 7 120 ARINC SITR RUICOM 5 BACK Key DEPRESS PRINTER CTRL until MAN or OFF appears in the cursor ACTIVE LINK 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to Figure 7 121 select MAN or OFF mode Figure 7 121 NOTE If MAN is selected all other networks will indicate OFF Rev 3 1 64 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 RETURNING TO AUTO 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 8 OPER ATING MODES Figure 7 122 ENT Key DEPRESS Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over MAN or OFF option of ground network field Figure 7 123 5 BACK Key DEPRESS until AUTO appears in the cursor Figure 7 124 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to select AUTO mode NOTE AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT and OPER ATING MODE selection status are stored in non volatile memo ry If the operator turns to OFF or MAN the operator must res elect to turn
82. or current position does not cor respond with the selected mode NOTE AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT and OPERATING MODE selection status are stored in non volatile memory If the operator turns to OFF or MAN the operator must reselect to turn ON Rev 3 7 22 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE FOR AFIS FLIGHT PLAN UPDATING AFIS UPDATE Allows pilot to e Amend an existing AFIS ACTIVE FPL Flight Plan Update SIGMETS Request a new AFIS Flight DEPART AFIS UPDATE _ ARRIVE AFIS UPDATE VERIFICATION PAGE ACTUAL FL Actual flight level Figure 7 35 of aircraft rounded to nearest 100 ft as entered by the pilot ASSIGNED FL Current Flight AF TS UPDATE Level assigned by ATC as veri fied or amended by the pilot PAYLOAD Current aircraft payload verified or amended by the pilot FUEL REM Actual fuel remaining as calculated by the GNS XL or amended by the Figure 7 36 pilot CRUISE MODE Current air craft Cruise Mode as verified or AFIS UPDATE amended by the pilot TRANSMIT REQUEST When cursor is over this field and ENT is pressed the update request is sent via the data link Figure 7 36 DATA LINK DISABLED Aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link VHF or satellite network must also be enabled Figure 7 37 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight
83. puted Flight Path Angle Wi between them Figure 3 5000 128 J A AUTO The AUTO mode may be AUTOMATIC ANGLE selected ONLY if the cho 5 sen waypoint has Cross AT type constraint pro grammed All Cross AT waypoints that are a part of a STAR or APPROACH are automatically put into AUTO mode when the pro cedure is retrieved from the database and loaded onto the Active Flight Plan If the waypoint prior to the selected AUTO FPA waypoint has a Cross AT or ABOVE Cross AT or BELOW or Cross BETWEEN constraint programmed an automatic angle is assigned and will be the same angle as the programmed Default Angle on VNAV DATA Page Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Descent Reference Waypoint NOTE If no ALT constraints are programmed before the selected AUTO FPA waypoint the AUTO FPA is the same as the DEF FPA Unless an FPA is programmed at a waypoint the system uses the DEF FPA to the first waypoint on the flight plan with an altitude con straint to establish a TOD point To help establish TOD the sys tem will automatically load the destination airport elevation on the flight plan provided the flight plan was not obtained from AFIS An altitude constraint and FPA must be loaded using the ENT Key to establish a Path Descent and activate Vertical Deviation to any way point except a DB WPT Rev 0 3 78 GNS Xi Flight Managemen
84. required to contribute to the composite Figure 3 182 position If Update Not Desired 11 PLAN FPL TUNE VNAV HDG 9 Key DEPRESS to cancel the position fix Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 113 System Operation PARALLEL COURSE This procedure is used to establish an offset course steering refer ence parallel to the current leg This field is inactive when in APPROACH ARMED mode within 30 nm of the destination airport 1 Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION 2 4 Page with SXTK 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over SXTK field L or R Key DEPRESS 4 Offset Distance INSERT NM and tenths The maximum value that can be entered is 99 9 NM 5 ENT Key DEPRESS XTK deviation remains referenced to the original track However the HSI will display a centered needle when the SXTK has been captured BRG DIS ETE remain ref erenced to the current TO waypoint NOTE If the system is coupled to the autopilot the roll command will turn the aircraft to intercept the parallel course at the selected SXTK distance If XTK is greater than 12 5NM VNAV will become INVALID and no vertical deviation information will be displayed Canceling Parallel Course 1 Key DEPRESS to MEM NAVIGATION 2 4 display page with SXTK 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over SXTK field 3 BACK Key DEPRESS The cursor field will dis play CANCEL to in
85. see eR RR yea 3 35 DELETING AN APPROACH WAYPOINT 3 36 USING A STAR AND AN APPROACH IN THE SAME FLIGHT PLAN 3 36 SELECTING A COMPANY ROUTE AND ADDING IT TO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 3 36 1 EXECUTING APPROACHES 3 37 LOADING A GPS GPS OVERLAY APPROACH 3 38 EXECUTING A GPS GPS OVERLAY APPROACH 3 39 Using Radar Vectors to FINAL APPROACH COURSE 3 39 After receiving the final intercept vector from ATC 3 40 USING OWN NAVIGATION NO DME ARC 3 41 PROCEDURE TURN iiis Ree dr ER 3 41 USING RADAR VECTORS INTERCEPT A DME ARC 3 44 ENROUTE 3 51 DIRECT TO ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT 3 51 DIRECT WAYPOINT 3 52 vi Rev 1 GNS Xz Flight Management System Juy 98 Table of Contents To Select and Go Direct To HP Waypoint 3 52 To Cancel Holding Pattern from the Holding Pattern page 3 52 DIRECT TO RANDOM WAYPOINT 3 53 DIRECT CLOSEST AIRPORT 3 54 PSEUDO VORTAC SELECTED COURSE 3 55 USING HEADING VECTOR 3 57 PROGRAMMING A HEADING VECTOR 3 57 CHANGING HEAD
86. system The purpose of this section is to acquaint users of AFIS Flight Plan and Weather Advisory Services with the equipment its capabilities and its operation AFIS services are ADVISORY only as they con tain elements provided by the National Weather Service and informa tion supplied by the pilot Therefore it is the responsibility of the pilot in command to exercise reasonable and prudent judgment in the use of these ADVISORY services Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 DESCRIPTION AFIS is an Airborne Flight Information System that provides integrat ed flight planning and performance management interfaces to the GNS X Nav Management System These interfaces consist of three major capabilities 1 Access to ground based Global Data Center computers from a Personal Computer for the purpose of generating or retrieving per formance optimized flight plans and current aviation weather 2 Digital transfer of AFIS Flight Plan and weather data into the Nav Management System for display and performance monitoring on the GNS Xt Color CDU and 3 Air ground computer link interfacing the GNS X Nav Management System to the ground based Global Data Center computers for the purpose of providing enroute flight plan weath er performance updates requesting pre departure clearance and sending or receiving messa
87. used to display e Us the previous page of a section ei or subsection This key also i IS allows the operator to remain in section or subsection by loop T ing from the first to the last and aa aon i back to the first page of that oo DoOGGGOG section or subsection s rjv tv w ux uscite Ir E 2 NEXT NXT KEY al ll The NXT Key is used to display en the next page of a section or subsection This key also ne allows the operator to remain in e section or subsection by loop ing from the first to the last and HACO 0090 back to the first page of that 1990 DOC R A as HAI SITIO wii section or subsection 6 0 p oy LINE SELECT KEYS en e Br These keys used to place i the cursor in the field next to e that key Each line select key m le controls 2 lines of text White symbols or displayed on w eTe ith id f the displ indi aa De te eer side O a p OOO WME cate active Line Select Keys for CORA 5 each individual page muita 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System 1 7 Description COLORS The CDU displays are color coded to assist the operator in recogniz ing information The following is a list of these colors and their mean ings Lateral TO Waypoint and Vertical TO Waypoint Yel
88. waypoint UNRU WAYPOINT 1 1 Figure 2 48 NOTE Pilot must enter the leading sign for the offset to be beyond the fix but a prefills as a default to cross prior to the fix REQ FPM Required Feet Per Minute Required vertical speed in feet per minute the aircraft must maintain to reach the Vertical waypoint UP indicates a positive vertical speed and DN indicates a negative vertical speed is required NOTE If PLAN CROSSING is displayed then the REQ FPM is the planned vertical speed for the waypoint REQ FPM will be dashes if ground speed or air data is not valid FPA Flight Path Angle Flight Path Angle for path descent to waypoint in degrees and tenths with valid range 0 1 to 6 0 The following may appear in parentheses DB Indicates FPA from database UNAU WAYPOINT 1 1 MAN Indicates manually entered FPA DIR Indicates direct FPA programmed Figure 2 49 AUTO Indicates system computed FPA Figure 2 49 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 41 Page Display Definitions DEF Indicates FPA default from VNAV DATA Page NOTE DIR AUTO and DEF can be accessed using the BACK Key DIRECT FPA Direct Flight Path Angle from the current aircraft altitude to the Vertical waypoint in degrees and tenths valid range 0 0 to 90 0 where DN indicates negative FPA and UP indicates positive FPA AFIS SECTION AFIS KEY Refer to Section 7 for description and operation of AFIS P
89. will be added to the FPL and no AUTO LEG BACK will occur beyond this waypoint Anytime the Direct To function is used to go Direct To the MAP the Approach Procedure will be canceled The SYSTEM MESSAGE page will display APPROACH CANCELED and the CDI sensitivity will return to Terminal scale of 1NM full scale deflection DIRECT TO CLOSEST AIRPORT This procedure allows the pilot to select a desired airport and pro ceed DIRECT TO it 1 Key DEPRESS until DIR CLOSEST ARP Page appears Figure 3 93 DIR CLOSET ARP 2 2 When initially accessed the cursor will be over the airport closest to the aircraft s present posi tion at that time 2 Line Select Key 99 DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired airport identifi er and press ENT NAVIGATION Page 1 will be displayed and the airplane will proceed to the selected airport Rev 0 3 54 GNS Xi Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation NOTE The bearing and distance values to the closest airports are based on the aircraft s present position at the time this page is accessed The values are not updated while the page is being dis played To obtain updated information it is necessary to exit the page then return PSEUDO VORTAC SELECTED COURSE 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION Page 1 NOTE The system must be proceeding Direct To a waypoint or DTK will not be an enterable field If system is proceeding Direct To the desir
90. will flash 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position ES PLAN cursor over REMAINING FUEL STATUS field Figure 3 154 3 Fuel Quantity Remaining VERIFY or INSERT 4 ENT Key DEPRESS Fuel Reserve VERIFY or INSERT 6 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 3 154 7 Fuel Flow INSERT or VERIFY NOTE No fuel flow entry is required in the Automatic Fuel Flow mode All flashing fields must be verified or values inserted using the ENT Key in order for HOURS field to display information RANGE and NM LB fields will display information when a valid ground speed is recognized 8 ENT Key DEPRESS If a manual fuel flow is entered the VERIFY INPUTS message changes to LAST INPUT and sets the time at 00 minutes MAN will be displayed adjacent to the FLOW field When the LAST INPUT field exceeds 15 minutes the REMAINING RESERVE and FLOW fields blink indicating verification or update is required REMAINING RESERVE and FLOW must be manually verified NOTE Auto fuel flow can be reselected by positioning the cursor over the manual fuel flow and depressing the BACK Key AUTO is dis played The current auto fuel flow is displayed in the cursor Depressing ENT Key will select the auto fuel flow When going from Manual to Automatic Fuel Flow Mode the REMAINING RESERVE and FLOW fields will blink Verifying inputs is required Repeat Steps 2 through 7 Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 95 System Operation NOTE HOURS
91. 0 Oct 96 PPM MENU PAGE PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGES This page is accessed from the SEND MESSAGE Page by selecting PPM in the upper right hand corner PPM can only be selected when an entry has been made in the TO or fields on the SEND MESSAGE Page The TO FROM and data are used when sending prepro grammed message Titles for up to six prepro grammed messages can be list ed for selection to review change and send PREPROGRAMMED MES SAGE PAGES These pages display the mes sage text for each prepro grammed message title select ed from the PPM MENU Page Up to seven lines of text may be entered Preprogrammed Messages will remain in non volatile memory and can be removed by editing the title on the PREPROGRAMMED MSG Menu Page Rev 0 PPM MENU Figure 7 25 PREPROGRRMMED MSG NEW ETA MKC akaka SEND MESSAGE Figure 7 26 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 17 DISPLAY AFIS MSG PAGE The message page is displayed by selecting Option 7 on the AFIS MENU Page All text messages sent to the tail number of the aircraft being flown appear in this section Up to 15 pages of text can be stored according to time received with the newest mes sage appearing first Messages can originate from Figure 7 27 Another AFIS equipped aircraft third party Global Data Center OPERATING MODES PAGE FOR AFIS USERS EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMU
92. 13 2 15 2 16 2 58 2 62 2 64 2 76 3 33 3 52 3 63 6 3 Holding Pattern Entry Direct 2 16 2 58 3 63 Parallel iai reed e e ere e Ee 2 16 2 58 2 61 Teardrop EDY n Rino 2 16 2 58 2 60 Holding Status 55 06 2 16 HortZOntal Nea eee ere 2 29 2 78 6 3 6 4 Horizontal Position Error 2 29 2 78 6 4 APA ces team iride fede date Haas 7 3 dg d enema quand tue 3 17 ICAO Airport 1 2 3 18 DEEP 2 56 7 18 7 21 7 63 7 64 Ident insert i ic ccce ie Seed Sed eee 3 129 Tae fitiflC atus sien DELI LM EL M aM LII E 7 15 7 39 Identifying 6 6 eee RR 2 70 3 129 hj DEM 1 19 7 22 cr 3 37 3 91 6 4 hin 3 117 7 1 2 32 2 37 3 114 IMBOUNG GRO 2 17 2 62 3 63 3 64 3 66 6 4 Indented Waypolnls neat cadens 2 3 2 10 Inertial Reference System 1 2 3 15 6 4 Initial Approach Fix 2 4 2 8 2 64 3 33 3 44 3 46 6 4 Initialize d 2 30 3 109 3 117 3 118 3 126 7 4 7 43
93. 2 3 84 6 2 eerie hen er gee eee oe eee 2 24 D DATACENTER 7 24 7 33 7 35 7 37 7 38 7 40 7 42 7 61 7 63 7 65 DATA LINK DISABLED 7 12 7 15 7 23 7 37 7 42 7 61 eias nade eat ol 2 73 Database Expiration 3 2 Dead 0 2 21 2 26 2 75 2 76 2 79 3 110 Declinatilori 2 70 3 129 a 2 42 3 74 3 77 6 2 DEP 7 10 7 31 oco eiae co MEI UU TELAM 2 5 0 22222 3 13 BICIS ee 3 76 Deseleot akaa e kee 2 24 3 120 3 121 Desired Track 2 14 2 18 2 19 2 45 2 54 3 49 3 55 3 58 3 60 3 114 6 2 aie 2 79 7 27 Deviation s DEV 1 1 2 32 2 34 2 39 2 54 2 75 3 16 3 74 3 78 3 83 3 85 3 114 6 2 6 7 Digital Interface RT 1 1 DirectTo 2 9 2 45 2 47 2 54 2 63 2 65 2 71 3 2 3 13 3 14 3 35 3 36 3 41 3 42 3 46 3 48 3 51 3 56 3 59 3 63 3 65 3 66 3 68 3 77 3 81 3 83 3 96 3 98 3 100 3 101 3 103 3 104 3 108 3 114 3 122 6 2 7 4 DISCONTINUMY se L2 LebeReRERRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRBRRRTRRRERRES 2 4 2 11 2 18 2 38 MEC NER 2 14
94. 3 3 86 uper 3 1 3 89 Pseudo VORTAC 1 2 3 55 3 56 3 58 3 60 Q O tb aue utpat utis 2 50 2 51 Quality Factor 1 2 2 21 2 26 2 78 6 4 R RAD cade aaa 2 70 3 128 6 5 Radar Vectors Dede ahead ees 2 76 3 39 3 44 3 122 3 123 Radial insert 3 113 3 127 2 soo oce MR APMSM 1 1 2 55 3 89 3 92 3 93 ios sii 1 2 2 20 2 31 2 45 2 75 2 78 3 37 3 99 6 5 ROVD deese etii ied alga Gull aid Bae 2 22 6 6 casa edens od Shad wa ad dared ae 2 24 2 79 2 76 2 78 3 16 3 110 3 117 DET 222 ee Ea Se 3 110 READING DISK ani c ec ta opt eee 7 3 Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring 1 2 2 45 6 5 ng LL 2 41 6 6 7 5 7 28 arg reed vg Uv rug d trus 2 74 3 118 3 119 Required Vertical 2 34 2 41 RNAV pene ncaa A ENERE DE das Dads 2 8 3 37 6 6 RNG e bere ERE AR de Y 2 27 6 6 PROM 1 1 2 77 3 16 3 51 3 114 ROUES cereun tens en atnan er as
95. 3 BACK Key DEPRESS AUTO will be displayed to advise the pilot of the impending change 4 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE Insertion of E or W followed by ENT will also revert the sys tem to Auto Variation TRUE HEADING Aircraft Equipped With TRUE MAG Switch 1 TRUE MAG Switch Place in TRUE position NOTE Once the TRUE MAG Switch is placed in the TRUE position T is displayed adjacent to BRG HDG and TK since they are now ref erenced to true north 0 3 124 GNS XL Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation Aircraft Not Equipped With A TRUE MAG Switch NOTE This procedure must be accompanied by the input of TRUE heading into the system 1 NAV Key DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page appears 2 LINE SELECT Key DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR field 3 INSERT EO 4 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE The Variation is now EO and the system will be referenced to TRUE north There will be no T annunciation adjacent to BRG HDG and TK SET HEADING ENTRY When an IRS is placed in the Attitude Mode the message ENTR SET HDG appears on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page It is necessary to enter a set heading in order to allow the IRS to output valid magnetic heading data To Enter A Set Heading 1 NAV Key DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 is displayed The heading field may appear as dashes Figure 3 198 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS place the cursor over HDG field The last valid heading value appear
96. 3 112 PARALLEL COURSE 3 114 MANUAL MAGNETIC VARIATION ENTRY 3 115 RETURNING TO AUTOMATIC VARIATION 3 115 SELECTING ETE ETA DIS OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION 3 115 SELECTING NAV PAGE ETA OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION 3 116 INITIALIZATION ENROUTE VLF RPU ONLY 3 117 Update REPE Ct PEERS 3 118 MANUAL TAS ENTRY only VLF is available 3 118 ix Rev 1 pu GNS XL Flight Management System Table of Contents MANUAL HEADING ENTRY only if IRS or VLF is available 3 119 VLF OMEGA STATION DESELECTION 3 120 SENSOR DESELECTION 3 121 EXTERNAL WAYPOINT ACCEPTANCE 3 122 PRESENT POSITION AS A WAYPOINT 3 123 TRUE HEADING corto ebbe Chu vH EDU 3 124 Aircraft Equipped With TRUE MAG Switch 3 124 Aircraft Not Equipped With A TRUE MAG Switch 3 125 SET HEADING ENTRY eere a e o 3 125 LOSS OF POWER IN FLIGHT 3 126 CREATING CHANGING PILOT ENTERED PERSONALIZED WAYPOINTS 3 127 Creating Pilot Entered Personalized Waypoints 3 128 Changing Pilot Entered Personalized Waypoints 3 128 CREATING AN OFFSET WAYPOINT
97. 3 120 Figure 3 119 Only two or three digits are required to input an UNAU DATA 1 1 altitude i e enter 80 and 8000 is displayed enter 120 and 12000 is dis played Any altitude value entered greater than the TRANS LEVEL altitude value which normally defaults to FL180 is converted and displayed e 8 as flight level FL Entering 210 will display FL210 An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding Zero i e enter 052 and 52 is displayed Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 11 System Operation NOTE CRUISE ALT may also be inserted on VNAV Page 1 line 3 adjacent to the TO waypoint field when TOC or TOD are the TO waypoint The cruise ALT may automatically be entered by the pres elector if the preselector has the capability and the system is config ured for digital preselector A at or above or B at or below constraint entries are not applicable on this page Setting a cruise altitude will establish a TOD Top of Descent waypoint or a TOC Top of Climb waypoint if VNAV is valid A TOC will be established only if there are no altitude con straints between the aircraft and TOC and the aircraft is climbing 5 ENT Key DEPRESS 6 Transition Level INSERT or VERIFY Figure 3 121 NOTE Field defaults to FL180 if pilot does not enter a value Anytime a TRANS ALT is entered the value will remain in non volatile memory even after the sys tem is sh
98. 7 46 7 48 7 54 7 56 7 58 INMARSAT Meat 7 1 7 3 IEEE 2 20 2 25 6 4 hk Pm 2 72 3 25 3 26 3 107 3 127 Installation 0 2 5 3 66 Integrity cbe hard 1 2 2 45 2 49 2 78 6 5 0 1 6 GNS XL Flight Management System Oct 96 Index INTERGEPT BEYOND FIX kgs ewe 2 54 3 61 Intercept 2 54 3 61 Intercept 2 13 2 15 2 34 2 53 2 54 2 71 2 72 2 78 3 16 3 40 3 44 3 45 3 47 3 49 3 55 3 57 3 59 3 62 3 85 3 86 3 109 3 114 Interfaced E EE EEA EA 2 20 Menace 1 1 7 1 7 19 7 22 2 65 2 69 2 5 3 14 PRS ANI 3 15 J 2 67 2 69 6 4 2 42 3 96 6 4 d TT 6 4 KIS erecta ada brad Fox wisi ed ete bag e eder 3 15 3 130 3 131 L Land iG Paws doe dd 2 48 3 11 3 104 6 4 7 9 Latitude insert 3 5 3 53 3 54 3 107 3 112 3 118 3 124 tye antes 2 42 2 44 3 95 6 4 Gad Bid arden
99. 95 DIRECT 1 2 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the way point to follow the EX waypoint Figure 3 196 EX Waypoint Identifier INSERT Figure 3 194 Figure 3 196 Rev 0 3 122 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation 4 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE The EX waypoint identifier will flash if an unassigned num ber is entered EX waypoint coordinates can ONLY be assigned by an external source radar or EFIS 5 Waypoint Page Coordinates VERIFY 6 ENT Key DEPRESS 7 Waypoint Sequence VERIFY Figure 3 197 8 ENT Key DEPRESS CDU display will automat ically advance to NAVI GATION Page 1 NO AUTO LEG CHG mes sage will be removed from the SYSTEM MES SAGES Page Figure 3 197 DIRECT 1 2 PRESENT POSITION AS WAYPOINT A special waypoint location is reserved for storing present position coordinates as a waypoint The identifier for this waypoint is inserted as 1 As well the identifier may be used as a parent identifier for an offset waypoint by adding an asterisk Waypoint 1 is redefined each time the HOLD Key is depressed An example of the application of waypoint 1 is to store the coordinates of a point overflown to which you may wish to return This is accom plished by depressing the HOLD Key directly over that desired point In this case these coordinates would be stored under identifier 1 until either the HO
100. 96 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 87 System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 3 88 GNS Xi Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation REMOTE TUNING TUNING COMMS This procedure enables the pilot to keyboard tune the aircraft radios via the CDU Some control heads may require placement in the Remote Mode in order to accept tuning data from the CDU keyboard NOTE If system is configured for 3 Comms the tune section will con sist of 4 pages 1 TUNE Key DEPRESS TUNE 1 3 The Comm Radio TUNE Page will be displayed 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS if neces sary to position cursor over appropriate PRE SET field 3 Frequency INSERT Figure 3 142 Figure 3 142 NOTE Trailing zeroes are not required 4 ENT Key DEPRESS TRANSFER will auto TUNE 1 3 matically appear Figure 3 143 5 ENT Key DEPRESS The entered PRESET fre quency transfers to ACTIVE The new fre quency also displays as the ACTIVE frequency on the appropriate Comm Figure 3 143 control head NOTE Keyboard tuned frequencies may display for a few seconds then go to dashes if the frequency read back from the radio or the control head is not available NOTE MAN adjacent to Active Comm frequency indicates that the frequency has been entered using the COMM control head prompts are displayed when Active Comm frequency has been key board entered Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management Sy
101. AIONE us sconce oo eae ed See RN 2 65 3 54 COMMS ix ceva piece aes ere ee phew ye eek aes 1 3 3 89 Company ROUTES ess rase 2 2 3 36 1 3 36 2 COIN ASS CIR 2 20 2 75 Composite Position 1 1 2 20 2 21 2 25 2 26 2 29 2 64 2 77 3 15 3 110 3 113 3 121 3 122 3 126 3 127 COMPUTA ON Scented 2 19 2 51 2 52 2 78 3 133 GONE ech cece seas cera arene 7 24 7 25 Constraint 2 11 2 13 2 33 2 34 2 37 3 49 3 72 3 75 3 78 3 80 3 82 3 84 3 86 3 116 6 1 6 3 Constraint 06 2 11 2 13 2 33 2 37 2 40 2 69 3 5 3 112 3 117 1 1 2 GNS X1 Flight Management System Jul 98 Index 3 78 3 86 55 3 78 55 3 78 55 3 78 3 80 CrosS belWeen execs insect dd Suc 3 78 3 80 GMOS STM s ses tede 1 2 Crosstrack 2 18 2 19 2 77 3 58 BEES dE 2 18 2 17 2 62 3 63 3 64 3 66 6 4 Cruise 2 33 2 38 3 71 3 7
102. AN FPL SELECTION This procedure is used to transfer a stored FPL to active FPL status It is recommended that the initialization position and the first waypoint of the Active Flight Plan are the same so that the TO FROM Leg Distance displays the correct information The DIRECT TO function to the first waypoint on the flight plan may also be used to insure dis tance accuracy If a stored flight plan is currently displayed proceed to Step 5 1 FPL Key DEPRESS if required until the desired FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears NOTE Ifthe desired Flight Plan is not listed refer to the procedure for Creating a Flight Plan Page 3 7 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired Flight Plan Number NOTE If desired Flight Plan number is known position the cursor on the page enter the number and depress ENT Key The desired Flight Plan will be displayed 3 ENT Key DEPRESS 4 FLIGHT PLAN Page VERIFY Flight Plan Review routing by depressing PRV or NXT Key to page through multiple Flight Plan pages NOTE DEPRESS FPL or NXT Key to sequence to an alternate Flight Plan with the same departure destination pair and higher Flight Plan number DEPRESS PRV or BACK Key to sequence to a lower Flight Plan num ber with the same departure destination pair 5 Line Select Key DE PRESS to position cursor over SELECT Figure 3 16 a to transfer the Stored Flight Plan to Active FLIGHT PLAN 5 3 3
103. AT NETWORK to position cursor over Option PRINTER CTRL 8 OPERATING MODES Figure 7 91 ACTIVE LINK ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 7 92 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ON option of VHF NETWORK field Figure 7 92 AFIS OPERATING MODES 5 BACK Key DEPRESS AUTO REPORT OFF appears in the cursor AUTO WX UPDT Figure 7 93 UHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn PRINTER CTRL the VHF network OFF ACTIUE LINK NOTE The ACTIVE LINK infor mation at the bottom of the Figure 7 93 indicates the network that is being serviced at that time If all networks are turned OFF or none are operational NONE will be displayed Rev 3 7 48 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 TURNING VHF NETWORK 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page AFIS OPERATING MODES 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur i AUTO REPORT OPER NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL 3 ENT Key DEPRESS ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 94 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS z to position cursor over OFF option of VHF NETWORK field Figure 7 94 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT 5 BACK Key DEPRESS AUTO WX UPDT UHF NETWORK 2 ON appears in the cursor SAT NETWORK Figure 7 95 PRINTER CTRL ACTIVE LINK 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn VHF network on VHF Figure 7 95 LINK CONTROL Page appears Figure 7 96 AFIS OPERATING MODES
104. CTION REQUIRED The following are the action required messages that may appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page All will cause the message annun ciator to flash System Message ENTRY REQUIRED HOLD ENT MAN HDG REQD MAN TAS REQD VERIFY POSITION VAR WARNING Explanation Information required on the Initialization Page must be verified entered Date GMT and Position Manual procedure for putting the VPU non IRS equipped into the Primary Navigation Mode when groundspeed is less than 50 knots There is no heading input to the system and an H field antenna is installed with the RPU A manual heading entry must be made on NAV Page 3 There is no TAS input to the system and the RPU is using fewer than three Comm sta tions for navigation A manual TAS entry must be made on NAV Page 3 Aircraft composite blended position is in question and must be manually verified Magnetic variation cannot be automatically computed and MAN VAR REQD A manual variation entry must be made on NAV Page 3 i e aircraft position is north of 70 N lati tude or south of 60 S latitude Rev 2 2 74 GNS Xi Flight Management System Apr 00 ADVISORY The following are the Page Display Definitions advisory messages that may appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page All will cause the message annuncia tor to flash unless otherwise noted with an asterisk System Message Explanation ALTITUDE FAIL APRCH ARMED
105. CTRL function ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 115 Rev 3 7 62 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 RETURNING TO AUTO WX UPDT 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page AFIS MENU 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 8 OPER ATING MODES Figure 7 116 NOUFWNE 3 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 7 116 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over OFF option of AUTO WX UPDT field AUTO REPORT Figure 7 117 AUTO WX UPDT Figura ARINC SITR RUICOM PRINTER CTRL RFIS OPERRTING MODES 5 BACK Key DEPRESS ON appears in the cursor Figure 7 118 RCTIUE LINK Figure 7 117 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn ON the AUTO WX UPDT function RUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT NOTE A Weather Update ARINC Request must be performed to SITR RUICOM notify the GDC of the change in PRINTER CTRL status of AUTO WX UPDT ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 118 Rev 3 ON GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 63 GROUND NETWORK OPERATING MODES The status of each network is held in non volatile memory When the system is initialized AFIS MENU all networks will prefill with the status at system shut down The following procedures allow the ground networks to be man ually operated turned OFF or returned to AUTO NOTE SITA AVICOM are two different ground networks cover ing different regions The Figure 7 119 appropriate network is selected for operation based
106. Departure 7 10 7 14 7 37 EX eae assets 3 122 3 123 Exit HONG 2 15 2 16 2 62 3 67 EXIEIMOUS gate ane ted 2 15 2 63 3 65 3 66 DIM TTE 2 76 6 2 EXDIFGUONS 2525 5 524 och cess s 2 76 3 2 ae 2 76 7 11 FaCtOI a P ped 1 2 2 21 2 26 2 78 6 4 EET 2 9 3 33 6 3 Rev 0 14 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Index FDEGOmpltatiol 2 51 3 133 FDE Prediction usos 2 49 3 15 3 130 3 131 3 133 Fence 2 4 2 9 2 11 2 18 2 45 2 47 3 12 3 36 3 37 3 54 3 108 3 122 IEEE 1 5 Final Approach Course Alignment 2 9 3 33 Final Approach Fix FAF 2 4 2 8 2 12 2 32 2 64 2 75 3 33 3 37 3 40 3 41 3 44 3 46 3 62 6 3 BE 3 37 Flight Level 2 12 2 33 2 37 3 71 3 73 3 80 6 3 7 1 7 4 7 6 7 9 7 14 1 23 1 30 7 60 Flight Path Angle 2 12 2 33 2 34 2 39 2 41 3 71 3 80 3 82 6 3 FPE FULL iy cs cues oce erede bee Re ea 3 8 3 25 3 26 M EP RAE 2 34 2 41 6 3 6 6 Frequency FREQ n eis 2 56 2 57 2 66 3 89 3 91 6 3 El uadigasaga d dba b b p repu 2 65 2 75 6 3 7 13 7 23 Fuel Fl
107. E EXCLUDE SATS QTY START CALC ENTER Figure 3 207 Rev 0 3 130 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 6 Enter the desired route spacing in nautical miles 60NM is nor mal ENT Key DEPRESS Enter the expected ground speed in knots A value of 100 to 999 Kts may be entered 9 ENT Key DEPRESS 10 Enter the starting waypoint of the active flight plan leg for which FDE prediction is being calculated Pressing the BACK Key will cycle through the waypoints on the active flight plan Dashes are displayed prior to the last waypoint on the flight plan Pressing ENT while the dashes are displayed will clear the start and end waypoints resulting in an undefined Oceanic Remote segment 11 ENT Key DEPRESS 12 Enter the ending waypoint of the active flight plan leg for which FDE prediction is being calculated The BACK and dashes oper ate the same here as in the previous step 13 ENT Key DEPRESS 14 If no satellites are to be excluded from the FDE prediction DEPRESS the lower right Line Select Key and proceed to Step 20 If specific satellites are to be excluded from the FDE predic tion go to Step 15 15 ENT Key DEPRESS to display the FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1 1 Page See Figure 3 208 16 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position amp FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1 1 the cursor in the SAT EXCLUDED SATS LIST field 17 Enter the satellite num ber to be excluded 18 ENT Key DEPRESS The satellite
108. ED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AUTO REPORTING When the system is initialized the Automatic Reporting and or Auto Wx update function will retain the status at aircraft shut down The following proce dures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON TURNING AUTO REPORT OFF 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 8 OPER ATING MODES Figure 7 107 ENT Key DEPRESS Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over ON option of AUTO REPORT field Figure 7 108 BACK Key DEPRESS OFF appears in the cursor Figure 7 109 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn OFF the AUTO REPORT function NOTE f all ground networks are OFF then AUTO REPORT will be OFF 1 60 NOUFWNE AFIS MENU Figure 7 107 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITR RUICOM PRINTER CTRL ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 108 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC SITR RUICOM PRINTER CTRL ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 109 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Rev 3 Oct 02 RETURNING AUTO REPORT 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page AFIS MENU a 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 8 OPER ATING MODES Figure 7 110 a a a 3 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 7 110 4 Line Select Key
109. EL TIME Figure 7 46 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 29 5 AFIS or NXT Key DEPRESS to display AFIS AFIS FLT PLAN 2 4 Flight Plan Page 2 NOTE Pressing the PRV or BACK Key will re display the AFIS MENU Page with the cur sor positioned over Option 1 AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 2 6 WEIGHTS FLIGHT LEVEL Fi 7 47 and ROUTE REVIEW igure Figure 7 47 If the Flight Plan has been updated the first route identifier will be UPDATE followed by the updated route to destina AFIS FLT PLAN 2 4 tion FPL LDWT and FLT LVL values may change as data is updated NOTE If Automatic Fuel Flow is interfaced to the GNS XL RAMP WT changes to GROSS WT after the engines are started and the GROSS WT value field decreases on a periodic basis _ as the GNS XL recalculates Figure 7 48 7 AFIS or NXT Key DEPRESS Subsequent pages of the Route will appear as needed up to 50 waypoints or AFIS FLT PLAN Page 3 appears NOTE DEPRESSING PRV or BACK Key will display AFIS FLT PLAN Page 1 Rev 0 7 30 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 3 8 Pilot Inputs REVIEW E AFIS FLT PLAN 3 4 Figure 7 49 NOTE If there has been an update to the flight plan FROM identifier origin airport changes to UPDATE DEP TIME changes to UPDATE TIME RAMP FUEL changes to UPDATE FUEL FPL RES FUEL changes to RESERVE Figure 7 49 FUEL and the values in the
110. ERIFY DATABASE WPT Database Waypoint or INSERT Waypoint Data Figure 3 174 Insert Waypoint Coordinates cursor over POS Field 1 Latitude IN NDB ENTER SERT 5 first then de Figure 3 174 grees minutes and hundredths 2 ENT Key DEPRESS 3 Longitude IN SERT E or W first then de grees min utes tenths and hundredths b ENT Key DEPRESS 8 DIS DTK CHECK NOTE The Pilot Entered Leg Change procedure inserts a fence indicated by on the DIRECT TO and ACTIVE RCTIUE FPL FPL pages preventing Auto Leg Change beyond the TO waypoint if the TO waypoint was not on the original Active Flight Plan Figure 3 175 The MSG light illumi nates and the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page displays RPPRORCH NO AUTO LEG CHG how ever the AUTO field on Figure 3 175 NAVIGATION Page 1 con tinues to display AUTO To jump the fence and continue with the flight plan use the gt Key then the Line Select Keys to position the cursor over a way point beyond the fence then press ENT Key Rev 0 3 108 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation PREVENTING AUTOMATIC LEG CHANGES The Auto Leg change function allows the system to automatically sequence from waypoint to waypoint on the Active Flight Plan When the system is initialized it is in the Automatic Leg Change Mode unless changed by the pilot The following procedure inhibits auto matic leg changes
111. Electronic Flight Instrument System Satellite Elevation Above the Horizon Elevation Enroute Estimated Crossing Altitude Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time of Arrival at Destination Estimated Time Enroute Expires Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 FL FAF FDE FMS FPA FPL FPM FR FREQ FT GMT GPS GS HDG HDOP HLTH HP Rev 0 Oct 96 List of Abbreviations amp Definitions DEFINITION Final Course Alignment Fix Flight Level Final Approach Fix Fault Detection and Exclusion Detection mean ing the capability of the system to detect a satel lite failure that will affect navigation Exclusion meaning the capability of the system to exclude one or more failed satellites from the prediction solution thus preventing a satellite failure from affecting navigation Flight Management System includes CDU and optional RPU Flight Path Angle Flight Plan Feet per minute From Waypoint Frequency feet Glide path Ref to VNAV Altitude Constraint Greenwich Mean Time Global Positioning System Groundspeed Heading Horizontal Dilution of Precision Satellite Health Good or Bad Holding Pattern GNS X1 Flight Management System 6 3 List of Abbreviations amp Definitions HPE HSI IAF ICAO IDENT ILS INBOUND CRS INS IRS Jeppesen KEY KG kHz LAT LB LEG DIST LON MAG MAG VAR MAN ALT 6 4 DEFINITION Horizontal Position Error A Quality F
112. FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Operator s Manual Global PLAN 2 6 TRIP PLAN DIRECT TO MEADS aps 006 08852 0000 Rev 4 04 WARNING Prior to export of this document review for export license requirement is needed COPYRIGHT NOTICE Copyright 1998 2002 2004 Honeywell International Inc All rights reserved Reproduction of this publication or any portion thereof by any means without the express written permission of Honeywell International Inc is prohibited For further information contact the Manager Technical Publications Honeywell One Technology Center 23500 West 105th Street Olathe Kansas 66061 Telephone 913 712 0400 Revision History and Instructions Manual GNS XL Operator s Manual Revision 4 November 2004 Part Number 006 08852 0000 This revision adds descriptions of operational procedures required to fly three kinds of SIDs Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following instructions Title Page Remove and Replace Revision History Page Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Pages Section 3 Remove and Replace Pages 3 17 through 3 22 Back Cover Page Remove and Replace Back Binder Insert Remove and Replace R 1 Rev 4 Now04 GNS X1 Flight Management System Revision History and Instructions Manual GNS XL Operator s Manual Revision 3 October 2002 Part Number 006 08852 0000 This revision incorporates AFIS Printer Control deletes Air Canada and calri
113. Figure 7 39 PLAN LIST Page appears b FPL Key DEPRESS until desired AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears Figure 7 39 NOTE Desired flight plan may be found on a subsequent page if more than six flight plans have been either transferred from the disk or received via the data link If there is more than one Flight Plan with the same Departure Destination pair a random letter will be displayed RFIS between the Depart Dest pair FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 4 and the date This letter and the date distinguish one FPL from the other 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS to place cursor over desired Flight Plan Figure 7 40 Figure 7 40 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 21 4 FPL Date VERIFY 5 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE If an Active Flight Plan exists the message REPLACE ACTIVE FPL appears DEPRESS ENTER to replace the Active Flight Plan with the AFIS Flight Plan 6 ACTIVE FPL CONFIRM AFIS Flight Plan becomes the Active Flight Plan The initial leg must be established on the NAV Page so the system can navigate normally ENROUTE NAVIGATION 5 5 PLAN REVIEWING FLIGHT PLAN PROGRESS 1 NAV Key DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 5 Flight Plan Progress Page appears Figure 7 41 2 Current Leg Data CON Figure 7 41 FIRM Observe AFIS Planned data vs Actual NAVIGATION 5 5 GNS XL calculated data PLAN REVIEWING AFIS PLANNED LEG DATA 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position c
114. Flight Management System 3 127 System Operation The CDU has non volatile storage for up to 999 waypoints which are retained in memory ONLY if the waypoints are entered on a Stored Flight Plan The ICAO identifiers stored in the database can not be used for personalized waypoints Attempting to enter more than 999 pilot entered waypoints in memory causes MEM FULL to be displayed on the FLIGHT PLAN Page The message light will flash and WPT MEM FULL will be displayed on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page Select the desired Flight Plan and position the cursor over the desired field If necessary refer to the procedure for Creating a Flight Plan or Modifying a Flight Plan Creating Pilot Entered Personalized Waypoints 1 Personalized IDENT INSERT 2 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 3 203 3 Latitude INSERT N or S first then degrees min utes and hundredths 4 ENT Key DEPRESS 5 Longitude INSERT E or W first degrees then minutes and hun dredths Figure 3 203 PILOT ENTERED WPT 6 ENT Key DEPRESS The display will change to the appropriate FLIGHT PLAN or DIRECT Page Changing Pilot Entered Personalized Waypoints 1 Personalized IDENT INSERT 2 ENT Key DEPRESS PILOT ENTED WPT Page will appear 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over POS field 4 Repeat Steps 4 6 above NOTE If an offset waypoint from a pilot entered waypoint is grammed the RAD and DIS can be changed but th
115. G Figure 7 68 ENT Key DEPRESS SEND AFIS MESSAGE Figure 7 68 Page appears Figure 7 69 If not requesting PDC proceed to step 7 a a O Line Select Key Depress RENE VEE to position cursor over TO field FR INSERT PDCXXX XXX is i departure airport identifier ENT Key Depress twice to transmit request SEND MESSRGE TO INSERT receiver of Figure 7 69 message Rev 0 1 38 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 8 ENT Key DEPRESS 9 FR INSERT sender s iden tification name or tail num SEND AFIS MSG ber MESSRGE PPM TO 10 ENT Key DEPRESS FR 11 INSERT receiver s address See Table 1 for possible addresses 12 ENT Key DEPRESS SEND MESSAGE 13 Message INSERT text message using the ENTER Key to access each succes sive line Figure 7 70 Figure 7 70 NOTE The cursor remains fixed and the page display SEND AFIS MSG moves up or down one line at a time through the cursor Fifteen lines of text can be entered Figure 7 71 The following guidelines are used for entering and editing text 775 SEND MESSAGE a Entering character causes the character at the cursor position and all the characters to the right to be shifted one position Figure 7 71 b The BACK Key may be used to delete characters one at a time from right to left The SP Key may be used as a spacer to separate words The PRV Key may be used to mov
116. G PATTERN Page with both the OK ENT and CANCEL option Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 NOTE The holding pattern may be edited if required at this time See Page 3 67 for details DIRECT 1 2 HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 To Select and Go Direct To HP Waypoint 4 ENT Key DEPRESS Display automatically advances to NAVIGA TION Page 1 Figure 3 90 5 DIS DTK CHECK PAL OK ENTER CRNCEL To Cancel Holding Pattern from the Holding Pattern page 1 Line Select DEPRESS to position cursor over desired HP way point 2 Hold Key DEPRESS 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over CANCEL 4 ENT Key DEPRESS Display automatically advances to NAVI GATION Page 1 and aircraft proceeds Direct To the waypoint with the Holding Pattern canceled Rev 0 3 52 GNS X Flight Management System System Operation DIRECT TO RANDOM WAYPOINT This procedure enables the pilot to add a random waypoint to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN in the desired sequence and proceed direct to it 1 Key DEPRESS The cursor will automatically appear over the current TO waypoint on the DIRECT TO Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position DIRECT 1 2 the cursor over the iden tifier to follow the new entry Figure 3 91 3 Type in the waypoint identifier 4 ENT Key DEPRESS Waypoint Page Coordinates VERIFY or Figure 3 91 INSERT insert Waypoint Coordinates cursor over POS field a
117. HP FCF FAF or MAP waypoint above the TO Waypoint field DTK HEADING VECTOR 1 1 Desired track is the Great Circle course in whole degrees between the FROM and TO waypoints from Navigation Page 1 Figure 2 65 If the system is displaying Direct TO a waypoint the DTK will be from present position to the current TO waypoint NOTE If the default desired track is changed a Pseudo Vortac selected course leg will be programmed on the NAVIGATION 1 4 Page INTERCEPT Messages If the Intercept Mode is programmed one of the following messages may appear Figure 2 65 INTERCEPT BEYOND FIX indicates the commanded heading will cause the aircraft to intercept the programmed course on the FROM side of the fix NO COURSE INTERCEPT indicates the commanded heading will cause the aircraft to diverge from the programmed course crosstrack deviation will increase No Message indicates an intercept is not programmed or the com manded heading will intercept the programmed course prior to the fix The TO side of the fix NO ARC INTERCEPT indicates commanded heading will not inter cept the arc programmed on the approach procedure OK ENT The procedure for accepting the entered heading TO waypoint or DTK is to depress the ENT Key Figure 2 65 1 Rev 1 2 54 GNS X1 Flight Management System 98 Page Display Definitions TUNING SECTION TUNE KEY Upon pressing the TUNE Key the TUNE 1 4 Page will be displayed and
118. ID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3 20 EDITING SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3 21 ERASING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3 22 ADDING OR DELETING WAYPOINTS WITHIN SID 3 23 To Delete a Waypoint 3 23 ENTERING AN AIRWAY FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE AGTIVE EPL PAGE reset stad eet ters Sede ba 3 24 OPTION AS 3 24 EA ta n tet uc 3 25 V Rev 3 Oct 02 GNS XL Flight Management System Table of Contents EDITING AN AIRWAY 3 26 ENTERING A STAR OR PROFILE DESCENT ON STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3 27 REVIEWING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3 29 EDITING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3 29 ERASING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE PAGE 3 30 ADDING WAYPOINTS WITHIN STAR 3 31 DELETING WAYPOINTS OF A STAR 3 31 ENTERING AN APPROACH ON A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3 32 REVIEWING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPLPAGE 3 34 EDITING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 3 34 ERASING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL ORTHEACTIVEFPL eines
119. IDs the flight crew must manually fly the procedure to a point where the FMS can fly the procedure properly The first leg of the SID that the FMS can fly is usually the first way Rev 3 3 16 GNS Xi Flight Management System Oct 02 System Operation point after the airport identifier or departure runway After loading the SID on to the Active FPL access NAV Pg 1 Enter the first waypoint after the runway or airport identifier in the FR field Press ENTER The TO field will display the next waypoint in sequence from the FPL Press ENTER again to complete the initialization of the first leg of the flight plan The flight crew must manually fly the airplane until reach ing the first leg of the SID that can be flown by the FMS The following procedures contain leg types that the FMS cannot automatically fly and require manual intervention by the pilot The fol lowing operational procedures are recommended NOTE Some SIDs and STARs require intercept procedures upon reaching a specified altitude In these cases execute the Pseudo Vortac Direct To or Heading Intercept procedure upon reaching the specified altitude The CDU display Figure 3 amp PEAS LSE 21 shows the waypoints that would be added to the flight plan through reference to the WAYPOINTS OF SID ELMAAS SID transi tion from RW16L Figure 3 21 Heading to Intercept Procedures The shaded area on the SID chart Figure 3 20 is an example of the portio
120. ING VECTOR WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE 3 58 CHANGING TO WAYPOINT WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE 3 58 CANCELING HEADING SELECT MODE 3 59 PROGRAMMING AN INTERCEPT 3 59 PROGRAMMING A HEADING INTERCEPT TO THE FINAL APPROACH COURSE 3 61 PROGRAMMING A HOLDING PATTERN 3 63 REVIEWING EDITING OR CANCELING AHOLDING PATTERN 3 65 REVIEWING eene xe timent Chat 3 65 EDITING s oe eot a Eier redet te 3 66 CANGELING A Er 3 66 EXITING A HOLDING PATTERN 3 66 EXITING HOLDING PATTERN NEXT TIME OVER HOLDING FIX 3 67 EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY GOING DIRECT TO HOLDING FIX 3 68 EXITING HOLDING PATTERN BY PERFORMING ALEG CHANGE 3 68 VERTICAL NAVIGATION VNAV OPERATION PRE DEPARTURE 3 71 SETTING CRUISE ALTITUDE TRANSITION LEVEL AND DEFAULT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE 3 71 CREATING CHANGING VNAV WAYPOINTS 3 72 To program a Path Descent 3 74 REVIEWING VNAV WAYPOINTS 3 75 vii Rev 0 Oe GNS X1 Flight Management System Table of Contents Using Active Flight Plan Page 3 75 Using VNAV Flight Plan Waypoints Page 3 76 VERTICAL
121. INTS When SIDs STARs or Approaches have altitude constraints at way points on the procedure the system automatically loads the altitude constraints from the database on to the Active Flight Plan No altitude will be loaded at the MAP if the approach is a circling approach or the MAP is abeam or beyond the runway threshold The system will not load any expect to cross altitudes from the database on to the SIDS or STARS as part of ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN or VNAV Pages No altitudes are loaded from the database when an approach procedure contains a Procedure Turn NOTE The system will not fly a full SID or STAR procedure Using Active Flight Plan Page 1 FPL Key DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired waypoint 3 VNAV Key DEPRESS The VNAV WAYPOINT Page appears with the cursor over the ALT field Figure 3 125 4 ALT REVIEW NOTE If AUTO FPA is displayed the system has automatically programmed a waypoint to waypoint FPA Figure 3 125 for the procedure 5 ENT Key DEPRESS until display returns to ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page or depress the FPL Key UNAU WAYPOINT 1 1 Rev 3 oan GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 75 System Operation 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to review VNAV waypoint data at remaining waypoints Using VNAV Flight Plan Waypoints Page 1 VNAV Key DEPRESS to display the VNAV FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS Pages 2
122. IRECT TO Page will appear with the cursor over the current TO waypoint Figure 3 88 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position DIRECT 1 2 the cursor over the desired identifier NOTE Active Flight Plans exceeding 18 waypoints will be continued on subsequent pages Press gt or PRV Key to access remain ing waypoints 3 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 3 88 Display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1 NOTE The system must compute a turn from a wings level position If the aircraft is in a turn when the Key pressed the aircraft will roll to wings level position momentarily The aircraft will then contin ue the turn toward the Direct To waypoint If an offset waypoint was selected an OFFSET WPT Page is dis played Verify data and DEPRESS ENT The DIRECT Page is dis played with cursor over the Offset Waypoint Press ENT again to proceed direct to the WPT Display automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1 4 DIS DTK CHECK Rev 0 Gane GNS XL Flight Management System 3 51 System Operation DIRECT TO HP WAYPOINT 1 Key DEPRESS A DIRECT TO Page appears with the cursor over the current TO waypoint 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired HP identifier Figure 3 89 NOTE Active Flight Plans exceeding 18 waypoints will be continued on subsequent pages Press NXT or PRV Key to access remain ing waypoints 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to display the HOLDIN
123. JS 1 RZS DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH Figure 3 39 AIRWAY I TO OED COPPO NIECE PYE PESCA BSR ZONAL 77 SELECT ENDING WPT Figure 3 40 Oct 96 GNS Xi Flight Management System 3 25 System Operation NOTE If the waypoint above the cursor is not a waypoint on the selected airway the airway identifier will blink and the appropriate air way or waypoint identifier must be entered If the destination way point is not on the airway the system reverts to Option 1 d To change ending waypoint use the Line Select Key to posi tion cursor over a different destination waypoint If applica ble use PRV and NXT Keys to access all airway waypoint pages NOTE As the cursor is moved up or down will appear next to the cursor and a question mark will follow the ident Waypoints between the TO FR waypoints will be displayed in yellow 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to merge the airway way aaa Salas points into the Flight Plan and return to the Flight Plan Page Figure 3 41 NOTE If inserting the air DEPART way segment into the Flight Plan results in more than 50 APPROACH waypoints in the stored Flight Plan or 100 waypoints Figure 3 41 on the Active Flight Plan the message FPL FULL will appear 4 f applicable enter additional airway identifiers to chain several airways together EDITING AN AIRWAY Once an airway is merged into the flight plan waypoints can be added to or
124. Key adjust the display to the desired alignment DEPRESS any key when alignment is com plete 4 To turn the system off depress the ON Key and hold for three seconds Rev 2 Apr 00 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 1 System Operation INITIALIZATION PAGE It is important that the initial ization position and the first waypoint of the Active Flight Plan are the same so that the TO FROM Leg Distance displays the correct informa tion The DIRECT TO func tion to the first waypoint on the flight plan may also be used to insure distance Figure 3 2 accuracy INITIALIZATION The Initialization Page gives the pilot access to the required initializa tion data Date GMT and Position Following confirmation or entry of this data the page disappears and cannot be retrieved unless the system power is removed and then restored GMT and Date are available for display in the PLAN section and Position is available in the NAV section DATE and GMT The DATE and GMT are continuously updated while the system is off If non volatile memory is erased the date and time field will be dashes When the system is turned on the DATE and GMT will appear on the Initialization Page If the DATE is incorrect move the cursor to the DATE field to update manually 1 DATE INSERT if required day month year digits only For example March 1 1995 would be entered as 01 03 95 Enter a leading 0 for months with a numerical value of less than
125. LANNING SECTION PLAN KEY Upon pressing the PLAN Key the PLAN 1 8 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed PLAN PAGES PLAN 1 8 Page 1 of 8 FUEL STATUS FUEL STATUS LB PLAN 1 8 Indicates that fuel is being FUEL STATUS computed in pounds This unit can be manually changed to KG if desired using the BACK Key when the cursor is over the LB field Figure 2 50 NOTE the cursor must first be placed over the remaining E field so the LB field can be Figure 2 50 activated REMAINING The total fuel on board in pounds or kilograms This quantity must be initially entered or verified by the pilot and may require periodic verifica tion or update Figure 2 50 Rev 0 2 42 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions RESERVE The desired reserve as entered or verified by the operator displayed in pounds or kilograms This may require periodic verification or update Figure 2 50 FLOW The current fuel flow in pounds or kilograms input automatically from fuel flow indicators MAN indicates a pilot manual entry and the entry must be manually verified and periodically updated Figure 2 51 NOTE The above three quantities will flash after 15 minutes and will require verification by using the Line Select and ENT Keys if MAN fuel flow was selected VERIFY INPUTS PLAN 1 8 Each of the flashing values FUEL STATUS must be verified or entered by pressing the ENT Key when
126. LD Key is depressed again updating 1 or the system is shut down NOTE Since waypoint 1 is frequently redefined it is not retained in non volatile memory and the identifier 1 cannot be entered on a stored flight plan However the coordinates of WPT 1 can be stored on a Flight Plan by making them part of a pilot entered way point See page 3 127 for creating pilot entered waypoints It does however use up one of the 999 available waypoints as do OFF 0 and EX external Waypoints Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 123 System Operation NAVIGATION AT EXTREME LATITUDES North of 70 or South of 60 S CAUTION THE PROCEDURES LISTED IN THIS SECTION CON TAIN INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION OF THE GNS XI AT SPECIFIED LATITUDES BEYOND THE AUTO COMPUTED MAG NETIC VARIATION MODEL IN ALL CASES THE FLIGHT CREW OF ANY AIRCRAFT OPERATING AT THESE LATITUDES MUST CONSULT THE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT IN ORDER TO OBTAIN SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY Manual Magnetic Variation Entry 1 Key DEPRESS to display until NAVIGATION Page 3 is displayed 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR value field Local Variation INSERT E or W first 4 ENT Key DEPRESS MAN will be annunciated adjacent to the VAR field Returning To Automatic Variation 1 NAV Key DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 3 is displayed 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to place cursor over the VAR value field
127. Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired waypoint 3 ENT Key DEPRESS The VNAV WAYPOINT Page appears with the cursor over the ALT field Figure 3 126 4 ALT REVIEW or INSERT new value NOTE If the FPA was retrieved from the database WB UNRU WAYPOINT 1 1 DB appears in the FPA type field Figure 3 126 5 ENT Key DEPRESS to return to the VNAV FLIGHT PLAN WAY POINTS Page 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to review or change altitude constraints at Figure 3 126 remaining waypoints VERTICAL NAVIGATION ENROUTE PROGRAMMING VERTICAL PATH DESCENTS The pilot can use various methods to load a Flight Path Angle FPA and determine the aircrafts descent path NOTE When the system detects a rapid change of baro altitude set ting non continuous data from an air data computer vertical speed change of more than 40ft sec or sequencing to the next waypoint on the active flight plan the vertical deviation output is momentarily set Invalid When vertical deviation returns to a valid state the appropri ate value of vertical deviation will again be displayed 0 3 76 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation Using Database DB FPA The GNS X_ database contains Flight Path Angles associated with waypoints on SIDs STARs and Approaches that prefill when these procedures are programmed into the Active Flight Plan The FPA field on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page displays DB w
128. M full scale deflection USING A STAR AND AN APPROACH IN THE SAME FLIGHT PLAN Since both the Arrival STAR and Approach procedures allow for entry of AIRPORT and RUNWAY the following rules apply Changing the AIRPORT on the ARRIVAL Page and selecting an associated STAR automatically erases the APPROACH procedure Changing the AIRPORT on the APPROACH Page and selecting an associated Approach automatically erases the STAR procedure Changing the RUNWAY on the ARRIVAL Page and selecting it automatically erases the APPROACH procedure Changing the RUNWAY on the APPROACH Page and selecting it has no effect on the STAR procedure unless the STAR is runway dependent If the STAR is runway dependent the message SEL RWY FROM STAR PG Select RUNWAY from STAR Page appears on the APPROACH Page The pilot must return to the ARRIVAL Page to change the RUNWAY for the STAR before changing the RUNWAY on the APPROACH Page Rev 0 3 36 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation SELECTING A COMPANY ROUTE AND ADDING IT TO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 1 Display the COMPANY ROUTES Page automatically after ini tialization or by paging the FPL pages 2 Line Select Key LSR2 If you desire to change the Origin entry DEPRESS to position cursor over only ORIGIN field on the COM PANY ROUTES page and type in desired identi fier Figure 3 59a If the cursor is over both fields and the Origin is correct
129. MS as the NAV source Accurately fly the runway course or heading Immediately after passing WW166 press the key cursor over BRKNB and press ENTER NOTE This is known as the FMS Direct TO procedure LOWW MIKOV 2B Procedure Requirement Fly straight ahead over fly WW166 left turn direct to BRK ww272 N48 11 6 E016 47 3 BRUCK 408 BRK N48 03 8 E016 43 0 2 wwie6 E016 3 2 Figure 3 21b Rev 4 a GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 17b Nov 04 System Operation The following procedures allow the pilot to automatically add way points stored in the database as part of a SID STAR APPROACH or Enroute Airway to either a Stored or Active Flight Plan These procedures provide an abbreviated method of waypoint entry elimi nating the need to enter individual waypoint identifiers for SIDs STARs APPROACHes and Airways NOTE When a SID STAR APPROACH or Enroute Airway is added to an existing flight plan duplicate waypoints may occur To avoid an inconsistent flight plan and resulting map display it may be necessary to delete any duplicate waypoints Also the routings and coordinates must be verified by the operator These procedures must not be used in lieu of charts Due to the way the GNS X database is structured waypoints must have unique identifiers However some duplicate identifiers exist for more than one waypoint location These waypoints are primarily located on APPROACHES SIDS
130. N Depress and release the ON Key to apply power to the sys tem There is a warm up period of approximately 30 seconds The display illumination will ini tially be set at 75 of full bright Depressing the ON Key for approximately three seconds will initiate the system power off sequence During the sequence JO 3 8 1 p D D D D 8 3 At eX 060 O 0 5 1 4 QO MALJAR Hooo OON OOO CGU 6 the display will show SYSTEM TURNING OFF This is to prevent inadvertent system shutdown NOTE The system is also capable of being turned on and off by cycling aircraft power E w dL BRIGHTNESS BRT E gg I OTT i9 The BRT Key is used to change mI ic the illumination of the display I This key is also used f
131. NAVIGATION ENROUTE 3 76 PROGRAMMING VERTICAL PATH DESCENTS 3 76 Using Database DB FPA 3 77 Using Default DEF FPA 3 77 Using Manual FPA 3 77 Using Automatic AUTO 3 78 EDITING ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS 3 79 Option 1 Using VNAV Page 3 79 Option 2 Using VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Page 3 79 Option 3 Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page 3 80 DIRECT TO VNAV WAYPOINT AS LATERAL WAYPOINT 3 81 DIRECT TO VNAV WAYPOINT 3 83 CREATING VNAV PROFILE WAYPOINTS 3 84 Top of Climb 06 3 84 of Descent TOD 3 85 Pre Selected Altitude Intercept Point PRESL 3 86 Descent Reference Waypoints 3 86 REMOTE TUNING 3 89 TUNING COMMS 3 89 TUNING NAVS issuer eee Reve 3 90 Keyboard Method 3 90 TRANSPONDER AND ADF KEYBOARD TUNE 3 93 PLANNING PROCEDURES 3 95 FUEL PLANNING
132. NG PAT TERN BY PERFORMING A LEG CHANGE 1 Key DEPRESS to display the NAVIGA TION Page 1 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over FROM field HOLD RIGHT NAVIGATION 1 4 LEFT Figure 3 117 3 FR Waypoint INSERT desired waypoint Figure 3 116 Figure 3 117 5 0 3 68 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 4 ENT Key DEPRESS The next waypoint in the Active Flight Plan sequence will appear in the TO field Figure 3 118 5 TO Waypoint VERIFY To change the TO Waypoint insert the desired identifier 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to Figure 3 118 activate the new leg and cancel the Holding Pattern NAVIGATION 1 4 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 69 System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 3 70 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation VERTICAL NAVIGATION VNAV OPERATION PRE DEPARTURE SETTING CRUISE ALTITUDE TRANSITION LEVEL AND DEFAULT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE This procedure allows the pilot to define a Cruise Altitude and change the default values for Transition Level and Flight Path Angle After Initial Leg Selection 1 VNAV Key DEPRESS to display VNAV Page 1 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position UNAU 1 4 cursor over DATA Figure 3 119 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to display VNAV DATA Page with cursor over the CRUISE ALT field 4 Cruise Altitude INSERT Figure
133. NICATIONS SYSTEM Operating modes information is accessed by selecting option 8 on the AFIS MENU Page AUTO REPORT AFIS OPERATING MODES ON The aircraft will auto matically report position and il ages station ID for weather updates to the Global Data Center via SAT NETWORK the data link on a timed basis PRINTER CTRL OFF The automatic reporting ACTIVE LINK capability has been manually inhibited by the pilot Figure 7 28 AUTO WX UPDT WEATHER UPDATE ON The Global Data Center will automatically send weather wind updates for the displayed idents when new information is issued OFF The auto weather update function is not enabled Rev 3 1 18 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 VHF NETWORK Ground networks that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with the Global Data Center ON appropriate VHF network will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the specified bound aries Figure 7 28 OFF Network is not enabled SAT NETWORK Satellite network that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with the Global Data Center ON The appropriate satellite region will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the specified bound aries OFF Network is not enabled PRINTER CTRL Allows access to the Printer Control Page ACTIVE LINK Indicates the network in service i e ARINC
134. NING SECTION PLAN KEY 2 42 PLAN PAGES 3 1 2 eua 2 42 PLAN 1 8 Page 1 of 8 FUEL STATUS 2 42 PLAN 2 8 Page 2 of 8 TRIP PLAN 2 44 PLAN 3 8 Page of 8 FUEL PLAN 2 46 PLAN 4 8 Page 4 of 8 FUEL FLOW 2 47 PLAN 5 8 Page 5 of 8 DATE GMT 2 48 PLAN 6 8 Page 6 of 8 AIRCRAFT WEIGHT 2 48 PLAN 7 8 Page 7 of 8 FDE PREDICTION 2 49 FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1 1 Page 1 of 1 2 50 PLAN 8 8 Page 8 of 8 FDE COMPUTATION 2 51 HEADING SECTION HDG KEY 2 53 HEADING PAGE etic things eaten ERR eH naar 2 53 HEADING VECTOR 1 1 Page 1 of 1 2 53 TUNING SECTION TUNE KEY 2 55 TUNE 1 4 Page 1 of 4 COMM 2 55 TUNE 2 4 Page 2 of 4 COMM 2 55 TUNE 3 4 of 4 NAV 2 56 TUNE 4 4 Page 4 of 4 XPDR ADF 2 57 HOLDING PATTERN SECTION HOLD KEY 2 58 HOLDING PATTERN PAGE 2 58 HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 Page 1 0411 2 58 iii Rev 0 Oe GNS X1 Flight Managem
135. NL Figure 3 62 on NAVIGATION Page 2 4 FMS Mode SELECT or HEADING UECTOR 1 1 VERIFY the appropriate mode for guidance if required 5 Flight Director or Autopilot ENGAGE the appropriate mode if required ENTER HDG 6 HDG Key DEPRESS to display the HEADING Figure 3 63 VECTOR Page Figure 3 63 7 Heading INSERT as assigned by Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 39 System Operation ENT Key DEPRESS twice to engage Heading Select mode Figure 3 64 After receiving the final intercept vector from ATC 9 10 BACK Key DEPRESS 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 3 40 HDG Key DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page Figure 3 65 ENT Key DEPRESS to display INTERCEPT ENT Key DEPRESS cursor moves to the TO field BACK Key DEPRESS until the FAF waypoint is displayed HEADING VECTOR 1 1 Figure 3 64 HEADING VECTOR 1 1 Figure 3 65 ENT Key DEPRESS cursor moves to the DTK field Final Approach Course INSERT if a Procedure Turn type approach or VERIFY if any other type approach ENT Key DEPRESS twice CDI Display VERIFY the HSI course needle slews to the final approach course or manually select the course Approach Annunciator When over the FAF VERIFY annuncia tion and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI GATION Page 2 GNS Xz Flight Management System Rev 1 Jul 98 System Operat
136. NM Enroute The IRS is in the alignment mode and is not yet NAV RDY The IRS is in the Attitude mode The sensor is operating on its own internal battery The VPU quality factor has exceeded the pilot entered advisory quality factor The sensor has been manually deselected and will no longer contribute to the computa tion of composite blended position Message annunciator will not illuminate Rev 0 2 78 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions SENSOR MESSAGES continued Sensor Message Explanation DR ENTR SET HDG LINK FAIL NAV RDY NO NAV NO RAIM NO RAIM DEST NO SYNC RCVR FAIL STD FAIL Rev 2 Apr 00 Either the VLF RPU GPS or VPU sensor is in the Dead Reckoning DR mode of nav igation The message annunciator will not illuminate for VPU The IRS is in the attitude mode and a head ing value must be entered Data exchange between the sensor and CDU has failed The sensor is capable of navigation but has not been placed in the navigation mode Message annunciator will not illuminate Only displayed when GPS sensor is not available The sensor has not navigated since system power up Message annunciator will not illu minate RAIM is not available at this time RAIM is available at the present time but will not be available at the destination arrival time Omega synchronization has not been com pleted At least one Communicati
137. NS XL Flight Management System 2 11 Page Display Definitions 0 will be defined as the point at which the aircraft completes the turn and intercepts the direct course to the fix 0 will momentarily be dis played on an EFIS map 0 can only be defined by the system 1 The position at the point where the POSITION FIX Page was last accessed via the HOLD Key 1 can only be defined by the system Power Off Waypoint The Power Off Waypoint is a set of coordinates retrieved as the last known position when power is lost enroute This page should be accessed by inserting OFF in the IDENT field on the POSITION FIX Page after power has been restored and Initialization Enroute has been performed WAYPOINT OFF SPECIAL WPT The Power Off Waypoint des ignator Figure 2 88 POS The last present position coordinates at loss of power Coordinates are stored in non volatile memory Figure 2 88 Figure 2 88 GMT OFF The actual time Greenwich Mean Time of power loss Figure 2 88 MINUTES OFF The total time elapsed during power off Figure 2 88 LAST TK Aircraft track at time of power off Figure 2 88 LAST GS Last groundspeed in knots at time of power off Figure 2 88 OCEANIC REPORTING WAYPOINTS These waypoints are in the database and are used for oceanic posi tion reporting These waypoints can be added to the FPL by typing special numbers See Section 3 ADDING A WAYPOINT Rev 0 2 12 GNS X1 Flight Ma
138. NSMIT REQUEST Figure 7 54 ENT Key DEPRESS The request is downlinked and the system will display the AFIS MENU Page with the cursor over Option 3 Figure 7 53 Figure 7 54 1 32 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation RFIS SIGMETS 1 2 Rev 0 Oct 96 NOTE Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests A around the TO waypoints indicates that the updated information has not yet been received 10 AFIS or NXT Key DEPRESS Subsequent SIGMETS Pages will appear or AFIS MENU Page returns with cursor positioned over Option 3 TERMINAL WEATHER MENU DATA UPDATE AND REVIEW 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 3 TERMI AFIS MENU NAL WX Figure 7 55 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to display TERMINAL WX Menu Page Figure 7 56 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over the desired Terminal Wx airport identifi A NO Ul a er Figure 7 55 5 ENT Key DEPRESS If the desired identifier is TERMINAL WX enclosed parentheses pressing the ENT Key will cause it to blink indicating no weather information is available for that identifier If no identifiers are displayed they may be inserted by press ing the Line Select Key which will create a cursor over the first Figure 7 56 blank identifier position INSERT an airport identifier 6 ENT Key DEPRESS 7
139. O When this page is accessed the cursor is displayed over the current TO waypoint Figure 2 75 The following may also be displayed with a waypoint HP Holding Pattern Procedure Turn MAP Missed Approach Point FAF Final Approach Fix Figure 2 75 and IAF Initial Approach Fix DIRECT 1 2 Rev 0 2 64 GNS XL Flight Management System Page Display Definitions DIR CLOSEST ARP 2 2 Page 2 of 2 DIRECT TO CLOSEST AIR PORT The Closest Airport DIR CLOSET ARP 1 2 lt page is the last page in the DIRECT TO section Up to nine airports are displayed in order of their proximity to the aircraft with the closest airport listed first Figure 2 76 NOTE Airports listed from the database on this page Figure 2 76 have runways 3000 ft long or greater and are hard surfaced WAYPOINT SECTION WAYPOINT PAGES Waypoints fall into four categories Database generated Pilot entered personalized offset Special Obsolete Waypoint Pages be accessed from any FLIGHT PLAN 9 HOLD INITIALIZATION HEADING or TRIP PLAN FUEL PLAN Pages DATABASE WPT 1 1 Page 1 of 1 Database Generated Waypoints This page is accessed by typing in a waypoint identifier or by placing the cursor over a waypoint identifier and pressing ENT Database Generated Waypoints are automatically updated when accessed and cannot be modified by the operator The four basic types of waypoi
140. O REPORT ans 7 18 AUTO WX weather update 7 18 VHF LINK CONTROL Page 7 20 SAT LINK CONTROL Page 7 20 OPERATING MODES Page For AFIS Users NOT Equipped with Satellite Data Communications System 7 21 5 s AE Reto a 7 21 AUTO WX weather update 1 22 Active Flight Plan Page for AFIS Flight Plan Updating 7 23 AFIS UPDATE Verification Page 7 23 SYSTEM MESSAGES Page 7 24 SYSTEM MESSAGES cr ener te 7 24 ADVISORY irc xe ee Diete oed dea aes 7 24 SYSTEM OPERATION ssc iecore ead 7 27 iene YI EE 7 27 AFIS Flight Plan Selection 7 27 To enter an AFIS Flight Plan 7 27 EN ROUTE 7 28 Reviewing Flight Plan Progress 7 28 xii Rev 3 GNS Xz Flight Management System Oct 02 Table of Contents Reviewing AFIS Planned Leg Data 7 28 Reviewing AFIS Flight Plan Data 7 29 AFIS Flight Plan Page 1 7 29 AFIS Flight Plan Page
141. P PLAN and returning to FUEL PLAN Page also updates the leg with DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint VERIFYING OR CHANGING DATE AND TIME DEPRESS the Plan Key until the DATE GMT Page appears DATE VERIFY or INSERT Position cursor with Line Select Key and follow procedure in INITIAL IZATION PAGE section GMT VERIFY or INSERT Position cursor with Line Select Key and follow procedure in INITIAL IZATION PAGE section NOTE If GPS time is available GMT is automatically updated to GPS time Figure 3 170 TAKEOFF The GMT at weight off wheels plus 10 seconds Figure 3 170 LAND The GMT at weight on wheels This field is not dis played until 10 seconds after weight on wheels occurs Figure 3 170 Figure 3 170 NOTE TAKEOFF and LAND data may be based on groundspeed and or TAS valids depending upon system configuration FLIGHT TIME The elapsed flight time is displayed in hours and minutes Figure 3 170 NOTE TAKEOFF and Flight times will be altered if the GMT is changed during flight Rev 0 3 104 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation VERIFYING OR CHANGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT PARAMETERS This procedure allows the pilot to confirm or adjust basic operating weight payload or fuel to current on board data 1 PLAN Key DEPRESS to display AIRCRAFT WEIGHT Page NOTE BASIC OP WT PAYLOAD and FUEL ON BOARD fields will be blinking if update has not been entered after
142. RESS to display the VNAV WAYPOINT Page for TO Waypoint 6 ALT INSERT or VERIFY If an altitude constraint has already been programmed the cursor will be displayed over the FPA DIR field value You may proceed to Step 10 Figure 3 135 NOTE If the waypoint is part of a SID STAR or Approach proce dure the ALT constraint field prefills from the database 7 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor moves to OFFSET field Figure 3 134 8 OFFSET If applicable INSERT value in nautical miles 99 to 99 range a f the offset is prior to the waypoint enter the range value and a pre fills as a default or b enter a then the range value to indi cate the offset is beyond the waypoint NOTE To erase the offset value INSERT 0 and press ENT Key The field changes to dashes indicating no off set is programmed 9 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor moves to the FPA field NOTE Cursor only moves to the FPA field if altitude constraint is below current baro altitude UNRU WAYPOINT 1 1 Figure 3 134 UNAU WAYPOINT 1 1 Figure 3 135 10 Flight Path Angle VERIFY Direct Flight Path Angle is desirable to fly NOTE Direct Flight Path Angle prefills if it is within the valid range 0 1 to 6 0 Figure 3 135 Rev 0 3 82 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation 11 ENT Key DEPRESS to accept waypoint entries VNAV Page 1 is displayed a Vertical Path Descent has been established a
143. S Figure 7 98 Operating Modes Page Rev 3 1 50 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 TURNING SATELLITE NETWORK OFF 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page AFIS MENU 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 8 OPER ATING MODES Figure 7 99 3 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 7 99 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over ON option of SAT AUTO REPORT satellite NETWORK field AUTO WX UPDT Figure 7 100 UHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL 5 BACK Key DEPRESS ACTIVE LINK OFF appears in the cursor 7 100 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn the satellite network OFF Figure 7 101 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT NOTE The ACTIVE LINK AUTO WX UPDT information at the bottom of the UHF NETWORK page indicates the network that SAT NETWORK is being serviced at that time If PRINTER EISE all networks are turned OFF or ACTIVE LINK none are operational NONE will be displayed Figure 7 101 Rev 3 AD GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 51 TURNING SATELLITE NETWORK The satellite network must be turned ON to send non flight related messages Since the VHF network has precedence over the satellite network in areas of shared coverage the VHF NETWORK must be turned OFF in order for SATCOM to be the Active Link If the VHF network cannot be received and the SAT COM mode is set to ON the sy
144. S annunciator to enable the air to ground data link Also enable VHF or satel lite network Wait for DATA CENT AK mes sage if sending multiple requests RECALL OPTION 2 If Flight Plan Number field is blank 1 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor will position itself over date field Figure 7 66 2 DATE INSERT issue date day AFIS Flight Plan being recalled ENT Key DEPRESS gt Plan being recalled ENT Key DEPRESS ENT Key DEPRESS 0 RECALL AFIS FPL Figure 7 65 RECALL AFIS FPL Figure 7 66 month year digits only of ETD INSERT estimated time of departure in GMT of AFIS Flight FR field INSERT origin ICAO Identifier TO field INSERT destination ICAO Identifier Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 31 10 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor is positioned over TRANSMIT REQUEST Figure 7 67 ENT Key DEPRESS to ini tiate recalling of AFIS Flight Plan from Global Data Center AFIS MENU Page will appear with cursor posi tioned over Option 6 RECALL AFIS FPL Figure 7 67 NOTE SIGMETS Winds and Term Wx are automatically updated once the FPL is recalled NOTE Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE OR PDC AFIS MENU 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 6 SEND AFIS MS
145. SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guid ance 5 Flight Director or Autopilot ENGAGE the appropriate mode Rev 1 3 44 GNS X1 Flight Management System JuV98 6 After receiving ARC inter System Operation HDG Key DEPRESS to display the HEADING HEADING VECTOR 1 1 VECTOR Page Figure 3 75 Heading INSERT as assigned by ATC ENT Key DEPRESS twice to engage HDG aiia Eie SELECT mode Figure 3 75 cept vector from ATC 9 10 1 12 ENT Key DEPRESS HDG Key DEPRESS to display the HEADING VECTOR Page Heading INSERT HERDING UECTOR 1 1 ENT Key DEPRESS BACK Key DEPRESS to display INTERCEPT Figure 3 76 cursor moves to the TO field BACK Key DEPRESS Figure 3 76 until the ARC End Final Approach Course Way point is displayed NOTE If an intermediate waypoint exists on the ARC between the ARC beginning point and the ARC end point the ARC intercept point should be approximated so it can be determined whether the ARC end or intermediate waypoint should be used as the TO waypoint NO ARC INTERCEPT may be displayed if the wrong waypoint is selected 15 16 17 18 ENT Key DEPRESS twice accepts the default DTK CDI Display VERIFY course needle is set to the DTK shown on the HEADING VECTOR Page Waypoints and HSI Course VERIFY proper sequencing during the approach Approach Annunciator When over the FAF VERIFY annuncia tion and the
146. ST Page The cursor may Ed be placed over the desired FPL number To review the FPL press ENT Figure 3 6 If AFIS ACARS is installed the display will advance to the AFIS FPL Page or the ACARS Initialization Page after the system is initialized KHPN 5 2 3 4 GNS X1 Flight Management System Apr 00 System Operation Option 2 Using the POS field For IRS equipped systems the ramp or alignment LAT LONG posi tion should be inserted as the Initialization Position using POS Coordinates 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS cursor over POS field 2 POS Coordinates VERIFY Coordinates displayed are the computed position when the system was shutdown correct these coordinates may be used as the Departure Position If Incorrect a Latitude INSERT N or S first then 6 numbers degrees minutes and hundredths b ENT Key DEPRESS See Note c Longitude INSERT E or W first then 7 numbers degrees minutes and hundredths NOTE If coordinate field flashes after entry verify coordinates and depress ENT again Coordinate field will flash if the entered value varies more than 10 arc minutes from the displayed value If only one coordinate is in error it may be updated individually by depressing N S E or W Key to access the desired field 3 ENT Key DEPRESS If AFIS is not installed in the system The FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page will now be displayed A Flight Plan may be selected by bringing the cu
147. T or AUTO WX UPDATE function AFIS OPERATING MODES NOTE If all networks are OFF AUTO REPORT then AUTO REPORT and AUTO WX UPDT AUTO WX UPDATE will be UHF NETWORK OFF SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 84 Rev 3 Oct 02 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 45 AUTO WEATHER UPDATE When the system is initialized AFIS MENU the Automatic Weather Update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown The following procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON TURNING AUTO WX UPDT OFF 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to Figure 7 85 display AFIS MENU Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur AFIS OPERATING MODES sor over Option 8 OPER ATING MODES Figure 7 AUTO REPORT 85 AUTO WX UPDT UHF NETWORK ENT Key DEPRESS SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur ACTIVE LINK sor over ON option of a AUTO WX UPDT field Figure 7 86 Figure 7 86 5 BACK Key DEPRESS OFF appears in the cursor Figure 7 87 RFIS OPERRTING MODES 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to RUTO REPORT turn OFF the AUTO WX AUTO WX UPDT UPDT function UHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK NOTE A Weather Update PRINTER CTRL Request must be performed to notify the GDC of the change in status of AUTO WX UPDT ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 87 Rev 3 7 46 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 RETURNING AUTO WX UPDT 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU
148. TA or DIS will be displayed If a B is performed to a waypoint beyond this type of fence all waypoints prior to the fence will be deleted from the active flight plan e 7 Follows the last waypoint on the Flight Plan and indicates where the next waypoint entry will normally begin DEPART Used to access the DEPARTURE Page to enter a Standard Instrument Departure SID Figure 2 5 ARRIVE Used to access the ARRIVAL Page to enter a Standard Terminal Arrival STAR or Profile Descent Figure 2 5 f Rev 1 2 4 GNS X1 Flight Management System Jul98 Page Display Definitions APPROACH Used to access the APPROACH Page to enter a non precision approach Figure 2 5 XFILL Used to transfer information between systems in a dual sys tem installation In a single system installation this prompt will not be displayed SELECT or INVERT Used to transfer a Stored Flight Plan to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page Depressing the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field brings up INVERT which is used to transfer the waypoint of a Stored Flight Plan to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page in reverse order Figure 2 5 ERASE Used to clear an entire flight plan Figure 2 5 DEPARTURE Page Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to DEPART on the FLIGHT PLAN Page With the cursor over DEPART press ENT NOTE Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that partic ular field or DEPARTURE airport field will fl
149. TO WX UPDATE OFF 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page AFIS MENU 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8 OPERATING MODES Figure 7 79 3 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 7 79 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur ESSLE sor over ON option of AUTO REPORT or AUTO AUTO REPORT WX UPDATE field Figure AUTO WX UPDT 7 80 UHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL 5 BACK Key DEPRESS _ ACTIVE LINK OFF appears in the cursor 7 80 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn OFF the AUTO AFIS OPERATING MODES REPORT or AUTO WX UPDATE function AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT UHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK NOTE If all networks are OFF PRINTER CTRL then AUTO REPORT and AUTO WX UPDATE will be ACTIVE LINK OFF m Figure 7 81 Rev 3 7 44 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 RETURNING TO AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDATE 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to AFIS MENU position cursor over Option 8 OPERATING MODES Figure 7 82 lt a NOUFWNE 3 ENT Key DEPRESS 4 Line Select Key Figure 7 82 DEPRESS to position cur sor over OFF option of AUTO REPORT or AUTO WX UPDATE field Figure 7 83 RUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT 5 BACK Key DEPRESS ON appears the cursor PRINTER CTRL Figure 7 84 ACTIVE LINK 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to Figure 7 83 turn ON the AUTO REPOR
150. The altitude input to the system has failed Approach is ready to be executed Pressing ENTER TO CANCEL ENT will cancel the sequence Displayed APRCH NEXT within 30NM radius of the airport CDI sensi tivity changes to 1NM full scale deflection VNAV Deviation changes to 500 ft full scale deflection The message annunciator will not illuminate Aircraft is within 3NM of the FAF CDI sen ENTER TO CANCEL sitivity changes from 1NM to 3NM full scale APRCH ACTIVE ENTER TO CANCEL APRCH CANCELED APRCH WARN CNFG DATA LOST CNFG MODULE FAIL COMPASS FAIL deflection The message annunciator will not illuminate Approach sequence is being executed Pressing ENT will cancel the approach The message annunciator will not illuminate System is in an Approach Mode and the approach is changed or deleted from the Active Flight Plan The aircraft is within 2 NM from the FAF and GPS is in Dead Reckoning DR or there is no RAIM available HSI is flagged CDU non volatile memory has lost its config uration information and the configuration module has failed Configuration module has failed CDU non volatile memory configuration information will be used The aircraft s compass heading input to the System is invalid DATA BASE INVALID The data base is invalid because the last UPDATE ABORTED Rev 0 Oct 96 attempt to update the data base was aborted GNS X Flight Management System 2 15 Page Display
151. V RDY VERIFY POSITION message appears VERIFY POSITION message and the MSG light remains on To verify position use Position Check and Update Procedure NAV RDY VERIFY POSITION message only appears on the SYS TEM MESSAGES Page following a system DR POSITION CHECK AND UPDATE PROCEDURES Using a Sensor A position update may also be performed using any one of the navi gating interfaced position sensors as a reference The following pro cedure describes this action 1 HOLD Key DEPRESS POSITION FIX 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS ONCE to place the cursor over the FIX field The field will dis play FIX Figure 3 177 3 BACK Key DEPRESS until the desired sensor preferably the GPS sen sor to be used as the update reference appears the cursor The position POSITION FIX of each sensor will appear sequentially along with the DIF to the composite posi tion Figure 3 178 4 ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor will advance to the DIF field displaying the direction and distance in degrees minutes and hundredths of minutes from the sensor position to the composite position Figure 3 178 5 ENT Key DEPRESS to update composite position to the selected sensor NAV Page 1 will be displayed 2 3 110 GNS X1 Flight Management System Apr 00 System Operation Over Known Point This procedure is used to cross check or update the system by over flying a Known reference point such as a radio n
152. X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions VLF SUBSECTION PAGES NOTE The sensor SUBSECTION Pages may be accessed by plac ing the cursor over the individual position sensor and pressing the ENT Key Use the NAV PRV or NXT Key to page through the sen sor SUBSECTION pages Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4 4 Page if AFIS is installed in the system access is through the NAVIGATION 4 5 Page by press ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the VLF sensor then press ing ENT VLF SUBSECTION 1 4 Page 1 of 4 POS Same as on NAVIGATION 4 4 VLF ULF SUBSECTION 1 4 The actual position computed by the sensor when in the NAV mode Figure 2 25 DIF The difference between the composite position and the sensor computed position in degrees minutes and hun dredths Figure 2 25 VLF SUBSECTION 2 4 Page 2 of 4 Pressing the NXT Key will display the second VLF SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed QUALITY Quality Factor is a numerical display that indicates the reliability of position data and determines the weight of the VLF Omega Sensor input to the composite position The number will range from 2 to 7 with 2 being optimum in the primary navigation mode and from 8 to 99 in the dead reckoning mode DR NO STD will be displayed if the rubidium frequency standard in the RPU is unstable Figure 2 26 Figure 2 25 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 21 Page Di
153. a 3 character letters and num bers IDENTIFIER enter the identifier printed Example 31J Lake City Florida enter 31J Figure 2 82 Airport Reference Points Outer Markers Runway Thresholds Airport Reference Point ARP coordinates always displayed in response to the airport identi fier Outer markers and runway thresholds for which data is stored in the database are also displayed on the airport waypoint page also known as airport continuation records page and can be accessed by pressing the PRV or NXT Key or Line Select Keys Figure 2 83 The selected outer marker or runway threshold will then be displayed in place of the air DRTRBRSE WAYPOINT KNEW RWG9 RW1i8L RW18 RW26 Figure 2 82 DATABASE WPT WAYPOINT OM19R POS BITTE RWG1R RW19L Figure 2 83 port identifier in the waypoint field The airport identifier Shifts to and replaces the ARP field below Figure 2 83 Rev 0 2 68 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions Intersections Enroute Waypoints DATABASE WPT 1 2 Most intersection waypoint identifiers consist of 5 letters However 3 4 and 5 letter and number combinations exist To access these way points simply enter the iden tifier from the Jeppesen 03105 chart Example WHALE intersection Figure 2 84 Figure 2 84 SPECIAL DATABASE WAYPOINTS PILOT ENTERED WPT Personaliz
154. accessed using the BACK Key when the cursor is over this field Figure 2 73 LEG TIME Holding Pattern inbound leg time in minutes and tenths 1 0 to 9 9 Figure 2 73 NOTE The LEG TIME may be in parentheses indicating that the time has been calculated using LEG DIS LEG DIST distance HOLDING PRTTERN 1 1 Holding Pattern inbound leg distance in nautical miles 1 0 nm to 50 0 nm Figure 2 73 NOTE The LEG DIS may be in parentheses indicating that the dis tance has been calculated using LEG TIME Rev 0 2 62 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions EXIT MODE The MANUAL default indicates the system will stay in the holding pattern indefinitely Using the BACK Key with the cursor over this field AUTO can be selected if the ENT key is pressed The system will then execute a holding pattern entry and exit the next time cross ing the fix waypoint Figure 2 73 NOTE If a holding pattern is selected an HP is annunciated next to the waypoint on Flight Plan Navigation and Direct To Pages OK ENT Depressing ENT Key when this prompt appears at the bottom of the Holding Pattern Page programs a Holding Pattern for a particular waypoint NOTE The cursor will not appear in this field CANCEL Used to cancel a holding pattern Figure 2 73 POSITION FIX PAGE This page is accessed by depressing the HOLD Key anytime the cur sor is not displayed over a waypoint POS The composi
155. actor for the GPS Horizontal Situation Indicator Initial Approach Fix International Civil Aviation Organization Identifier Instrument Landing System Inbound Holding or Procedure Turn course Inertial Navigation System Inertial Reference System Name of Navigation Database Source CDU Keyboard Entry Kilogram Kilograms Kilohertz Latitude Pound Pounds Leg Distance Longitude Magnetic Magnetic VariationMAN Manual Altitude Manual Entry Rev 0 GNS Xz Flight Management System Oct 96 MHz MSG NAV NAVAID NDB NM NOTAM NX NXT OM POS PRESEL ALT PRESL PREV or PRV PRN PT RAD RAIM Rev 0 Oct 96 List of Abbreviations amp Definitions DEFINITION Missed Approach Point Megahertz Message Navigation Navigation Aid Typically a Radio Station Providing VOR and or DME Position Data NAV Database or Non Directional Beacon Nautical Miles Notice to Airman Next Waypoint Next Outer Marker Position Present or Waypoint Preselect Altitude Preselected Altitude Profile Point Previous Pseudo Random Noise GPS Satellite Number Procedure Turn Radial Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring GNS X1 Flight Management System 6 5 List of Abbreviations amp Definitions REM REQ FPM RCVD RMI RNAV RNG RPU RW SAT SID SM SNR STAR SXTK TACAN TAS TK TKE TOC TOD 6 6 DEFINITION Remaining Required Feet Per Minute Received Radio Ma
156. alia JPN Tsushima Japan Columns 2 and 3 Same as VLF SUBSECTION 3 4 Rev 0 2 24 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions IRS INS SUBSECTION PAGES IRS or INS SUBSECTION 1 2 Page 1 of 2 POS The position in this field is the same as POS on NAVI GATION 4 4 Figure 2 29 IRS INS The actual position comput ed by the specified sensor when in NAV mode Figure 2 29 DIF IRS SUBSECTION 1 2 Figure 2 29 The difference between the composite position and the sensor com puted position in degrees minutes and hundredths Figure 2 29 IRS SUBSECTION 2 2 Page 2 of 2 TIME TO NAV The time remaining until alignment is complete Figure 2 30 CURRENT MODE This field annunciates the cur rent mode of the IRS The messages that can appear are ATTITUDE ALIGN or NAV Figure 2 30 NOTE Page 2 is only displayed with an IRS IRS SUBSECTION 2 2 IRS STATUS Figure 2 30 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 25 Page Display Definitions VPU SUBSECTION PAGES Accessed through the NAVIGATION 4 4 Page if AFIS is installed in the system access is through the NAVIGATION 4 5 Page by press ing the Line Select Key corresponding to the VPU sensor then pressing ENT VPU SUBSECTION 1 4 Page 1 of 4 POS The position in this field is the same as POS on NAVI GATION 4 4 Figure 2 31 VPU The actual position computed by the sensor wh
157. an is loaded Figure 2 52 FR The FROM waypoint identifi Figure 2 52 er is followed on the same line by the first waypoint origin on the selected flight plan KDAL The FROM waypoint is usually replaced by DIRECT Figure 2 52 TO The TO waypoint identifier is followed on the same line by the last waypoint destination on the selected flight plan RW34 Figure 2 52 GS The groundspeed in knots is input automatically when the ground speed is valid or can be inserted manually which is indicated by MAN The GS value MAN and ETA value will change to yellow CALC will replace MAN field if a manual ETA is entered on line 9 Figure 2 52 Rev 0 2 44 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions DIS DTK The distance in nautical miles and tenths between either the FROM and TO waypoints or between the aircraft s present position and the TO waypoint The desired track is the Great Circle course between the FROM and TO waypoints The DTK will have a T adjacent to it if a true heading input is received or if the FROM waypoint is north N 70 or south S 60 latitude Figure 2 52 ETE The estimated time enroute in hours minutes and tenths of minutes between the aircraft s present position and the TO waypoint or the FROM and TO waypoints based on the GS value Figure 2 52 FPL The total active or stored flight plan distance and time remaining via the Flight Planned route from t
158. anings of the fields on VNAV Page 1 UNRU 1 3 UNAU 1 3 SI TOC HEMET 5 A XYZ 10000G UNRU 1 3 UNRU 1 3 Progression of Vertical Waypoints from Climb to Path Decent on VNAV 1 1 Figure 2 41 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 35 Page Display Definitions UNRU 1 3 CLIMB T0C Cruise Altitude FL250 Vertical Last Departure altitude Speed i constraint waypoint Groundspeed a a TOC Range i NOTE Top of Climb appears as a Vertical Waypoint on the VNAV FPL Page when the aircraft is within 1 NM of the last departure waypoint that has an altitude constraint programmed UNAU 1 3 DESCENT Vert Dev E ML to RE Programmed Descent Path is Descent Reference Wot at altitude constraint Definition of Climb and Decent on VNAV 1 1 Figure 2 42 Rev 0 2 36 GNS X Flight Management System Page Display Definitions VNAV 2 3 Page 2 of 3 FLIGHT PLAN WayPoint Pressing the VNAV Key will display the second VNAV Page and the following can be observed VNAV MODE Mode required to fly to the vertical TO waypoint and Baro Altitude in feet Can display one of the following INVALID Same as on 1 1 INACTIVE Same as on 1 1 CLIMB Same as on VNAV 1 1 CRUISE Same as on VNAV 1 1 PATH DESCENT Same as on VNAV 1 1 DESCENT Same as on VNAV 1 1 LEVEL Same as on 1 1 WAYPOINTS E E
159. ash if no Departure is available A NO SIDS AVAILABLE message will appear at the bot tom of the screen DEPARTURE Departure airport identifier This field prefills if first waypoint on the flight plan is an airport or runway or it can be manually entered Figure 2 6 RUNWAY Departing runway This field prefills if first waypoint on the flight plan is a runway or it can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field Figure 2 6 DEPARTURE Figure 2 6 Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 2 5 Page Display Definitions SID The Standard Instrument Departure SID can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the SID field TRANSITION The Transition waypoint can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSITION field WAYPOINTS OF SID The waypoints that constitute the SID Figure 2 7 DEPARTURE SELECT WAYPOINTS OF SID Used to select the defined ee SID Figure 2 7 RUE ERASE 55909 to erase SID Figure Figure 2 7 ARRIVAL Page Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to ARRIVE on the FLIGHT PLAN Page With the cursor over ARRIVE press ENT NOTE Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that particu lar field or ARRIVAL field will flash if no Arrival is available and a NO STARS AVAILABLE message will appear at
160. assign the printer port that will be used when messages are printed Messages can be sent to printer port 1 PRT1 printer port 2 PRT2 or BOTH 1 AFIS key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES ENTER Key DEPRESS 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the PRINT ER CTRL field SEL will appear in the field 5 ENTER Key DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over MESSAGE DEST 7 BACK Key DEPRESS to cycle destination field between PRT1 PRT2 and BOTH 8 ENTER Key DEPRESS to set Message Destination field to its present value PRT1 PRT2 or BOTH WEATHER DEST The Weather Destination field is used to assign the printer port that will be used when weather is printed Weather can be sent to printer port 1 PRT1 printer port 2 PRT2 or BOTH 1 AFIS key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES Rev 3 1 54 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 ENTER Key DEPRESS 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option of PRINTER CTRL field 5 ENTER Key DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over WEATHER DEST 7 BACK Key DEPRESS to cycle destination field between PRT1 PRT2 and BOTH 8 ENTER Key DEPRESS to set M
161. ata is invalid Rev 0 0196 GNS X1 Flight Management System 2 19 Page Display Definitions HDG The heading input received from an IRS or the aircraft compass sys tem If HDG can be manually inserted MAN will be displayed Figure 2 23 BRG The bearing in whole degrees from the aircraft present position to the TO waypoint Figure 2 23 TK The track angle in whole degrees Figure 2 23 NAVIGATION 4 4 Page 4 of 4 Pressing the NAV Key again will display the fourth NAVIGATION Page and the following can be observed IDENT A waypoint identifier of a fix to NAVIGATION 4 4 be overflown can be entered here to update the system position Figure 2 24 POS The current composite posi tion latitude and longitude computed in degrees min utes and hundredths of min utes Figure 2 24 VLF IRS INS VPU and GPS A listing of all interfaced sensors The radial difference between the individual sensor position and the composite position is displayed in nautical miles and tenths Sensors not being used in the composite position solution will display the radial difference in yellow Sensors being used will display the radial difference in green The GPS sen sor will normally be the sole contributing sensor to the composite position as long as RAIM is available Figure 2 24 Figure 2 24 NOTE IRS radial error is always green because velocity values are used to aid GPS position Rev 0 2 20 GNS
162. ation geometry is inadequate for navigation 1 CONFLICT or 2 CONFLICT The VPU is not using a manually or keyboard tuned station because of a possible station frequency conflict within the aircraft s current line of sight Figure 2 32 VPU SUBSECTION 3 4 Page 3 of 4 Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third VPU SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed VPU Sensor With Single Channel DME Inputs Figure 2 33 1 and 2 UPU SUBSECTION 3 4 The station identifier and fre quency being used for navi UPU STATIONS gation RNG The range in nautical miles and tenths from aircraft pre sent position to the DME sta tion BRG Bearing in whole degrees from aircraft present position to the VOR Figure 2 33 Rev 1 Tut GNS Xi Flight Management System 2 21 Page Display Definitions VPU with Multiple Channel DME Inputs Figure 2 34 NAV 1 UPU SUBSECTION 3 4 The stations received by the NAV 1 VOR DME receivers UPU STATIONS The station identifier is shown adjacent to the field with the ACTIVE frequency RNG Same as above BRG Figure 2 34 Same as above CH 2 The station identifier and frequency for an additional station that the multiple channel DME is receiving This frequency may or may not be displayed on the control head RNG The range in nautical miles and tenths from the aircraft s present position to the Channel 2 DME station
163. avaid or visual check point 1 HOLD Key DEPRESS over known point 2 Known Point ENT using either Option 1 IDENT or Option 2 Coordinates for check points not in memory Option 1 IDENT a IDENT INSERT b ENT Key DEPRESS c Waypoint Page Coordinates VERIFY d ENT Key DEPRESS The DIF display shows the direction and dis tance in degrees minutes and hun dredths of minutes from the FIX position to the composite position Figure 3 179 e ENT Key DEPRESS if position update is desired NAVIGATION Page 1 is displayed Figure 3 179 POSITION FIX Option 2 Coordinates a Line Select Key cursor over FIX coordinates Figure 3 180 Figure 3 180 Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 111 System Operation b Latitude INSERT or 5 first then degrees minutes and hundredths ENT Key DEPRESS d Longitude INSERT E or W first then degrees minutes and hundredths e ENT Key DEPRESS The DIF display shows the direction and distance in degrees minutes and hundredths of minutes from the FIX position to the composite position f ENT Key DEPRESS if position update is desired NAVI GATION Page 1 is displayed NOTE If coordinate field flashes after entry verify coordinates and depress ENT again If System Updated The VLF RPU sensor and the VPU interfaced to the updated CDU are updated as well as the composite posi
164. aximum manual TAS value that can be entered is 850 knots Figure 3 188 NAVIGATION 3 4 MANUAL HEADING ENTRY only if IRS or VLF is available A manual heading entry will be possible only if the system is using a VLF OMEGA sensor with H field antenna and the automatic heading input has failed If the automatic heading input returns it will override the manual entry without operator action If the manual heading is required a MAN HDG REQD message will appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page To Enter A Manual Heading 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display page with HDG 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over HDG field HDG INSERT NAVIGATION 3 4 4 ENT Key DEPRESS MAN will appear adja cent to the HDG field Figure 3 189 NOTE SYSTEM MES SAGES Page will display USING MAN HDG message Figure 3 189 Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 119 System Operation VLF OMEGA STATION DESELECTION The following procedure allows a VLF Communication or Omega sta tion to be removed from an RPU s navigation solution 1 Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION NAVIGATION 4 4 Page 4 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over VLF sen sor field Figure 3 190 ENT Key DEPRESS 4 or NXT Key DEPRESS to sequence POUE efe through VLF SUBSEC TION Select either VLF Comm or Omega Station List Page Figure 3 191 5 Line Select Key DEPRESS io
165. ay the RUNWAY field also prefills Figure 3 44 and the cursor is over the first TRANSITION waypoint on the list Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 27 System Operation If there are no STARs associated with the Arrival Airport the mes sage NO STARS AVAILABLE appears and the arrival airport ident field flashes Depress FPL Key to return to ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 4 NXT Key DEPRESS to view waypoints on subsequent pages if desired Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired TRANSITION Figure 3 45 ENT Key DEPRESS to select TRANSITION NOTE The STAR field turns yellow and the cursor is over the first identifier on the STAR list 7 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired STAR See Figure 3 46 ENT Key DE PRESS to select STAR NOTE If the STAR and TRANSITION are runway dependent and a runway has not prefilled the cursor moves to the first RUNWAY identifier on the runway list and the runway field is displayed in yel low If a runway is not required proceed to Step 11 9 RRRIURL Figure 3 45 RRRIURL Figure 3 46 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired RUNWAY on the runway list 10 ENT Key DEPRESS to select RUNWAY 3 28 Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 11 Arrival STAR Waypoints REVIEW Figure 3 47 ARRIVAL then DEPRESS ENT Key to insert STAR int
166. ayed during a PT even if dissimilar data exists in each system Estimated Time Enroute ETE that is dispayed after crossing the IAF on the procedure turn is the time from the aircraft s present position to where the airplane intercepts the final approach course inbound INTCPT After crossing this intercept point the ETE shown will be from the airplane s present position to the FAF DIS that is displayed after crossing the IAF on the procedure turn is the distance from the aircraft s present position to where the airplane intercepts the final approach course inbound INTCPT The DIS shown in parentheses is the straight line distance from the aircraft s present position to the procedure turn fix NOTE The bearing and bearing distance are with respect to the pro cedure turn fix After crossing this intercept point the DIS shown will be from the air plane s present position to the FAF and the DIS in parentheses will be removed TO the FAF will be displayed at this time having changed from TO INTCPT 1 USING RADAR VECTORS TO INTERCEPT A DME ARC 1 FPL Key DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL LE Page Figure 3 74 lt 2 Approach and Waypoint Sequencing VERIFY lt they appear as selected DEPART 3 MSG Key VERIFY RRRIUE approach is armed within 1 30NM of the airport and the HSI scaling output Figure 3 74 has changed to TRMNL 2 on NAVIGATION Page 2 4 FMS Mode
167. changes to when cursor is positioned over NAUIGATION 5 5 the leg identifiers Figure 7 6 ETE Estimated Time Enroute PLAN Planned The AFIS planned time enroute for leg displayed TAS True Airspeed Planned AFIS planned true air speed for leg displayed Figure 7 6 Actual Actual true airspeed of aircraft The TAS value shown is the same as on NAVIGATION Page 3 GS Groundspeed Planned AFIS planned groundspeed for leg displayed Actual Actual groundspeed of the aircraft as calculated by the GNS GS value shown is the same as on NAVIGATION Page 1 WIND Planned AFIS forecast wind for leg displayed Direction is displayed relative to True North with velocity in knots Actual Actual wind for leg as computed by the system Direction is displayed relative to True North with velocity in knots AFIS MENU PAGE AFIS FLT PLAN Review of the AFIS Flight Plan displaying AFIS MENU Fuel and time requirements e Weights flight level and route generating Flight Plan Performance bias entered by operator SIGMETS Review of all SIG Figure 7 7 Rev 0 1 6 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 METS SIGnificant METeorology transferred via the disk and or received via the data link TERMINAL WX Review of all Terminal Weather transferred via the disk and or received via the data link Additional requests can be entered WINDS ALOFT Review of all Winds Aloft
168. configuration module Rev 0 1 24 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 AFIS CONFIG FAIL Configuration module has failed DMU non volatile memory configuration information will be used AFIS CONFIG LOST DMU non volatile memory has lost its con figuration information and the configuration module has failed NOTE Message may not cause MSG Annunciator to flash ACTION REQUIRED The following are the action required messages which pertain to AFIS and may appear on the GNS XL SYSTEM MESSAGES Page SEE AFIS MSG There is a text message on the AFIS MESSAGES page which requires acknowledgement and possibly pilot action Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 25 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 7 26 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 SYSTEM OPERATION PRE DEPARTURE AFIS FLIGHT PLAN SELECTION The AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears after the Initialization Page The page also appears between the Active Flight Plan Page and the first GNS XL FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page NOTE For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link TO ENTER AN AFIS FLIGHT PLAN AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 4 1 Preprogrammed AFIS Disk d INSERT disk into DTU 2 Select AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page using either a or b a Initialization Page Enter Date GMT and Initial Position AFIS FLIGHT
169. ct Mode Figure 3 98 Figure 3 98 Rev 1 Tut GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 51 System Operation CHANGING HEADING VECTOR WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE 1 HDG Key DEPRESS to display HEADING VECTOR Page with cursor over the HDG field 2 Heading INSERT desired Heading 3 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE Cursor moves to the Heading Mode field but it is not neces sary to depress ENT Key because the system is already in heading select mode 4 NAV or ENT Key DEPRESS to check heading and return to NAVIGATION Page 1 CHANGING TO WAYPOINT WHILE IN HEADING SELECT MODE NOTE This procedure establishes a leg between the new TO Waypoint and the waypoint preceding it on the Active Flight Plan or a Pseudo VORTAC If crosstrack distance exceeds 125nm the HEADING Mode will be canceled and the STRG INVALID message will be displayed 1 HDG Key DEPRESS to display HEADING VEC HEADING VECTOR 1 1 TOR Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over TO Waypoint Figure 3 99 3 BACK Key DEPRESS to cycle through way points on the Active Flight Plan or INSERT Figure 3 99 alternate waypoint 4 ENT Key DEPRESS If Waypoint Page Appears a Waypoint Page Coordinates VERIFY or INSERT b ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor moves to DTK field 5 Desired Track DTK VERIFY or INSERT Rev 1 3 58 GNS X Flight Management System Jul98 System Operation 6 ENT Key DEPRESS f HEADING VECTOR 1 1 OK
170. d ACTIVE FPL lt lt DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH Figure 3 35 ACTIVE FPL DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH Figure 3 36 AIRWAY SELECT ENDING WPT Figure 3 37 Rev 0 3 24 GNS Xi Flight Management System Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired destination waypoint Figure 3 38 If applic able use PRV and NXT Keys to access all airway waypoints pages NOTE As the cursor is moved up or down TO will appear next to the cursor System Operation AIRWAY us 2 ZONAL BSR PESCA PYE NIECE COPPO OED SELECT ENDING WPT Figure 3 38 and a question mark will follow the ident The waypoints between the TO FROM waypoints will be displayed in yellow d After selecting the ending waypoint TO on the Airway depress the ENT Key to merge the Airway waypoints into the flight plan and return to the FPL Page NOTE If inserting the airway segment into the Flight Plan results in more than 50 way points in the stored Flight Plan or 100 waypoints on the Active Flight Plan the mes sage FPL FULL will appear NOTE Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any way points are out of sequence Delete waypoints as neces sary Option 2 a Key DEPRESS then enter the airway identifier b Key DEPRESS and type destination waypoint Figure 3 39 ENT Key DE PRESS Figure 3 40 Rev 0 ACTIVE FPL 1 1
171. d Press ENTER again to initiate printing to the specified printer s PRINTING WEATHER SIGMETS Winds Aloft and Terminal Weather may be printed auto matically or manually To Automatically Print SIGMETS Winds Aloft and Terminal Weather Upon Receipt 1 Select AUTO PRINT WX from the AFIS OPERATING MODES PRINTER CONTROL page All SIGMETS Winds Aloft and Terminal Weather reports will print automatically as they are received To Manually Print All SIGMETS Winds Aloft or Terminal Weather 1 2 From the AFIS MENU select the SEND AFIS MSG page On the send message page leave the TO and FR fields blank At the address field type ONE of the following commands note there is a space between the command and the numeral ex SIG lt space gt 1 SIG 1 Send SIGMETS to printer one SIG 2 Send SIGMETS to printer two SIG 3 Send SIGMETS to both printers WND 1 Send Winds Aloft to printer one WND 2 Send Winds Aloft to printer two WND 3 Send Winds Aloft to both printers Rev 3 7 58 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 TWX 1 Send Terminal Weather to printer one TWX 2 Send Terminal Weather to printer two TWX 3 Send Terminal Weather to both printers 3 Press ENTER until the SEND MESSAGE prompt is displayed Press ENTER again to initiate printing to the specified printer Rev 3 d GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 59 SELECTING OPERATING MODES FOR AFIS USERS EQUIPP
172. d total trip fuel as transferred from disk or received via data link This field changes to UPDATE Figure 7 13 FUEL when a flight plan is updated and refers to the actual fuel remaining at time of last update request Figure 7 12 FPL RES FUEL AFIS planned reserve fuel remaining at destination as transferred from disk or received via the data link This field changes to RESERVE FUEL when a flight plan is updated and refers to the updated estimate of fuel remaining at destination PERF OPTION AFIS planned cruise mode as transferred from disk or received via the data link Alternate cruise mode options may be requested and updated via the data link Rev 0 7 10 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 4 PERFORMANCE BIAS This page allows a review of the operator entered performance bias data transferred from disk AFIS FLT PLAN 4 4 or received via the data link Figure 7 14 SIGMETS PAGES AFIS SIGMETS pages are accessed by selecting Option 2 on the AFIS MENU Page This page allows a review of all Figure 7 14 SIGMETS transferred from disk or received via the airborne data link SIGMETS may consist of one or more pages of text and AFIS SIGMETS 1 7 display their FAA code names followed by text DATE Issue date of SIGMET This field may be blank if trans ferred from disk NOTE Date field will remain blank if no date is supplied on disk or by UPDATE Figure 7 15 FR Des
173. d TO way point Figure 3 162 or per forming the present position direct procedures Figure 3 163 If the TO waypoint is not on the selected Flight Plan the Flight Plan number and origin destination fields will display dashes Figure 3 163 Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 99 System Operation To update the TRIP PLAN leg to the current TO waypoint with an Active Flight Plan selected a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TRIP PLAN field b ENT the letter A in the cursor c ENT Key DEPRESS twice to display information in the data fields NOTE If an offset waypoint is in the TO field the OFFSET WPT Page will appear The ENT Key must be depressed again The TRIP PLAN leg will display DIRECT TO the current NAVIGA TION Page TO waypoint Selecting another display page other than MSG and FUEL PLAN and returning to the TRIP PLAN Page will also update the leg with DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint FLIGHT PLAN FUEL PLANNING The FUEL PLAN Page provides the capability to calculate fuel con sumption information for Active or Stored Flight Plans DIRECT TO Legs or Random Legs without affecting any of the system s naviga tion functions The Fuel Plan Number and Origin and Destination identifiers TO FROM leg and groundspeed value on this page will be identical to the TRIP PLAN Page Changing GS or the current leg on the FUEL PLAN Page also affects the TRIP PLAN Page
174. de on the FUEL PLAN Page LEG FUEL and FPL FUEL are recalculated whenever the FLOW changes d FUEL FLOW is changed on FUEL STATUS Page NOTE The REM field only appears when a DIRECT TO leg is displayed Figure 3 169 The REM Field will be displayed in yel low anytime the REM value falls below the reserve fuel pro grammed on Plan Page 1 12 To review the remainder of the Flight Plan position cursor over TO field DEPRESS ENT Key TWICE to call up next leg Groundspeed and or Fuel Flow should be updated if necessary NOTE Information between PLAN 3 8 any desired waypoints can FUEL PLAN be reviewed by selecting the FUEL PLAN Page and entering a FROM TO leg from the Flight Plan Figure 3 168 or by executing the present position direct proce dures Figure 3 169 If the TO waypoint is not on the selected Flight Plan the Flight Plan Figure 3 168 gin destination fields will dis play dashes PLAN 2 8 To update the Fuel Plan leg FUEL PLAN to the current TO leg of the Active Flight Plan a Line Select Key DEPRESS to posi tion cursor over FUEL PLAN field b ENT the letter A in the cursor Figure 3 169 c ENT Key DEPRESS TWICE to display information in data fields The FUEL PLAN leg displays DIRECT TO the current NAVIGATION Page TO waypoint Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 103 System Operation Selecting another display page other than MSG and TRI
175. deleted from the flight plan on the Flight Plan Page using normal edit procedures To add or delete waypoints from a selected segment of the airway perform the following 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over an airway waypoint on the Flight Plan page 2 DEPRESS then enter the appropriate airway identifier Rev 0 3 26 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 3 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 3 42 lt AIRWAY 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to move the cursor to shorten or lengthen the previously selected segment of the airway If applicable use PRV and NXT Keys to access all airway way point pages Figure 3 42 5 ENT Key DEPRESS to merge the edited airway segment into the Flight Plan and return to the Flight Plan Page ENTERING A STAR OR PROFILE DESCENT ON ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ARRIVE field on the Flight Plan page Figure 3 43 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to display ARRIVAL Page Figure 3 44 3 ARRIVAL Airport Identifier VERIFY or Figure 3 43 INSERT valid identifier APPROACH NOTE If the last waypoint ARRIVAL on the Flight Plan is an air port and an Approach is pro grammed the ARRIVAL air port identifier prefills and the cursor is over the first TRANSITION waypoint on the list If the last waypoint on the Flight Plan is a runw
176. e 7 133 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to dis play TERMINAL WX Menu Page 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor in next available field Figure 7 134 NOTE If desired when no field is available place cursor over an existing identifier 5 Terminal ICAO Identifier INSERT 6 ENT Key DEPRESS The TRRNSMIT REQUEST newly entered ID appears in parentheses on the Menu Figure 7 134 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to enter additional requests 8 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST 9 ENT Key DEPRESS Identifiers listed on this page will be trans mitted to the ground via the data link NOTE Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests a a OU Figure 7 133 TERMINAL WX TO UPDATE TERMINAL COMI WEATHER DATA PAGES 10 Access the TERMINAL WEATHER Data Page Figure 7 135 by selecting an Identifier on the TERMI NAL WX MENU Page Figure 7 135 Rev 3 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 69 7 70 TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER 11 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the iden tifier field 12 IDENTIFIER INSERT The data text fields will go blank 13 ENT Key DEPRESS The TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page appears with the new identifier in place of the original identifier and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected If there is no data available for the new ide
177. e CDU keyboard FREQ The frequency currently tuned and displayed on the respective con trol head MAN in this field indicates the frequency was manually entered via the TUNE 3 4 control head The field may also show KEY if the ident is unknown and the frequen cy was tuned via the CDU keyboard KEY will appear in the NAV 1 or NAV 2 field if the IDENT is known No annunciation in this field indi cates the VPU is automati cally tuning the NAV radio Figure 2 67 Figure 2 67 RANGE The range in nautical miles and tenths from aircraft present position to the DME Figure 2 67 The station identifier can also appear in the field between the range and range value field if the control head is placed in the DME HOLD mode NO ID is displayed in this field if the identifier of the held station is unknown BRG The bearing in whole degrees from aircraft present position to the VOR Figure 2 67 Rev 0 2 56 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 When the dedicated DM441B or the dedicated DME42 is configured the TUNE 3 4 page is different Figure 2 67a The Bearing information is suppressed and DME is annunciated instead of NAV When the non dedicated DM441B is configured the TUNE 3 4 page is different Figure 2 67b The Bearing information is suppressed and the radios cannot be manually tuned TUNE 4 4 Page 4 of 4 XPDR ADF Pressing the TUNE Key again will display this page and the following inf
178. e Global Data Center via the data link on a timed basis OFF The automatic reporting capability has been manually inhibit ed by the pilot Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 21 AUTO WX UPDT WEATHER UPDATE ON Global Data Center will automatically send weath er wind updates for the dis AFIS OPERATING MODES played idents when new infor mation is issued OFF The auto weather ARINC update function is not enabled SITR RUICOM PRINTER CTRL RUTO REPORT RUTO UPDT ARINC SITA AVICOM Ground networks that AFIS interfaces with to establish a data link with the Global Data Figure 7 33 Center ACTIVE LINK AUTO The desired network will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries MAN manual The desired network will be maintained independent of the present position In manual the system will only allow trans mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries OFF Network is not enabled AFIS OPERATING MODES NOTE If a ground network is placed in manual mode all oth ers will go to OFF AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT ARINC PRINTER CTRL SITA AVICOM PRINTER CTRL Allows access to the Printer Control Page ACTIVE LINK ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 34 Indicates the network in service i e ARINC SITA AVICOM or AIR CA Air Canada NONE All networks are turned OFF
179. e START FDE WPT field EXCLUDE SATS QTY x PLAN 778 Displays the number of satel FDE lites currently being excluded from the FDE prediction Up to seven satellites may be excluded at a given time When the cursor is placed over this field and ENT is EXCLUDE SATS QTY pressed the FDE EXCLUDE i SATS 1 1 Page will be dis played See Figure 2 58 Figure 2 58 ENTRY REQUIRED This is displayed If the aircraft is on the ground and not all the data has been entered The following is a list of the other possible mes sages displayed in this field Rev 0 2 50 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions START CALC ENT This is displayed when the aircraft FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1 1 is on the ground and all data has been entered Pressing EXCLUDED SATS LIST ENT will start the FDE calcu lation and display PLAN 7 8 FDE COMPUTATION See Figure 2 59 NEED ACTIVE FPL This OK ENTER will be displayed if there are less than two waypoints on Figure 2 59 the active flight plan BACK FOR NEXT WPT Displayed when the cursor is over the start or end waypoint field PRED IN PROGRESS This is displayed when an FDE prediction is in progress All other fields are disabled at this point PREDICTION UNAVAIL This will be displayed if the GPS is not in the idle state or the aircraft is not on the ground FDE EXCLUDE SATS 1 1 Page 1 of 1 This page is accessed by placing the cursor o
180. e coordinates cannot be manually inserted Rev 0 3 128 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation CREATING AN OFFSET WAYPOINT This procedure enables the system to create a waypoint at a given radial and distance from a known point The known point parent waypoint may be any stored personalized or database waypoint An offset waypoint may be inserted in any Waypoint IDENT field The offset waypoint is retained in memory after system shutdown ONLY if entered on a Stored Flight Plan Position the cursor over the desired waypoint IDENT field NOTE The offset waypoint uses station declination if available or it uses the calculated magnetic variation of the parent waypoint All waypoints defined by a VHF Navaid in the National International Airspace System are based on the VHF Navaid station declination Since the magnetic variation and station declination may not be the same at a given Navaid the calculated position and the defined FMS position may differ 1 Parent Waypoint IDENT INSERT with an follow ing the entry Figure 3 204 NOTE More than one offset FLIGHT PLAN 6 1 2 lt waypoint is allowed from one parent using 1 1 etc as identifying notation 2 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 3 204 NOTE If field blinks Parent Waypoint does not exist in CDU memo ry or in database and must be defined on a Flight Plan Page 3 Desired Radial INSERT The degr
181. e the cursor one space to the left e The NXT Key may be used to move the cursor one space to the right Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 39 f The Line Select Key moves cursor to SEND MESSAGE field if a TO or entry field has been inserted g Top two left Line Select keys move cursor up and down page 11 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position over SEND MES SAGE It will be necessary BS SEND RFIS MSG to press the ENT Key after 15 lines of text or if there are two succeeding blank lines in order for the cursor to appear over SEND MES SAGE field Figure 7 72 12 ENT Key DEPRESS The message is sent to the Global Data Center via the Figure 7 72 data link NOTE Wait for DATA CENTER AK message if sending multiple requests TO RETURN TO THE AFIS MENU PAGE 13 Press AFIS or NXT Key with the cursor off the page Rev 0 1 40 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 SENDING BUILDING A PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE The PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGES MENU Page is accessed from the SEND AFIS MSG Page Figure 7 73 An entry in the TO or field must be made before access to PPM is avail 4 TO able FR 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over the PPM field 2 ENT Key DEPRESS Up SEND MESSAGE to six messages can be list ed on the PPM MENU Page Figure 7 73 which appears 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired mes
182. ect Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired RUNWAY on the run way list Figure 3 54 NOTE If a CIRCLING Type Approach is desired use line select to display type Go to step 6 5 ENT Key DEPRESS to select RUNWAY Ifa valid runway has been selected the cursor moves to the first approach TYPE RCTIUE FPL DEPART lt ARRIVE a APPROACH Figure 3 52 APCH RUNWAY RH17 2 Figure 3 53 APCH RUNWAY RH35 Figure 3 54 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired Approach TYPE if required Rev 0 3 32 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to select Approach TYPE APPROACH Figure 3 55 NOTE If there is only one type of approach available the system automatically loads the approach TYPE and the cursor moves over the WPT in the transition list Go to Step 8 NOTE If the runway select Figure 3 55 ed on the Approach Page differs from the runway dic tated by the STAR SEL RWY FROM STAR PG is displayed at the bottom of the screen RPPRORCH 8 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired TRANSITION if required Figure 3 56 If there is only one transition for the desired approach the system automatically Figure 3 56 loads the transition and the WPTs of the approach are displayed Go to step 10 9 ENT Key DEPRESS to select TRANSITION The system will identify the follow
183. ed Waypoint The operator is responsible for generating the waypoint data and maintaining its accuracy WAYPOINT The alphanumeric designator selected by the pilot Identifiers can consist of up to six characters and can be composed of any of the characters on the keyboard Figure 2 85 However the asterisk and pound sign have special functions POS 200 ENTERED Blank fields for entering the latitude and longitude of the waypoint When initially accessed waypoint not yet in memory the coordinate fields are both dashed and covered by a double cursor Figure 2 85 WPTS AVAILABLE Figure 2 85 The number of waypoints available in memory after this waypoint is defined Maximum waypoint storage in non volatile memory is 999 Figure 2 85 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 69 Page Display Definitions WAYPOINT Figure 2 86 Same as pre vious POS If the waypoint has been pre viously defined the coordi nates of the waypoint will be displayed as stored in mem ory These coordinates may be changed at any time Figure 2 86 Figure 2 86 OK ENT The procedure for accepting the waypoint if the coordinates are cor rect is to depress the ENT Key Figure 2 86 PILOT ENTERED WPT OFFSET WAYPOINT An offset waypoint is a set of coordinates determined amp OFFSET WPT 1 1 selected radial and distance from a previously defined or database parent waypoi
184. ed waypoint proceed to Step 5 If system is not currently proceeding direct to a waypoint continue with Step 2 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TO field 3 TO Waypoint Identifier INSERT if necessary 4 ENT Key DEPRESS If Waypoint Page Appears NAVIGATION 1 4 a Waypoint Page Co ordinates VERIFY or INSERT b ENT Key DE PRESS 5 Desired Track DTK INSERT Figure 3 94 Figure 3 94 6 ENT Key DEPRESS If the DTK entry positions NAVIGATION 1 4 the aircraft on the FROM or far side of the TO waypoint the Leg Change Mode switches to MAN otherwise it remains in AUTO Figure 3 95 The pilot must determine if MAN or AUTO is appropri ate Figure 3 95 NOTE The system will turn the aircraft to intercept the DTK at up to a 45 angle if coupled to the autopilot Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 55 System Operation NOTE The function may also be used to initiate a Pseudo VORTAC Following the Direct To entry using the Key the dis play automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1 Manually position the cursor over DTK field and continue as described above in Steps 5 and 6 To exit Pseudo VORTAC Mode make any leg change e g Key press and enter current TO waypoint When exiting Pseudo VORTAC the system may return to the AUTO Leg Change Mode unless the system was in MAN prior to initiating Pseudo VORTAC A manual leg change means the s
185. ees can be entered as whole numbers and the 0 will be loaded automatically i e type 77 077 0 will be displayed If a of a degree is desired all 4 digits must be entered 0775 will be displayed as 077 5 3001 will be displayed as 300 1 etc 4 ENT Key DEPRESS Desired Distance INSERT NM and tenths 1999 9 NM maxi mum 6 ENT Key DEPRESS Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 129 System Operation 7 POS Coordinates VER IFY for reasonability Figure 3 205 8 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE An Offset Waypoint is used in the same manner as any other waypoint OFFSET WPT 1 1 Figure 3 205 PERFORMING FDE PREDICTION FOR OCEANIC REMOTE OPERATION This procedure must be performed prior to departure for a flight plan involving Oceanic Remote operation where GPS is to be the sole source of navigation The maximum segment length for which FDE prediction can be calculated is 25 hours at a ground speed of 100 Kts 1 PLAN Key DEPRESS to display PLAN 7 8 FDE Page See Figure 3 206 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS if necessary to place the cursor over the DEPART DT field Enter the departure date for which FDE prediction is desired NOTE The date entered may be up to six months either side of the current date 3 ENT Key DEPRESS 4 Enter the departure time for which FDE prediction desired 5 ENT Key DEPRESS PLAN 778 FDE EXCLUDE SATS QTY 0 Figure 3 206 PLAN 2 8 FD
186. elds will go blank WINDS ALOFT Menu Page appears with the new identi fier in place of the original identifier and the cursor positioned at the location of the original identifier selected If there is no data available for the new identi fier it will appear in parentheses Figure 7 139 Rev 3 aw GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 71 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 3 1 12 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 Index A ACARS rd 7 2 Actual Vertical Speed cance ere Ra gene 2 34 aoa Seer 1 1 2 57 3 93 6 1 ADI cien dades een Te Rea 3 74 AVISO Mts 2 30 2 75 7 24 Airborne Flight Information System AFIS 1 1 1 6 2 2 2 13 2 21 2 26 2 29 2 32 2 40 2 42 3 4 3 5 3 78 3 85 6 1 7 1 7 66 Anhalt 7 3 rererere 2 48 3 105 PNT C0 2 4 24 2 19 3 118 Airport Continuation 2 68 3 3 Airport Refererice Polnt s ee ERR RR pe 2 68 3 3 6 1 1 2 2 65 2 67 3 55 2224 204 eoe etnies 2 62 2 70 2 76 3 37 3 63 3 129 E 2 19 2 62 2 77 3 16 6 6 7 6 Airways Enroute
187. en in the NAV mode Figure 2 31 DIF Figure 2 31 UPU SUBSECTION The difference between the composite position and the sensor com puted position in degrees minutes and hundredths Figure 2 31 VPU SUBSECTION 2 4 Page 2 of 4 Pressing the NXT Key again will display the second VPU SUBSEC TION Page and the following can be observed QUALITY The numerical display in this field indicates the reliability of the posi tion data from the VPU The number will range from 2 to 99 with 2 being optimum and 99 as dead reckoning Figure 2 32 ADVISE IF gt This field is an enterable field in which the operator may input a quality factor value from 2 to 98 If the VPU QUALITY exceeds this value a message is displayed on SENSOR MESSAGES Page Figure 2 32 UPU SUBSECTION 2 4 Figure 2 32 Rev 0 2 26 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions NOTE Entering 99 in this field will eliminate any previously entered value and no CHECK QUALITY message will appear CURRENT MODE Indicates the current mode of VPU navigation The messages that can appear under it Figure 2 32 NO MEASUREMENTS indicates that VPU is not receiving valid data for navigation VOR DME indicates that distance and bearing rho theta informa tion is used to generate VPU position DME DME indicates distance rho rho data is received and used to generate VPU position BAD GEOMETRY indicates that st
188. ent System Table of Contents POSITION FIX PAGE 22 22 2222 ER 2 63 DIRECT TO SECTION gt KEY 2 64 DIRECT TO PAGES eh ae ee 2 64 DIRECT 1 2 10f2 2 64 WAYPOINT SEGTION 1 hake 2 65 WAYPOINT PAGES irte poten ee EN PANES 2 65 DATABASE WPT 1 1 1011 2 65 SPECIAL DATABASE WAYPOINTS 2 69 PILOT ENTERED WPT Personalized Waypoint 2 69 OFFSET WAYPOINT c rac te eed a nay Ee 2 70 SPECIAL WAYPOINTS dete ber 2 71 OCEANIC REPORTING WAYPOINTS 2 72 MESSAGES MSG Key 2 73 SYSTEM MESSAGES ut eee 2 74 ACTION REQUIRED 2 74 ADVISORS tele ala E oue re aur 2 75 SENSOR MESSAGES 2 78 SECTION 3 SYSTEM OPERATION 3 1 PRE DEPARTURE 2 Secon e hotter A 3 1 POWER ON OFF AND PARALLAX ADJUSTMENT 3 1 INITIALIZATION 3 2 DATE eee ARI EE 3 2 INITIALIZATION POSITION 3 3 Option 1 Using the IDENT field for non IRS equipped s
189. ervices to AFIS operators on a subscription basis The GDC communicates with the operator via data quality telephone lines to a Personal Computer as well as through the ACARS and satellite networks directly to the air craft in flight DATA TRANSFER UNIT DTU The Data Transfer Unit DTU is a 3 5 inch micro floppy disk drive mounted in the cockpit Once the GNS X is switched on and the disk inserted in the DTU the AFIS Flight Plan and weather data are transferred to and stored in the Data Management Unit DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT DMU The Data Management Unit DMU computer formats the disk infor mation and presents it to the GNS X for display on the CDU The DMU also incorporates a data quality VHF transceiver This radio is tuned automatically by the DMU computer to the appropriate ground station for the purpose of transmitting data to and receiving data from the Global Data Center while in flight ANTENNA SWITCHING UNIT ASU The Antenna Switching Unit ASU is required for those installations where the DMU transceiver shares an existing VHF communications antenna The ASU switches the transmit side of the antenna between the DMU data transmitter and the VHF voice transmitter During power up the ASU defaults to the voice transmitter if AFIS is configured for a shared antenna Pressing the AFIS annunciator on the instrument panel switches the transmit side of the antenna to the DMU data transmitter Pressing the annunciator agai
190. essage Destination field to its present value PRT1 PRT2 or BOTH AUTO FORM FEED The Auto Form Feed option when set to YES will cause the printer to Form Feed or eject the page after each message or weather report is printed Setting the Auto Form Feed option to NO will print messages and weather reports on the same page until the page is full then eject the page 1 AFIS key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES ENTER Key DEPRESS Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over SEL option of PRINTER CTRL field 5 ENTER Key DEPRESS to access the PRINTER CONTROL page 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over AUTO FORM FEED 7 BACK Key DEPRESS to toggle Auto Form Feed option between YES and NO 8 ENTER Key DEPRESS to set Auto Form Feed to its present value YES or NO Auto Form Feed currently applies to the 0211 and the 2011 DMUs Rev 3 aw GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 55 AUTO PRINT MSG The Auto Print Message field is used to select or deselect the auto matic printing of messages If AUTO PRINT MSG is set to YES then messages will automatically be printed upon receipt If AUTO PRINT MSG is set to NO then messages will not be printed upon receipt 1 AFIS key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OPERATING MODES ENTER Key DEPRESS
191. eturn to Automatic Groundspeed a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value field b BACK Key DEPRESS AUTO appears in the GS field to inform pilot of the pending change and current GS is dis played in the cursor c ENTKey DEPRESS Rev 0 3 98 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 10 Data CHECK When DIRECT is displayed all data except DTK is updated continuously If data is not continuously updated it will be recalculated each time a The TRIP PLAN Page is selected b A TRIP PLAN is entered leg change is made on the TRIP PLAN Page ETE and FPL time are recalculated whenever the groundspeed changes d Leg or GS change is made on FUEL PLAN Page NOTE ETA the destination and RAIM the destination are dis played only when DIRECT legs are being viewed Figure 3 163 If the TRIP PLAN Page is being displayed during a leg change on the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN the new TO Waypoint is not displayed Exit and return to the TRIP PLAN Page to view the updated TO Waypoint PLRN 2 8 TRIP PLRN 11 To review the remainder of the Flight Plan Position cursor over TO field DEPRESS ENT Key TWICE to call up next leg DEPRESS ENT Key ONCE for each subsequent leg Ground speed should be updated if neces sary Figure 3 162 NOTE Information between any desired waypoints can PLAN 2 8 be reviewed by selecting the TRIP PLAN TRIP PLAN Page and enter ing a FROM an
192. ey again will display the PLAN PLAN 2 8 7 8 Page This page is used FDE if GPS will be the sole navi gation source in Oceanic Remote operation The following information is entered to make the neces sary FDE prediction to deter EXCLUDE SATS QTY 0 mine sufficient satellite avail 4 ability integrity and cy All entries made on this Figure 2 57 page will remain until changed or the system is powered down See Figure 2 57 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 49 Page Display Definitions DEPART DT Date for which FDE prediction is to be calculated DEPART GMT Time for which FDE prediction is to be calculated ROUTE SPACING Centerline to centerline route spacing of segment for which FDE is being calculated 1 to 99 nautical miles may be entered 60 is normal entry EXPECTED GS Estimated ground speed for the route segment A value of 100 to 999 may be entered START FDE WPT First waypoint on the Oceanic Remote route segment Placing the cursor over this field allows waypoint entry Pressing the BACK Key will cycle through the waypoints on the active flight plan Dashes are displayed prior to the last waypoint on the flight plan Pressing ENT while the dashes are displayed will clear the start and end waypoints resulting in an undefined Oceanic Remote segment END FDE WPT Last waypoint in the Oceanic Remote route segment The BACK and dashes operate the same here as in th
193. fies SID STAR operation Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following instructions Front Binder Insert Remove and Replace Title Page Remove and Replace Revision History Page Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Page Table of Contents Remove and Replace Pages v vi and xi through xvi Section 3 Remove and Replace Pages 3 9 through 3 12 Insert Page 3 12a 3 12b after Page 3 12 Remove and Replace Pages 3 13 through 3 20 and Page 3 75 3 76 Section 7 Remove and Replace Pages 7 1 7 2 7 7 7 8 7 17 through 7 22 7 35 7 36 7 43 through 7 66 and insert Pages 7 67 through 7 72 Back Cover Page Remove and Replace Back Binder Insert Remove and Replace R 1 Rev 3 Oct 02 GNS XL Flight Management System Revision History and Instructions Manual GNS X_ Operator s Manual Revision 2 April 2000 Part Number 006 08852 0000 This revision incorporates GNS XL Software Mod 6 Insert the contents of this revision packet according to the following instructions Front Binder Insert Remove and Replace Title Page Remove and Replace Revision History Page Insert Ahead of Existing Revision History Page Table of Contents Remove and Replace Pages v vi Section 2 Remove and Replace Pages 2 1 2 2 2 73 through 2 76 and 2 79 2 80 Section 3 Remove and Replace Pages 3 1 through 3 4 3 15 3 16 3 36 1 3 36 2 and 3 109 3 110 Back Cover Page Remove and Replace Back Binder Insert Remove and Replace R 1 Rev 2 Apr 00 GNS X1
194. form the pilot of the pending change Figure 3 183 Figure 3 183 4 ENT Key DEPRESS The steering reference will be to the orig inal desired track NOTE Any Leg Change manual or automatic including DIRECT TO will also cancel selected crosstrack SXTK Rev 0 3 14 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation MANUAL MAGNETIC VARIATION ENTRY A manual magnetic variation entry is required north of 70 N latitude and south of 60 S latitude 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display NAVIGATION 3 4 Page with VAR 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over VAR field 3 Local Variation INSERT E or W first 4 ENT Key DEPRESS MAN will be annunciated adjacent to the VAR field RETURNING TO AUTOMATIC VARIATION This checklist must be accomplished to return to Automatic Variation following a Manual Variation entry 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display page with VAR 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over VAR field 3 BACK Key DEPRESS AUTO will appear in the VAR field to inform the pilot of pending change The automatic variation value will appear in the cursor 4 ENT Key DEPRESS SELECTING ETE ETA DIS OR ALT DISPLAY OPTION Active Flight Plan Page The pilot can view the estimated time enroute the estimated time of arrival the distance or altitude constraints of waypoints on the Active Flight Plan 1 FPL Key DEPRESS to display ACTIVE FPL Page lt 2
195. g a roll command steering output due to invalid heading auto TAS navigation leg ground speed or crosstrack distance Message annunciator will not illuminate The True Airspeed input to the system from the Air Data Computer is invalid An H field antenna is installed with the RPU and a manual heading input is being used GNS XL Flight Management System 2 77 Page Display Definitions ADVISORY continued WPT ALERT WPT MEM FULL VNAV WPT ALERT VSPD FAIL SENSOR MESSAGES The aircraft is within 30 seconds ETE of the next leg lateral change Message annuncia tor will not illuminate All 999 waypoint locations have been used in flight plans or as FROM or TO waypoints Aircraft is within 1 minute ETE of TOD or path intercept point Message annunciator will not illuminate However the discrete WPT annunciator will flash for 10 seconds then go steady The system vertical speed input has failed The following are sensor messages that may appear on the SEN SOR MESSAGES Page All messages will cause the MSG annunci ator to flash unless other wise noted with an asterisk Sensor Message Explanation ACCURACY WARN ALIGN ATTITUDE BATTERY WARN CHECK QUAL DESELECTED The integrity monitoring system that moni tors the satellite constellation RAIM has detected a GPS horizontal position error that is outside the alarm threshold for the phase of flight in progress 3 Approach 1NM Terminal 2
196. g upon system configuration FLIGHT TIME The elapsed flight time is displayed in hours and minutes Figure 2 55 PLAN 6 8 Page 6 of 8 AIRCRAFT WEIGHT Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 6 8 Page AIRCRAFT WEIGHT BASIC OP WT The combined weight in pounds or kilograms of the empty aircraft crew mem bers and crew baggage Figure 2 56 PAYLOAD Figure 2 56 Weight in pounds or kilograms of passengers cargo and baggage PLAN 6 8 Rev 1 2 48 GNS X1 Flight Management System 98 Page Display Definitions excluding crew Figure 2 56 FUEL ON BOARD Weight in pounds or kilograms of fuel on board Figure 2 56 VERIFY INPUTS Each of the flashing values must be verified or entered by pressing the ENT Key when the cursor is over each field This field is displayed only after system turn on VERIFY FUEL This is displayed in the same field as VERIFY INPUTS if a manual fuel flow has been entered and has not been verified for 15 minutes or more FUEL USED If configured for Automatic Fuel Flow the weight in pounds or kilo grams of fuel consumed Figure 2 56 NOTE This field appears as dashes at power up and increments as auto fuel flow data is available GROSS WT The total weight in pounds or kilograms of basic operating weight payload and fuel on board displayed after all values have been entered Figure 2 56 PLAN 7 8 Page 7 of 8 FDE Prediction Pressing the PLAN K
197. ges AFIS interfaces with ARINC SITA and AVICOM VHF networks and the Inmarsat satellite network to provide a communication link between the aircraft and the Global Data Center ARINC provides coverage within the continental United States Hawaii Alaska the Aleutians Guam Saipan Mexico Puerto Rico and parts of Canada SITA covers Europe the South Pacific Southeast Asia the Caribbean and South and Central America and AVICOM covers Japan In most areas while using the VHF networks data link cover age is excellent above Flight Level 200 but deteriorates below this flight level Satellite data link coverage is excellent both on the ground and in flight between 70 North and 70 South Many variables including the amount of processing time and the length of the message effect the turnaround time for information Depending on the nature of the update request the pilot should expect a turnaround time of approximately five minutes when using the VHF network and twelve minutes when using the satellite net work AFIS consists of the following components Global Data Center GDC Data Transfer Unit DTU Data Management Unit DMU and Antenna Switching Unit ASU Rev 3 d GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 1 GLOBAL DATA CENTER GDC The Global Data Center GDC is a ground based computer facility built and operated by Honeywell for the purpose of providing flight planning aviation weather and message forwarding s
198. gh 3 82 NOTE If aircraft is config ured for dual systems no XFILL prompt will be dis played during a DME ARC procedure even if dissimilar data exists in each system Figure 3 78 Rev 1 3 46 GNS Xi Flight Management System 98 System Operation As the aircraft approaches the AR waypoint a message ree tee ea is displayed on the fourth line AR D259J lt of the CDU indicating the next action the aircraft will take NX DME ARC This message is displayed thirty seconds prior to the event and disappears when the action is initiated Figure 3 78 indicates the aircraft is fly Figure 3 79 NAVIGATION 1 4 ing DIRECT to D259J where DMEARC the aircraft will begin flying a DME Arc Figure 3 79 shows the air craft is within thirty seconds of intercepting the DME Arc at D259J Figure 3 80 NAVIGATION 1 74 DMEARC EN TO DILLY Figure 3 80 shows the air craft is flying the DME Arc to E DILLY ARC 10 0 in the Lid DIS field indicates the arc center is 10 0 NM from the aircraft s pre sent position NAVIGATION 1 4 FR DILLY TO DRK Figure 3 82 Rev 1 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 47 System Operation Use one of the following options to sequence to the missed approach waypoint OPTION 1 Direct To the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint 1 Key DEPRESS The DIRECT Page will be displayed 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor o
199. gnetic Indicator Area Navigation or type of Non Precision Approach Range Receiver Processor Unit Contains the VLF Omega Runway Satellite PRN Number Standard Instrument Departure Software MOD Level Signal to Noise Ratio Standard Terminal Arrival Selected Crosstrack True Heading or Track or whether a Satellite is being tracked or not TACtical Air Navigation True Airspeed Track Angle Track Error Top of Climb Profile Point Top of Descent Profile Point Rev 0 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 TRANS LEVEL TRCK TRMNL VAR VERT DEV VHF VLF VNAV VOR VORTAC VPU Waypoint WPT WW XPDR XTK Rev 0 Oct 96 List of Abbreviations amp Definitions DEFINITION Transition Level The Altitude at which Altitudes Become Flight Levels Track Satellite Status Terminal Magnetic Variation Vertical Deviation Very High Frequency Very Low Frequency Vertical Navigation VHF Omnirange VHF Omnidirectional Range TACAN VORTAC Position Unit A Point Defined in Space Used in Navigation Waypoint NDB Worldwide Coverage Transponder Crosstrack GNS X1 Flight Management System 6 7 List of Abbreviations amp Definitions THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 6 8 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 SECTION 7 5 AIRBORNE FLIGHT INFORMATION SYSTEM AND SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM This section applies only to aircraft equipped with an AFIS
200. gure 2 27 Column 2 The station amplitude ranging from 01 minimum acceptable to 99 maximum strength Dashes indicate the station amplitude is less than the minimum acceptable Figure 2 27 Column 3 Status Messages Figure 2 27 The station is being used for navigation The station is weak or unacquired TOO FAR The station is not used because of its distance from the aircraft posi tion SPARE The station is acquired and acceptable but is not needed for naviga tion Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 23 Page Display Definitions DESELECT The station has been manually deselected CUTOUT The station has been eliminated from use because its position deter mining information is unacceptable UNSTABLE The station has sufficient amplitude for use but has not passed the stability test FAILED The computer has detected a failure in the receiver assigned to that station A message indicating a VLF OMEGA receiver has failed will be displayed on the sensor messages page as RCVR FAIL VLF SUBSECTION 4 4 Page 4 of 4 Pressing the NXT Key again will display the fourth VLF SUBSEC TION Page and the following can be observed Column 1 Figure 2 28 OMEGA Stations NOR Aldra Norway e LIB Liberia Africa ULF SUBSECTION 4 4 HAW Haiku Hawaii DAK LeMoure Dakota REN Reunion Island Indian Ocean ARG Gulfo Nuevo Argentina Figure 2 28 AUS Darriman Austr
201. he FROM waypoint or the aircraft s present position when a Direct To leg is displayed to the last waypoint on the selected flight plan that precedes a fence Distance is displayed in whole miles and time is in hours and minutes Figure 2 52 ETA Estimated time of arrival at the destination or last waypoint on the Active Flight Plan that precedes a fence appears when a DIRECT TO leg is displayed Figure 2 52 NOTE The ETA value field will turn yellow if a ground speed is entered manually indicating that the ETA is calculated based on the manual ground speed value The GS field will turn yellow and CALC will be displayed if a manual ETA value is entered RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring at the last flight plan way point will display AVAIL available or NOT AVAIL not available at the ETA If a manual ground speed or ETA has been entered STANDBY will be displayed momentarily while the system calculates RAIM availability If GPS is not functioning NO NAV will be dis played Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 2 45 Page Display Definitions PLAN 3 8 Page 3 of 8 FUEL PLAN Pressing the FPL Key again will display the PLAN 3 8 Page FUEL PLAN The A indicates that Active Flight Plan information is being displayed A numeric entry in the field provides fuel planning for stored flight plans Figure 2 53 Dashes are displayed if there is no active Flight Plan FR Figure 2 53
202. he cursor over APP ROACH DEPART ARRIVE 3 ENT Key DEPRESS APPROACH page is now displayed Figure 3 61 Figure 3 60 4 Airport Identifier INSERT or VERIFY 5 ENT Key DEPRESS twice if required to dis play runway list if not already displayed If a circling type approach is desired Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TYPE Figure 3 61 ENT Key DEPRESS to display the TYPE list Proceed to Step 10 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired runway 7 ENTKey DEPRESS 8 TYPE SELECT if required 9 ENTKey DEPRESS 10 TRANSITION SELECT if required 11 ENT Key DEPRESS Rev 0 3 38 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation 12 Approach Waypoints REVIEW 13 ENT Key DEPRESS ACTIVE FPL Page is displayed VERIFY the approach appears as selected 14 Waypoint Sequencing Edit if required based on assigned route EXECUTING A GPS GPS OVERLAY APPROACH NOTE To fly a full procedure DME ARC or Procedure Turn either coupled or using own navigation follow the FMS and EFIS Instrument displays USING RADAR VECTORS TO FINAL APPROACH COURSE 1 FPL key DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL 8 1 1 Page Figure 3 62 2 Approach and Waypoint Sequencing VERIFY they appear as selected 3 MSG Key VERIFY DEPART approach is armed within E LUE 30NM of the airport and the HSI scaling output has changed to TRM
203. he cursor over the desired transition waypoint 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to select the TRANSITION If the STAR is not runway dependent proceed to Step 10 8 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired runway on the RUNWAY list NOTE The RUNWAY can also be edited without changing the origi nal SID if the SID TRANSITION are compatible This is done by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field Position the cursor over the desired RUNWAY Press ENT to load the desired RUNWAY on the SID 9 ENT Key DEPRESS to select the RUNWAY 10 Arrival STAR Waypoints REVIEW then DEPRESS ENT Key to insert STAR into Active Flight Plan and return to the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page ERASING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position ARRIVAL cursor over ARRIVE field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page 2 ENT Key DEPRESS 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over ERASE Figure 3 49 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to erase STAR and return to FLIGHT PLAN Page WAYPOINTS OF STAR Figure 3 49 Rev 0 3 30 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation ADDING WAYPOINTS WITHIN A STAR NOTE When a STAR is modified by adding or deleting waypoints the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as a STAR The following may be accomplished from any stored flight plan or the ACTIVE FPL Page 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cu
204. he individual control heads GENERAL TERMS FIELD A line of information CURSOR Yellow rectangular box placed over a field to enter or PAGE change the information in that field The cursor is nor mally out of view unless brought into view by depressing the Line Select Keys on either side of the screen When information is entered into a field and the ENT Key is depressed the cursor will move to the next enterable field or disappear from the screen when the last field is entered Blinking of a field indicates that the computer has not accepted the entry because of unreasonable or invalid information Information is arranged in sections and subsections much like chapters in a book Individual screen displays are referred to as pages Each section is selected by depressing the appropriate Display Selector Key located at the top of the keyboard Each subsequent push of the key will select the next page of that section A subsec tion page is selected by depressing the Line Select Key next to the topic desired then depressing the ENT Key The PRV or NXT Key can be used to move forward or backward through pages of a subsection If the first page of a subsection is displayed the BACK Key will exit the subsection WAYPOINT A navigation point consisting of 1 to 6 alpha numeric Rev 0 Oct 96 characters that has a specific latitude and longitude GNS X1 Flight Management System 1 3 Description CONTROLS AND INDICATORS O
205. he satellite network will automatically be selected whenever the aircraft present position is within the appropriate boundaries and VHF Network is turned OFF or is not in VHF coverage MAN manual The desired region will be maintained independent of the present position In manual the system will only allow trans mission when present position is within the appropriate boundaries and VHF network is turned OFF or is not in VHF coverage OFF Network is not enabled Rev 3 7 20 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 REGION four satellite regions West Atlantic East Atlantic Pacific Ocean SAT LINK CONTROL Indian Ocean that AFIS inter faces with to establish a data i ea link with the Global Data Center REGION Figure 7 31 LINK LINK OPERATIONAL Message indi cating the SAT COMM link is enabled Figure 7 31 NONE Current position does not correspond with the manual AFIS OPERATING MODES ly selected boundaries or satel SAT LINK CONTROL lite link is not operational ACTIVATE Use to enable satellite network in AUTO or MAN Figure 7 32 SAT COM REGION LINK Figure 7 32 OPERATING MODES PAGE FOR AFIS USERS NOT EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM Operating Modes information is accessed by selecting Option 8 on the AFIS MENU Page AUTO REPORT ON The aircraft will automatically report position and station ID for weather updates to th
206. hich indicates an FPA from the database is loaded and Vertical Deviation is provid ed at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint If the FPA at the DB VNAV waypoint is changed in any way the DB FPA will no longer be available Using Default DEF FPA The default FPA value will automatically be displayed if an altitude is programmed on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page except if the FPA comes from the database or the VNAV WAYPOINT Page was accessed using a Direct To function The pilot can load the Default FPA set on the VNAV UNRU WAYPOINT 1 1 DATA Page by pressing the ENT Key when the cursor is on the FPA field of the VNAV WAYPOINT Page The FPA field displays DEF and Vertical Deviation is pro vided at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint Figure 3 127 Figure 3 127 Using Manual MAN FPA The pilot can type in a desired Flight Path Angle on the VNAV WAY POINT Page within the valid range 0 1 to 6 0 degrees When the ENT Key is depressed the FPA is loaded the FPA field indicates MAN and Vertical Deviation is provided at the programmed angle when the waypoint becomes the Vertical TO Waypoint Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 77 System Operation Using Automatic AUTO FPA The AUTO mode is pro WPT1 vided to link together gt 10000 descent waypoints that have Cross At type con DESCENT PATH straints and provide a com 7
207. ht crew workload SIDs and STARs require such proce dures as flying headings and altitudes as well as intercepting VOR radials and DME arcs etc Approaches can be flown autopilot fight director coupled until the Missed Approach Point Missed Approach Procedures must then be flown manually The GNS Xt is ONLY designed to provide meaningful input to the HSI when on a track between two waypoints or when Pseudo Vortac selected course procedures are used THE SYSTEM IS NOT DESIGNED TO FLY FULL SID STAR OR MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURES NOTE The flight crew must review the published procedure and compare it to the procedure contained in the database The pub lished charts are the governing authority and the chart procedures must be followed Any differences between the chart and the data base must be resolved by the flight crew prior to commencing the procedure When flying those portions of a SID or STAR that are not tracks between fixes the aircraft should be flown manually or in HEADING mode In some cases Pseudo Vortac procedures can be used to establish an intercept to a published track When using the Pseudo Vortac mode or upon intercepting a published track between two waypoints fixes the aircraft may be flown in reference to the cross track deviation provided by the GNS XLs or by coupling the GNS XLs roll command to the auto pilot The first leg of the SID that the FMS can fly is not the first leg of the procedure To properly fly S
208. ier ENT Key DEPRESS 3 Airport Reference Point INITIALIZATIO ARP coordinates will be fm dcc dur displayed with continua tion records listed below To access the airport continuation records position the cursor over a departure runway identi fier This will automati cally result in the display Figure 3 3 Rev 2 Apr 00 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 3 System Operation of the departure runway threshold in the waypoint field the departure air port identifier will replace WAYPOINT the ARP field and POS Pos coordinates will reflect selected runway thresh OM19R old Figure 3 4 RWOL 1 4 ENT Key DEPRESS RW19L 5 POS Coordinates VER IFY coordinates high lighted by the cursor on Figure 3 4 the Initialization Page INITIALIZATION Figure 3 5 DATE 01 JUN 20 6 ENT Key DEPRESS GMT 21 19 If AFIS is not installed the IDENT RW19R display will automatically HIEMEN 33 40 89 advance to the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page The cur sor will be positioned over 18355 6161 5 06 the first Flight Plan Number that originates with the same Figure 3 5 airport or runway identifier as entered on the INITIALIZA TION Page Figure 3 6 FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 1 Stored Flight Plans are refer tn KMSY enced according to KHPN Departure and Destination KDA KSFO pairs and are automatically KORD sequenced in alphabetical KHPh KORD order on the FLIGHT PLAN KLAX KSTL LI
209. ies are required continue with Steps 8 9 or 10 HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 Figure 3 107 Optional Entry Turn Direction 8 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over TURN DIR a BACK Key DEPRESS to change direction b ENT Key DEPRESS Optional Entry Leg Distance 9 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over LEG DIST a Leg Distance INSERT or VERIFY HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 valid range 1 0nm to 50nm b ENTKey DEPRESS NOTE When the leg dis lance is entered the leg time will be computed as indicated by parentheses and vice versa Figure 3 108 Figure 3 108 Rev 0 3 64 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation Selecting Exit Mode 10 Line Select Key DE PRESS to position the HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 cursor over MANUAL AUTO Press the BACK key to change exit mode option Selecting MANU AL will initiate a continu ous hold Selecting AUTO will exit the hold the next time the HP fix is 335 crossed or after the entry procedure is completed Figure 3 109 Figure 3 109 11 ENT Key DEPRESS OK ENT prompt will appear Verify inputs 12 ENT Key DEPRESS to load the Holding Pattern at the selected waypoint and return to the NAVIGATION DIRECT TO or FPL Page REVIEWING EDITING OR CANCELING A HOLDING PATTERN This procedure enables the pilot to review edit or cancel a Holding Pattern at a specific waypoint REVIEWING 1 NAV FPL
210. ifier This field prefills if last way point on the flight plan is an airport or runway or can be manually entered Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X Flight Management System 2 1 Page Display Definitions RUNWAY Approach runway prefills if only one runway is available last waypoint on Flight Plan is a runway or can be select ed from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUN WAY field Figure 2 11 TYPE Circle VOR NDB or RNAV Type may be prefilled or selected from a list made available by press ing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TYPE field Figure 2 11 NOTE If the runway selected on the Approach Page differs from the runway dictated by the STAR SEL RWY FROM STAR PG is dis played at the bottom of the screen TRANSITION The Transition waypoint may be prefilled or selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSI TION field Figure 2 10 WAYPOINTS OF APPROACH The waypoints that constitute the APPROACH Figure 2 11 HP Holding Pattern Indicates a holding pattern is programmed at a particular waypoint Figure 2 11 PT Procedure Turn Indicates a Procedure Turn is programmed at a particular waypoint ARC DME ARC Indicates a DME ARC is programmed at a particular waypoint IAF Indicates the Initial Approach Fix FAF Indicates the Final Approach Fix MAP Indicates
211. ight Plan Figure 3 158 4 ENTKey DEPRESS NOTE If a Flight Plan num ber is left in the TRIP PLAN field and not returned to A PLRN 2 8 no updated Active Flight TRIP PLAN Plan information will be dis played Figures 3 156 and 3 157 show how the screen appears when an Active FPL has been selected and the airplane is airborne 5 FR Waypoint VERIFY or INSERT as required Fi 3 158 Figure 3 159 gum 6 ENTKey DEPRESS PLRN 2 8 7 TO Waypoint VERIFY TRIP PLAN or INSERT as required Figure 3 157 Figure 3 159 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 97 System Operation NOTE With TRIP PLAN A selected the TRIP PLAN leg 8 wil automatically advance to display DIRECT TO the cur rent NAVIGATION Page TO Waypoint each time the TRIP PLAN Page is accessed Figure 3 160 8 ENT Key DE PRESS Figure 3 161 Selected leg information and time Figure 3 160 distance for the remain der of the Flight Plan are displayed Information PLAN 2 8 between the remaining TRIP PLRN legs of the Flight Plan can be reviewed by pressing the ENT Key for each subsequent leg 9 Groundspeed VERIFY Current aircraft ground speed is displayed unless a manual entry is made Figure 3 161 To Enter Manual Groundspeed a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over GS value field b Groundspeed INSERT ENT Key DEPRESS MAN will appear adjacent to the GS field To R
212. ight Management System 2 11 Page Display Definitions NOTE No database altitude constraints will be displayed at the MAP if the MAP is abeam or beyond the runway threshold No altitude constraints are displayed on an approach if a PT is part of the approach procedure The following may appear in the waypoint altitude field FL Flight Level A ator above ator below G glide path programmed Flight Path Angle NOTE If an approach is programmed at the destination airport and the MAP is the end of the runway the altitude value displayed next to the MAP is approximately 50 feet above the runway threshold eleva lion If the MAP is prior to the end of the runway and the approach is straight in the altitude displayed at the MAP is computed based on a line drawn from the FAF through the MAP 1o a point 50 feet above the runway threshold The altitude may not be the MDA Figure 2 16 If no approach is programmed the altitude value will be the air port elevation regardless of runway selection The MAP altitude is shown in yellow The Waypoint VNAV offset is given in nautical miles where a nega tive offset is prior to the waypoint Figure 2 16 interpreted as cross ten miles before RYMES at 3000 feet and a positive offset is after the waypoint If dashes appear in the altitude constraint field NO altitude is programmed at that waypoint ERASE Same as for Stored Flight Plans except the current FROM TO leg canno
213. ight level rounded off to the near est hundred feet An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero 4 ENT Key DEPRESS Option 3 Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page 1 FPL or 9 Key DEPRESS to display applicable page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired waypoint NOTE NAVIGATION Pages only the TO Waypoint be selected 3 VNAV Key DEPRESS to display VNAV WAY WAYPOINT 1 1 POINT Page for selected IAYPOINT waypoint Figure 3 131 4 ALT INSERT new alti tude constraint followed by A at or above or B at or below if applica ble Only two or three digits are required to input an altitude i e enter 30A and 3000A is dis Figure 3 131 played Any altitude value entered greater than the Transition Level value on the data page is converted and displayed as flight level FL An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a pre ceding zero NOTE If the waypoint is part of a SID STAR or Approach proce dure the altitude constraint prefills from database Cross Between two Altitudes type constraints as shown in Figure 3 130 cannot be programmed manually 5 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor moves to OFFSET field 6 ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor moves to the FPA field 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to return to the page where the VNAV waypoint was accessed Rev 0 3 80 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operati
214. inal climb constraint waypoint TOC will then become the Vertical To Waypoint If there are no vertical constraints programmed for climb TOC will be displayed as the first vertical waypoint as long as the aircraft is in a climb When the programmed cruise altitude is reached TOC is removed from the VNAV Flight Plan and TOD becomes the Vertical To Waypoint Rev 0 3 84 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation When TOC is the TO Waypoint The pilot may obtain range and ETE to any altitude above the aircraft during a climb 1 Key DEPRESS to display VNAV Page 1 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the TOC altitude field Figure 3 139 3 Alternate Altitude INSERT This value may be above or below the altitude pre select Figure 3 139 value but must be above the current baro altitude UNRU 1 3 4 ENT Key DEPRESS and observe the change in RANGE and ETE Figure 3 140 5 Repeat steps 2 thru 4 to return to previous TOC altitude setting UNRU 1 3 Top of Descent TOD Figure 3 140 The Top of Descent waypoint is the position where the aircraft inter cepts the descent path at the cruise altitude The system calculates the TOD by establishing a valid Descent Reference Waypoint then uses either the CRUISE ALT entered by the pilot on the DATA Page or the Altitude Preselector setting if available The default FPA maybe used in this calc
215. ing waypoints of an approach IAF Indicates the initial approach fix ARC DME Arc end point PT AProcedure Turn will commence at that waypoint HP AHolding Pattern is programmed at that waypoint FCF Final Approach Course Alignment Fix FAF The Final Approach Fix MAP The Missed Approach Point Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 33 System Operation 10 Approach Waypoints REVIEW Figure 3 57 then DEPRESS ENT Key to insert APPROACH into Active Flight Plan and WPTS OF APPROACH return to the ACTIVE IAF MAP FLIGHT PLAN Page PT HP REVIEWING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE Figure 3 57 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over the APPROACH field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page WPTS OF APPROACH 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to inn HAR review APPROACH PT Figure 3 58 3 BACK Key DEPRESS to return to FLIGHT PLAN Page Figure 3 58 NOTE SELECT will not appear as an option since an APPROACH already exists in the Flight Plan EDITING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the APPROACH field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to display APPROACH Page The RUNWAY TYPE or TRANSITION may be edited by pressing the Line Select Key next to the field to be edited That field will turn from green to yellow and the previous information will turn to dashes Alternate options may be avai
216. int Coordinates ENT If Waypoint Page appears a Waypoint Page Coordinates VERIFY or INSERT b ENT Key DEPRESS 13 DIF CHECK Since the system was initialized in flight using an approximate position the DIF check is not used to determine the suitability of an update but is used to check for reasonability or manual entry errors 14 ENT Key DEPRESS Enter the following information as required Active Flight Plan Initial Leg Manual Magnetic Variation only for latitudes north of 70N and south of 60S MANUAL TAS ENTRY only VLF is available NOTE Manual TAS cannot be entered if a valid TAS is present from the Airdata Computer If the system is using an unaided VLF OMEGA sensor no heading TAS or IRS velocities available manual TAS entry is required when fewer than three stations are received MAN TAS REQD message appears on the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page TAS must be manually entered if the aircraft does not have an auto TAS system or the auto TAS input has failed If TAS is entered man ually no wind will be displayed If the auto TAS input returns it will override the manual entry Rev 0 3 118 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation To Enter Manual TAS 1 NAV Key DEPRESS to display page with TAS 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over TAS field TAS INSERT in knots ENT Key DEPRESS MAN will appear adja cent to the TAS field Figure 3 188 NOTE M
217. int identifier on the Active Flight Plan and the ETA at that waypoint is displayed Figure 2 19 When a Procedure Turn Holding Pattern Heading or Heading Intercept mode is in use appropriate information pertaining to that mode will be displayed in this field Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 13 Page Display Definitions DIS The distance in nautical miles and tenths from the aircraft present position to the TO waypoint During Waypoint Alert the distance in whole nautical miles to the NX way point on the Active Flight Plan is displayed in parenthe ses Figure 2 18 ETE NAVIGATION 1 4 Figure 2 18 The estimated time enroute in hours minutes and tenths from the air craft present position to the TO waypoint based on current ground speed Figure 2 18 DTK The desired track is the Great Circle course in whole degrees between the FROM and TO waypoints When in the PSEUDO VOR TAC mode the DTK is entered by the operator During the Waypoint Alert desired track to the next NX waypoint on the Active Flight Plan is displayed in parentheses Figure 2 18 NOTE The DTK field will be dashes if the FROM waypoint or pre sent position are north of N 70 or south of S 60 Latitude unless a manual MAG VAR is entered or a discrete MAG True switch is moved to the True position GS The current groundspeed Figure 2 19 WIND NAVIGATION 1 4 The current wind direction referenced to True Nor
218. internal database are listed in Jeppesen publications with a 2 or 3 letter identifier To dis tinguish these NDBs from VHF NAVAIDS you must add an NB suffix to the database identifier Example To access the Prince Rupert PR NDB you must enter PRNB Figure 2 79 Airports DATABASE WPT 1 14 NDB ENTER Figure 2 79 International Civil Aviation Organization ICAO identifiers are used to access data in the database ICAO identifiers differ in some cases from those familiar to many pilots The following are guidelines to access information from the database Except for a few hundred 3 or 4 letter number airport identifiers in Alaska Canada and the Continental USA all airport identifiers stored in the database have 4 letters In most cases these identi fiers begin with a letter that corresponds to the geo 1 1 graphic area which the air port is located The ICAO code letter prefix for Continental USA airports is K Hawaii and Alaska identifiers begin with To access a 4 character identifier use the IDENTIFI ER found in the Jeppesen Figure 2 80 charts For example enter KSNA for Santa Ana Figure 2 80 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 67 Page Display Definitions If the airport shows a 3 let ter IDENTIFIER add the cor rect ICAO prefix letter Example NEW New Orleans Lake Front add a prefix and enter KNEW Figure 2 81 If the airport shows
219. ion USING OWN NAVIGATION NO DME ARC 1 FPL Key DEPRESS to display the ACTIVE FPL ACTIVE FPL 1 1 Page Figure 3 66 2 Approach and Waypoint Sequencing VERIFY amp they appear as selected 3 MSG Key VERIFY 2000 approach is armed within 30NM of the airport and the HSI scaling output has changed to TRMNL on NAVIGATION Page 2 4 FMS Mode SELECT or VERIFY the appropriate mode for guid ance 4 Figure 3 66 5 Flight Director or Autopilot ENGAGE the appropriate mode Waypoints and HSI Course VERIFY proper sequencing during the approach 7 Approach Annunciator When over the FAF VERIFY annuncia tion and the HSI scaling output has changed to APPR on NAVI GATION Page 2 NAVIGATION 1 74 PROCEDURE TURN The following is a brief description of the screen dis plays typically seen while executing a Procedure Turn As the aircraft approaches the PT waypoint a message is displayed on the fourth line Figure 3 67 of the CDU indicating the next action the aircraft will take This message is displayed 30 sec onds prior to the event and disappears when the action is initiated Figure 3 67 indicates the aircraft is flying DIRECT to DRK where a Procedure Turn PT will take place Line four indicates the aircraft will turn to a heading of 305 upon reaching DRK While flying the Procedure Turn the TO DRK will change to TO INTCPT When the Procedure Turn is completed and the aircraft is inb
220. ired start VOR airport waypoint Lat Lon VORTAC ident or NAT North Atlantic AFIS SIGMETS 1 29 Tracks Figure 7 15 or 7 16 TO TO NOTE Parentheses remain until a SIGMET update is received via the data link TO Desired end VOR airport waypoint Lat Lon or VORTAC ident No entry is required if FR is NAT Figure 7 16 Rev 0 Den GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 11 TRANSMIT REQUEST When cursor is on this field and ENT is pressed a SIGMET update request is sent to the Global Data Center via data link DATA LINK DISABLED will appear if the data link is disabled and the request will not be transmitted NOTE This field only appears when the FR or TO fields are RFIS SIGMETS 1 1 parentheses If no SIGMETS are on disk the message NO SIGMETS ON DISK appears If there are no SIGMETS via a Flight Plan update the message reads NO SIGMETS TO Figure 7 17 Figure 7 17 TERMINAL WEATHER PAGES The TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page is accessed by selecting Option 3 on the AFIS MENU Page Terminal identifiers for which associated weather data is available to review are listed The identifiers in parentheses represent pilot entered requests for additional weather not stored in the DMU The parentheses disappear when weather updates have been received via the data link TRANSMIT REQUEST When cursor is on this field and AFIS TERMINAL WX ENT is pressed a weather update request is sent to
221. is based on the REMAINING fuel quantity from the FUEL STATUS page minus the total FPL fuel Figure 2 53 The entire REM field will turn yellow if the REM value is less than the programmed reserve on PLAN 1 8 Page PLAN 4 8 Page 4 of 8 FUEL FLOW Pressing the FPL Key again will display the PLAN 4 8 PLAN 4 8 Page FUEL FLOW ENGINE The fuel flow in pounds or kilograms per hour for each engine as taken from the fuel flow indication system the number of engines shown will depend on system con E figuration Figure 2 54 TOTAL The total fuel flow in pounds or kilograms per hour from all engines Figure 2 54 NOTE This page will appear only if the system is configured for automatic fuel flow and the individual engine fuel flow is available Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 47 Page Display Definitions PLAN 5 8 Page 5 of 8 DATE GMT Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 5 8 Page DATE Same as the Initialization Page GMT Same as the Initialization Page NOTE If necessary both DATE and GMT can be corrected on this page but the takeoff and time values will be affected TAKEOFF The GMT at weight off wheels plus 10 seconds Figure 2 55 LAND The GMT at weight on wheels This field is not dis played until weight on wheels plus 10 seconds occurs Figure 2 55 Figure 2 55 NOTE TAKEOFF and LAND times may be based on groundspeed and or TAS valids dependin
222. ithin approxi mately 1000ft of the pre selected value Descent Reference Waypoints Descent Reference Waypoints have a fixed altitude crossing i e Cross At type altitude constraint To create a Descent Reference Waypoint the pilot can program a Flight Path Angle or a Cross At altitude constraint If a programmed FPA violates a prior vertical constraint the system reassigns the Descent Reference Waypoint using the Default FPA from the VNAV DATA Page as illustrated in Figure 3 141 Rev 0 3 86 GNS Xi Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation Cruise Altitude FL210 T0D Vertical Constraint FL180B 16500 PLAN CROSSING 14000A Vertical Constraint 22222224220 Programmed 30 r 8000 As shown FUELR is the Descent Reference Waypoint that establishes 00 Because the programmed Descent Referente FPA allows for a vertical descent that meets the Wpt vertical constraints at CIVET FUELR remains the 126 Descent Reference Waypoint KLAX Cruise Altitude FL210 T0D FL180B w 75 222 Default FPA 3 07 14900 PLAN CROSSING CIVET Descent Reference Wpt 140004 FUELR Descent Reference In this case since the programmed FPA at FUELR is Wet too shallow to meet the vertical constraints at CIVET 126 the system reassigns CIVET at the Descent Reference KLAX Waypoint using the default FPA to compute 00 Top of Descent and Descent Reference Waypoint Figure 3 141 Rev 0 Oct
223. itude and east longitude The letter W is used for south latitude and west longitude 2 Examples North latitude West longitude North latitude East longitude N50 00 W040 00 5040 N07 00 W008 00 0708N N75 00 W170 00 75N70 NO7 00 W120 00 07 20 N50 00 E040 00 5040E N07 00 008 00 0708 N75 00 E170 00 75E70 N07 00 E120 00 07E20 South latitude East longitude 550 00 E040 00 50405 S07 00 E008 00 0708S 575 00 E170 00 75570 507 00 E110 00 07510 South latitude West longitude 550 00 W040 00 5040W 507 00 W008 00 0708W 75 00 W170 00 75W70 507 00 W120 00 07W20 USING DUPLICATE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS 1 Duplicate Waypoint Identifiers There are several waypoints around the world with same identifier If the identifier selected has more than one waypoint associated with it addi tional pages will be indi cated on line 1 i e 1 2 1 4 etc The waypoint DRTRBRSE 2 4 NDB ENTER nearest the aircraft posi Figure 3 14 tion will be displayed first Figure 3 14 Rev nu GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 11 System Operation To select an alternate waypoint location PRV or NXT Key DEPRESS until desired country name is dis played Figure 3 15 ENT Key DEPRESS to add the waypoint to the flight plan NDB ENTER Figure 3 15 REVIEWING WAYPOINT DATA COORDINATES FLIGHT PLAN PAGES ONLY If the stored flight plan is currently
224. ix the second time PARALLEL ENTRY Indicates the system will use a parallel entry to the holding pattern This message appears 30 seconds prior to entering the hold proce dure and changes to HOLDING after crossing the fix the second time HOLDING Normal status while holding EXIT HOLD Indicates the system will exit the holding pattern the next time over the holding fix The ETE to the holding fix is also displayed Rev 0 2 16 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions DIS The direct distance in nauti cal miles and tenths from the aircraft present position to the holding fix Figure 2 21 ETE NAVIGATION 1 4 The estimated time enroute to the next time over holding fix based on the path around the Hold racetrack Figure Figure 2 21 2 21 INBOUND CRS course The inbound holding course in whole degrees Figure 2 21 GS The current groundspeed Figure 2 21 WIND The current wind direction referenced to True North and speed in knots Figure 2 21 NOTE The leg change mode AUTO or MAN normally displayed on the last line of NAVIGATION Page 1 is not displayed while holding NAVIGATION 2 4 Page 2 of 4 Pressing the NAV Key again will display the second NAVIGATION Page and the following can be observed FR DIRECT HOLD PROCEDURE TURN DME ARC Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1 4 TO AT AR HP PT Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1 4 NX Holding Sta
225. jected to be climb ing or descending PLAN Planned Figure 7 3 PLAN This column is AFIS planned data either transferred from the disk or received via the data link Rev 0 7 4 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 NOTE Planned fields become dashes when no planned data NAVIGATION 5 5 is available for the current leg Figure 7 4 PLAN ACT Actual This column is GNS Xt data NOTE Actual fields become dashes when cursor is posi tioned over the leg identifiers Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 F REM Fuel Remaining Planned AFIS planned fuel remaining at aircraft present position based on DMU inter PLRN polated values NRUIGRTION 5 5 Actual The total fuel on board as calculated by the GNS X NOTE Field changes to F REQ when cursor is positioned Figure 7 5 over the leg identifiers F REQ Fuel Required Planned The AFIS planned fuel required to fly the leg displayed FF P E Fuel Flow per Engine Planned AFIS planned fuel flow per engine for leg displayed Actual Total actual fuel flow divided by the number of engines This is an averaged quantity ETA Estimated Time of Arrival Planned The sum of the AFIS planned time enroute for the leg dis played and the actual time of arrival over the previous waypoint Actual The estimated time of arrival over TO waypoint based on current groundspeed Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 5 NOTE Field
226. l also put the sensors in the primary NAV mode if sufficient stations are available VLF RPU AND OR VPU EQUIPPED ONLY This procedure is used to manually place the system into the Primary Navigation Mode at the designated departure position i e the end of the departure runway The VLF is a position keeping sensor that can navigate with as few as two suitable stations The VPU is a position finding sensor that can navigate once airborne or within line of sight of suitable navaids 1 MSG Key DEPRESS 2 RDY HOLD ENT Message VERIFY This message indi cates that the system is ready to enter the Primary Navigation Mode Rev 3 oan GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 15 System Operation 3 MSG Key DEPRESS to verify status of all sensors Observe NAV RDY NO NAV messages for appropriate sensor and refer to the Flight Manual Supplement for limitations 4 HOLD Key DEPRESS to verify departure coordinates 5 ENT Key DEPRESS twice to enter Primary Navigation Mode NOTE If the HOLD ENT ENT procedure had not been initiated prior to takeoff the system and the various sensors will enter the Primary Navigation Mode automatically at weight off wheels or at a true airspeed of between 50 and 150knots depending on configura tion SIDs STARs APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS The GNS X_ SID Standard Instrument Departure STAR Standard Terminal Arrival Approach and Airway retrieval feature is designed to relieve flig
227. lable depending on the information in the remaining two fields The most efficient way to edit an approach procedure is to change the RUNWAY TYPE and TRANSITION fields to dashes Rev 0 3 34 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation 1 Line Select Key adjacent to RUNWAY field DEPRESS to change the field to dashes 2 Line Select Key adjacent to TYPE and TRANSITION fields DEPRESS to change the field to dashes Using the same Line Select Keys obtain a complete list of RUN WAYS TYPES and TRANSITIONS Use the appropriate Line Select Keys to select the desired data from each list 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to enter the selected data from each list When all the fields have been filled 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to select the new approach data insert it into the flight plan and return to the Flight Plan Page NOTE Look carefully at the flight plan to determine if any waypoints are out of sequence and delete waypoints as necessary When an APPROACH is modified by adding or deleting waypoints the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as an APPROACH and the system will not enter the Approach Mode An APPROACH CANCELED message will be displayed anytime a waypoint is delet ed added to an approach procedure on the Active Flight Plan or when a Direct To the MAP is initiated ERASING AN APPROACH FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL NOTE Erasing an Approach also erases the current destination ai
228. light Manual Supplement for specific limitations Rev 1 Tes GNS XL Flight Management System 3 36 3 System Operation EXECUTING APPROACHES WARNING When entering PTs or HP airspace at high speed the FMS may not constrain the airplane from violating maneuvering airspace Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance When the aircraft is within 30NM of the airport the system will go into the Approach Armed mode The CDI sensitivity will change from 5 0NM full scale deflection to 1 0NM full scale deflection At this point the aircraft may bank slightly due to increased roll steering gains Anytime the TO waypoint is part of an Approach Procedure the SXTK field is disabled so that no parallel course can be entered The system is capable of executing GPS GPS Overlay NDB RNAV CIRCLING and VOR approaches only No LOC ILS or MLS capabili ty is available If RAIM is not available at 2NM from the FAF an APPROACH WARN message will appear on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page Also the HSI flag will be set invalid At this point the appropriate missed approach procedures should be executed The system will remain in the Approach Mode and the discrete APPROACH annunciator will remain illuminated until the HSI is set valid To set the HSI valid can cel the Approach on the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page by pressing the ENT Key The system will not display any interim waypoints between the FAF and the MAP even though a waypoint may be shown on the app
229. light level 6 ENT Key DEPRESS 7 ASSIGNED FL value VERIFY or INSERT new flight level assign ment 8 ENT Key DEPRESS 9 PAYLOAD value VERIFY or INSERT amended payload value 10 ENT Key DEPRESS 11 FUEL REM value VERIFY or INSERT amended fuel remaining value 12 ENT Key DEPRESS ACTIVE FPL 1 1 Figure 7 125 Rev 3 7 66 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 13 CRUISE MODE VERIFY or INSERT an amended cruise amp AFIS FPL UPDATE mode 14 ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor positions over TRANSMIT REQUEST field Figure 7 127 15 ENT Key DEPRESS to initi ate a Flight Plan Update ACTIVE FPL Page will Figure 7 127 appear NOTE For aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit if DATA LINK DISABLED message appears DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link Also enable VHF or satellite network Wait for DATA CENT AK message if sending multiple requests SELECTING UPDATE AS ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN AFIS 1 FPL Key DEPRESS until eon ERE E AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page appears with Updated Flight Plan UPDA XXXX Figure 7 128 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS EMPTIS STE EET E dT to position cursor over Updated Flight Plan 3 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor positions itself over REPLACE ACTIVE FPL E RFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 4 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to replace Active Flight Plan with Updated Flight Plan Figure 7 129 5 ACTIVE
230. lite HLTH Satellite health is displayed as BAD or GOOD T YES or NO displayed as to whether this satellite is presently being tracked Figure 2 37 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 31 Page Display Definitions VERTICAL NAVIGATION SECTION VNAV KEY Upon pressing the VNAV Key the VNAV 1 3 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed VNAV PAGES NOTE AFIS flight plans do not support any altitudes including air port elevation As a result no altitude constraints will be provided for SIDS STARS or Approaches If the airport SIDs STARS or Approaches are obtained from the database altitudes will be provid ed In some programmed approaches the altitude associated with the MAP waypoint is computed from the FAF through the MAP waypoint to a point 50 feet above the runway threshold MDA may be reached prior to the MAP waypoint The MDA must be observed if the run way is not in sight VNAV 1 3 Page 1 of 3 VNAV MODE Mode required to fly to the vertical TO waypoint and Baro Altitude in feet Can display one of the following INVALID Indicates VNAV function is invalid In order to be set valid the following must be met 1 Air Data valid baro altitude and altitude rate 2 Valid lateral TO Waypoint 3 Valid vertical TO waypoint 4 NO SXTK programmed 5 Crosstrack XTK lt 12 5NM e INACTIVE VNAV system is not activated because non volatile memory was erased during software
231. llowed will cause FPL FULL to be displayed with the identifier flashing in the cursor If adding a SID STAR or Approach to A Flight Plan will exceed the Flight Plan capacity ANO ROOM ON FPL message will appear on the procedure page being displayed Attempting to enter more than 999 pilot entered waypoints in memo ry causes MEM FULL to be displayed on the FLIGHT PLAN Page The MSG light will flash and WPT MEM FULL will be displayed on SYSTEM MESSAGES Page To Delete a Waypoint 9 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the way point to be deleted 10 BACK Key DEPRESS A DELETE prompt will appear adja cent to the waypoint to be deleted 11 ENT Key DEPRESS The waypoint will be deleted MODIFYING A FLIGHT PLAN To Access The Desired Flight Plan This procedure may be used to modify the Active Flight Plan or any Stored Flight Plan Access the Active Plan or Stored Flight Plan by depressing the FPL Key Access a Stored Flight Plan from the Rev 0 3 8 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation alphabetized FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page Use the PRV or NXT Keys to cycle through the available pages NOTE A change made to the Active Flight Plan does not affect the Stored Flight Plan Any change made to a Stored Flight Plan remains in memory Deleting A Waypoint 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the waypoint identifier 2 BACK Key DEPRESS DELETE appears in the
232. low FROM Waypoint Caution Messages Data entered but not yet accepted by the computer Date and Times Tuned Frequencies or Codes Altitudes Page Titles and Prompts Waypoint Numbers Navigation and Fuel Data General Page Data 0 1 8 GNS XL Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions SECTION 2 PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS The following section contains definitions pertaining to information and format seen when a particular function key is depressed PAGE DISPLAYS AT POWER UP For a better understanding of the GNS X functions this section should be reviewed prior to operating the system SELF TEST PAGE For the first 30 seconds after the system if is turned on the computer performs extensive internal tests that must be successfully completed before proceeding further If the system detects a problem the SELF TEST display may be replaced by a NO DATA RECEIVED message The Figure 2 1 unit may have to be removed for service INITIRLIZRTION INITIALIZATION PAGE After the Self Test is success fully completed the INITIAL IZATION Page will be dis played Refer to Figure 2 2 DATE The current Greenwich Date is displayed as day month Figure 2 2 and year GMT Time of day is displayed in Greenwich Mean Time hours and minutes Rev 2 Apr 00 GNS XL Flight Management System 2 1 Page Display Definitions IDENT Displays the airport identifier for the airport close
233. mmediately below the offset waypoint identifier Figure 2 87 RAD The radial from the parent waypoint in degrees and tenths of degrees along which the offset is established This entry will be annunciated with a T if a true heading input is received or if the parent waypoint is north of N 70 or south of S 60 latitude Figure 2 87 NOTE The radial can be entered in whole numbers without a trailing 0 i e enter 070 or 70 and 070 0 will be displayed To enter a tenth of a radial all 4 digits must be entered i e 0701 will be displayed as 070 1 The DIS entry requires a trailing 0 be entered for any DIS value greater than 9 i e enter 100 to display 10 0 DIS The distance from the parent waypoint to the offset waypoint 1999 9 maximum enterable Figure 2 87 POS The computed offset waypoint coordinates based on the pilot entered radial and distance from the parent waypoint Figure 2 87 OK ENT The procedure for accepting the waypoint if the coordinates are cor rect is to depress the ENT Key Figure 2 87 SPECIAL WAYPOINTS 30 41 and OFF are special waypoints defined automatically by the System based on the airplane position 0 After pressing the 9 key and ENT key the position after the turn where the airplane intercepts the course to the direct to waypoint The 0 waypoint is defined as the point from which a DIRECT TO way point leg has begun Should the DIRECT TO procedure require a turn Rev 0 ctt G
234. n or pressing the push to talk button on the VHF communications radio switches the transmit side of the antenna back to the voice transmitter If AFIS is configured for non shared antenna or there is no configura tion module during power up the system will assume an antenna is dedicated to AFIS Rev 3 1 2 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 The Satellite Data Communications System consists of the following components Satellite Communications Unit SCU High Power Amplifier Low Noise Amplifier HPA LNA and Satellite Antenna SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS UNIT SCU The Satellite Communications Unit SCU incorporates the satellite transceiver and instruction for transmitting to and receiving data from the satellite network The SCU also contains information to allow it to tune the appropriate satellite operating region automatically and to the appropriate ground stations HIGH POWER AMPLIFIER LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER HPA LNA The High Power Amplifier Low Noise Amplifier HPA LNA amplifies transmitted and received information while minimizing noise SATELLITE ANTENNA The antenna is designed to meet the Inmarsat system specification PAGE DISPLAY DEFINITIONS AFIS FLIGHT PLAN LIST PAGE If the GNS XL is configured for AFIS this page appears directly after the Initialization Page The DTU reads the inserted disk and displays one of the following messages NO AFIS FLT PLANS ON DISK There no AFIS Flight
235. n number followed Country Code City Code and phone number GDC will deliver message to PC located outside the US or Canada F followed by phone number GDC will deliver message to FAX machine at given number FI followed by Country Code City Code and phone number GDC will deliver message FAX machine located outside the US or Canada followed by ARINC or SITA address GDC will deliver message to ARINC or SITA address given Auto Forward Code GDC will deliver message to PC FAX or ARINC SITA as defined in GDC database GDC Code GDC will search database for phone number and special contact name or message associated with code and deliver message verbally ADCUS XXX GDC will search database for customs phone number at specified airport and deliver message verbally PDC XXX GDC will search database for pre departure clearance and forward to aircraft if found Global Defined Codes BASEOPS International Air Routing International Universal Weather Jeppesen Data Plan Medlink GDC Message will be printed at GDC further action AFIS Addresses Table 1 7 16 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation 206 869 6450 N4322B A206 869 6458 A14118106530 F206 869 6464 F14118108708 AHDQGLXH GWSOPS GWSPJC ADCUS TEB PDC LAX BASEOPS or BOPS ARC UNIVERSAL or UV or amp UVAIR JETPLAN or DATAPLAN or JEPPESEN MEDLINK GDC Rev
236. n of the procedure that must be flown manually or in the F D heading mode No reference to the GNS XL should be made at this time For procedures like the example in Figure 3 20 the following opera tional procedures are recommended 1 Prior to departure tune the Seattle VOR select the VOR as the NAV source and set the HSI course pointer to 158 2 After departure intercept the SEA 158 radial After crossing the SEA 5 DME fix at or above 3000 turn right to 250 3 Select the FMS Heading and enter 250 then Intercept mode on the FMS Select ELMAA as the TO waypoint and enter 227 in the DTK field and press ENTER Rev 4 No GNS XL Flight Management System 3 17 System Operation 4 Select the FMS as the NAV source 5 The FMS will fly the remainder of the SID to HQM NOTE This is known as the FMS HEADING INTERCEPT proce dure ELMAA 5 DEPARTURE D SEATTLE This SID requires a mnimum climb gradiant of 116 8 SEA Rwys 16 L R 550 per nm to 3000 NAA7 26 1 W122 18 5 Rwys 16L R intercept and proceed via Seattle R 158 cross Seattle 5 DME fix at or above 3000 then turn RIGHT to 250 heading to intercept SEATTLE TACOMA and proceed via Seattle R 277 to Elmaa Int INTL 429 then via transition or assigned route TRANSITION Hoquiam ELMAA5 HQM From Elmaa Int to Hoquiam VORTAC 33nm Via Hoquiam R 046 226 NN ELMAA5 HQM 2 27
237. nagement System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions OBSOLETE WAYPOINT Obsolete Waypoints are typically created when a multiply defined database waypoint used on a stored flight plan is no longer found in the database This may happen when a new data base is loaded An obsolete waypoint can be accessed only by verifying it as an existing waypoint on a flight plan It will be lost once it is erased from a stored flight plan MESSAGES MSG KEY System and Sensor mes sages are displayed on sepa rate pages in the Message Section They are accessed by depressing the MSG Key The Message Section will consist of as many pages as are required to display cur rent messages The MSG Key is used to sequence through the System and Sensor Message Pages and to return to the page that was Figueres displayed before accessing the Message Section NXT BACK and PRV keys can be used to page forward and backward through the message pages SYSTEM MESSRGES 1 1 SENSOR MESSAGES 1 1 System Messages describe the system s operation with all related aircraft systems Figure 2 89 Sensor Messages describe the oper Figure 2 90 ational status of each naviga tion sensor Figure 2 90 In most instances when new messages are added the Message light will flash and a flashing yellow asterisk will appear adjacent to the new message Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X Flight Management System 2 13 Page Display Definitions SYSTEM MESSAGES A
238. nd APPROACH procedures In addition to this database the memory can store up to 999 operator generated waypoints Individual naviga tion points can be organized into 56 different stored flight plans each containing up to 50 waypoints Due to the way the GNS X database is structured waypoints must have unique identifiers However some duplicate ICAO identifiers exist for more than one waypoint In these cases the waypoint identi fiers are renamed in the database Two naming conventions are used one for four character identifiers and one for five character identifiers Four character waypoints keep the first four characters and the last two characters of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following example MA11 at KPRC becomes MA11RC in the database Five character waypoints keep the first five characters and add the last character of the ICAO airport identifier as shown in the following example MA27L at KOAK becomes MA27LK in the database Additional capabilities of the GNS XL include direct navigation from present position to any waypoint and data crossfill capability for dual installations Trip Plan and Fuel Plan functions are also available There is capability for creating a PSEUDO VORTAC selected Rev 0 1 2 GNS XL Flight Management System Oct 96 Description course to any waypoint and establishing an offset parallel course NAVs COMMs ADFs and transponders can be tuned through the system or by using t
239. nd Vertical Deviation information and guidance is enabled if a descent has been programmed DIRECT TO VNAV WAYPOINT This procedure allows the pilot to program a Direct To on the Vertical Flight Plan while still flying the lateral waypoints on the Active Flight Plan The VNAV Direct To function automati cally deletes any intermedi ate altitude constraints and sets up a Path Descent to the Vertical TO Waypoint using the Direct Flight Path Angle 1 Key DEPRESS A DIRECT TO Page will appear with the cursor over the current TO way point 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired way point Figure 3 136 3 VNAV Key DEPRESS VNAV WAYPOINT Page appears If necessary position cursor over ALT field Figure 3 137 If an altitude constraint has already been pro grammed the cursor will appear over the FPA value field Figure 3 138 Go to Step 8 4 ALT INSERT or VERIFY Rev 0 Oct 96 DIRECT 1 2 KSNA MUSEL HEMET TRM EED TBC FMN PUB HLC Figure 3 136 UNAU WAYPOINT 1 1 WAYPOINT BDF ALT PLAN CROSSING REQ FPM DIRECT FPA Figure 3 137 UNRU WAYPOINT 1 1 WAYPOINT BDF ALT 14000 PLAN CROSSING OFESET REQ FPM DIR DIRECT FPA Figure 3 138 GNS XL Flight Management System 14000 DN 1100 3 83 System Operation 5 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor moves to OFFSET field 6 OFFSET If applicable INSERT value in nau
240. ng the HDG Key the HEADING VECTOR 1 1 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed HEADING PAGE HEADING VECTOR 1 1 Page 1 of 1 HDG Commanded heading in whole degrees This field HERDING UECTOR 1 1 may also prefill with current aircraft heading if heading is valid Pilot may manually enter heading preceded by a turn direction A T indicates the system is oper ating in the true heading mode After a heading entry is made and the ENT Key is pressed the cursor will move to the Heading Mode field and HDG SELECT will be displayed HEADING MODE Use BACK Key to select one of the following INTERCEPT indicates Heading Mode is ON and will intercept next leg of the flight plan if the remaining fields are verified or entered Figure 2 65 CANCEL indicates Heading Mode is OFF HDG SELECT indicates Heading Mode is ON but no intercept NOTE If any of the mode words are followed by a the mode is not active The ENT key must be pressed to activate the mode ENTER HDG Figure 2 64 Rev 0 5 Oct 96 GNS X Flight Management System 2 53 Page Display Definitions TO WAYPOINT Prefills with current TO Waypoint or is enterable from one to six alphanumer ic characters Figure 2 65 NOTE With the cursor over the TO Waypoint field using the BACK Key will step 103137 through to the end of the Active Flight Plan waypoints Figure 2 65 The system will identify an IAF ARC PT
241. nger being indented Adding Oceanic Waypoints Oceanic waypoints are entered in the same manner as other waypoints with one exception Instead of enter ing a waypoint identifier a five character coordinate FLIGHT PLAN 6 lt DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH ERASE Figure 3 11 FLIGHT PLAN 6 DEPART _ ARRIVE SELECT APPROACH ERASE Figure 3 12 FLIGHT PLAN 6 DEPART ARRIVE APPROACH Figure 3 13 SELECT L gt 2 ERASE identifier such as 3050N is entered The following rules are to be applied 1 Positions in the Northern Hemisphere use letters N and E Positions in the Southern Hemisphere use the letters S and W Both will use numerics for latitude and longitude values as follows a Latitude Latitude will always precede longitude Rev 3 3 10 GNS Xi Flight Management System Oct 02 System Operation b Longitude Use only the last two digits of the first three digit longitude value c Letter Placement The letter designator will be the last character in the five character string if the longitude is less than 100 degrees and will be the third character in the five character string if the longitude is 100 degrees or greater The letter is used for north latitude and west longitude The letter E is used for north latitude and east longitude The letter S is used for south lat
242. nt An following the parent waypoint denotes an offset waypoint Figure 2 87 More than one offset way ENTER point is allowed from one parent using 1 1 Figure 2 87 etc as identifying notation NOTE The offset waypoint uses station declination if available or it uses the calculated magnetic variation of the parent waypoint All waypoints defined by a VHF Navaid in the National International Airspace System are based on the VHF Navaid station declination Since the magnetic variation and station declination may not be the same at a given Navaid the FMS calculated position and the defined position may differ WAYPOINT The parent waypoint identifier followed by an When an offset way point identifier is entered and the waypoint has not been previously defined the RAD DIS and POS fields are all dashed Rev 0 2 70 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions When the waypoint has been previously defined the coordinates will be displayed and the radial and distance values will be computed based on the location of the parent waypoint Figure 2 87 If the parent waypoint is a waypoint from an airport continuation record runway or outer marker associated with a specific airport the airport identifier will be displayed immediately below the offset way point identifier If a parent waypoint has a duplicate identifier in the database the country code will be displayed i
243. ntifier it will appear in parentheses UPDATING WINDS ALOFT 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page AFIS MENU 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 4 WINDS ALOFT Figure 7 137 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to display WINDS ALOFT Menu Page 4 Line Select Key Figure 7 137 DEPRESS to position cur sor in next available field Figure 7 138 NOTE If desired when no field is available place cursor over existing identifier 5 Desired Identifier INSERT NOTE Identifier can be VOR airport waypoint Lat Lon or EP VORTAC ident 6 ENT Key DEPRESS The Figure 7 138 newly entered ID appears in parentheses on the Menu oN OUI TERMINAL WX TRANSMIT REQUEST 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to enter additional requests 8 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TRANSMIT REQUEST Rev 3 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 02 9 ENT Key DEPRESS Identifiers listed on this page will be trans mitted to the ground via the data link NOTE Wait for DATA CENTER AK if sending multiple requests TO UPDATE THE WINDS ALOFT DATA PAGES 10 TO INSERT A NEW IDENTIFIER 11 IDENTIFIER INSERT ENT Key DEPRESS The Access the WINDS ALOFT Data Pages Figure 7 139 by select ing an identifier on the WINDS ALOFT menu Page WINDS ALOFT Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the identifier field The data text fi
244. nts residing in the data base are navaids airports intersections and special waypoints Rev 0 5 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System 2 65 Page Display Definitions VHF Navaids WAYPOINT Alphanumeric designator for the Navaid Figure 2 77 NOTE If the waypoint has a duplicate identifier in the database for another loca tion the closest waypoint to the aircraft position will be shown and the country code Figure 2 77 will be displayed beneath the waypoint identifier Figure 2 78 DATABASE WPT 2 4 Press the NXT Key to sequence to the next way point page with a different country code The PRV Key can be used to sequence backward through the way point pages Additional country codes and corre sponding POS coordinates will be sequentially dis played POS The coordinates of the waypoint as stored in the database memory Figure 2 77 FREQ The VHF frequency for the station Figure 2 77 VAR The magnetic variation of the station Figure 2 77 ELEV DATABASE WPT 1 4 NDB ENTER NDB ENTER Figure 2 78 The elevation in feet of the station DME equipped VHF Navaids only A indicates elevation is below sea level Figure 2 77 NDB ENT The procedure for accepting the waypoint from the Navigation Data Base is to depress the ENT Key Figure 2 78 Rev 0 2 66 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions Non Directional Beacons NDBs NDBs stored in the
245. o Active Flight Plan and return to the ACTIVE MA EM RU E FLIGHT PLAN Page NOTE Look carefully at the flight plan to see if any way points are out of sequence Delete waypoints as neces Figure 3 47 Sary STAR waypoints appear indented from the other waypoints on a Flight Plan that are not part of a procedure SID STAR or APPROACH REVIEWING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the ARRIVE field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page ___ WAYPOINTS OF STAR 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to review STAR Figure 3 48 3 BACK Key DEPRESS to return to FLIGHT PLAN Page Figure 3 48 NOTE SELECT will not appear as an option since a STAR already exists in the Flight Plan EDITING A STAR FROM A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the ARRIVE field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page 2 ENT Key DEPRESS 3 Line Select Key DEPRESS twice to position the cursor over the STAR field This will erase the current TRANSITION Rev 0 0196 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 29 System Operation NOTE A list will appear with other available STARs 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the desired STAR 5 ENT Key DEPRESS to select desired STAR NOTE Cursor moves to the first waypoint of the TRANSITION list and the TRANSITION field is displayed in yellow 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position t
246. o display VNAV WAY UNRU WAYPOINT 1 1 POINT Page for selected waypoint Figure 3 122 4 ALT INSERT altitude constraint followed by A at or above or B at or below if applicable Only two or three digits are required to input an altitude i e enter 30A Figure 3 122 and 3000A is displayed Full digit entry may be used to enter an altitude Altitudes less 1000 feet enter a preceding zero i e enter 054 and 54 feet is displayed Any altitude entered greater than the transition level is converted and displayed as flight level FL NOTE If the waypoint is part of a SID STAR or Approach proce dure appropriate altitude constraints will prefill from the database 5 ENT Key DEPRESS Cursor moves to OFFSET field Figure 3 123 6 OFFSET If applicable INSERT value in nautical miles 99 to 99 range UNAU WAYPOINT 1 1 a If the offset is prior to the waypoint enter the range value and a prefills as default or Figure 3 123 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 73 System Operation b Enter a then the range value to indicate the off set is beyond the waypoint c Toerase the offset value INSERT 0 and press ENT Key The field changes to dashes indicating no offset is programmed 7 ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor moves to the FPA field only if the entered constraint is below the aircraft s present altitude NOTE A climb FPA cannot be programmed but the direct FPA field
247. obal Data Center GDC for this feature 1 Enable AUTO PRINT WX from the printer control page of the AFIS OPERATING MODES page 2 Select SEND AFIS MSG from the AFIS MENU 3 Leave the TO and FR fields blank At the address 8 field type PRFPD1234 where D1234 is the flight plan number 4 Transmit the request to the GDC When uplinked the flight plan will be treated like weather and will print automatically PRINTING MESSAGES Messages may be printed automatically as the message is uplinked and or individually at any time To Automatically Print Messages Upon Receipt 1 Select AUTO PRINT MSG from the AFIS OPERATING MODES PRINTER CONTROL page to YES All uplinked messages will print automatically upon receipt To Manually Print a Message 1 While reviewing the message line select one of the white caret symbols at the bottom of the message page 2 The PRINT MESSAGE prompt will display Press ENTER to send the message to the printer currently selected for messages Rev 3 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 57 To Manually Print All Messages 1 2 From the AFIS MENU select the SEND AFIS MSG page On the send message page leave the TO and FR fields blank At the address field tyoe ONE of the following commands MSG 1 Send messages to printer one MSG 2 Send messages to printer two MSG 3 Send messages to both printers Press ENTER until the SEND MESSAGE prompt is displaye
248. ocated at the right edge ILU of the slot REMOVE CARD 4 ON Key DEPRESS to turn on system Figure Figure 5 1 5 1 appears TO UPDATE CAUTION IF AN INTERRUPTION OF THE UPDATE PROCESS IS DESIRED REMOVE THE UPDATE DISK DO NOT TURN OFF POWER TO STOP THE UPDATE 5 Line Select or 1 Key DEPRESS to select BEGIN UPDATE if required If update is not desired depress the ES DATA BASE UPDATE Line Select or 2 Key to select restart NAV 6 With cursor over option 1 ENT Key DEPRESS The Update Data Base Page and the message X COMPLETE appear indicating the update is in progress Figure 5 2 Figure 5 2 0 5 Oct 96 GNS X1 Flight Management System 5 Database Update WHEN UPDATE IS COMPLETE If the update is successful Figure 5 3 is displayed 8 Turn system OFF or DEPRESS ENT Key to restart navigation IF UPDATE FAILS If the database update fails Figure 5 4 is displayed Depress the 1 Key then ENT Key to retry the update or use the following proce dure Sometimes when a retry is initiated a display such as that shown in Figure 5 5 may be seen momentari ly 1 Update REMOVE 2 Turn system OFF 3 Update Card INSERT into CDU 4 Turn system ON and retry Update using UPDATE PROCE DURE Steps 1 7 Card RE 5 2 UPDATE COMPLETE PRESS ENTER TO RESTART NRU Figure 5 3 DATA BASE UPDATE ENTER CHOICE BEGIN UPDATE 2 RESTART
249. odification 2222222222 2 2 2 SPACING 2 50 3 131 PX 2 76 Stability yawn dea deb devez 1 2 2 24 Standby deron aunq a 2 45 2 52 3 61 3 133 STAR 1 2 2 3 2 4 2 7 2 8 2 10 3 8 3 10 3 16 3 17 3 20 3 27 3 31 3 38 3 36 3 73 3 75 3 78 3 80 3 82 3 116 6 6 Station Amplitude 0 2 23 Status MESSAGES ies died chip dore ep dur glor des dup dud 2 23 2 21 2 79 aerae 1 1 2 19 2 77 3 114 2 69 3 128 5 RU RUE 1 2 2 55 3 123 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System 1 11 Index STRG INVALID rcx a Creo once aes ce 2 71 3 58 SUbSCFIDEOR cio teme se AGO 1 2 SING rrr 2 79 System Messages 1 4 2 73 3 2 3 8 3 37 3 61 3 109 3 110 3 119 3 122 3 123 3 126 3 128 7 24 7 25 T TAGAN inaia ad ROR aie 3 91 6 6 6 7 AE 2 18 iux ch uk hoe chek MCA RE ARA ACER CR e us 2 48 3 16 3 104 Tall 2 33 2 34 2 37 3 15 mes Ree terea 2 1 2 24 3 1 3 126 WKS 5225552 ene ter ee ere ER KE 2 20 2 72 2 76 3 124 6 6 Ji ELM 2 18
250. oes alee 3 39 3 40 3 44 6 1 7 23 3 11 7 11 7 21 7 53 7 62 Auto Leg Change 2 4 2 10 2 18 2 38 3 12 3 37 3 108 3 109 Auto Report 7 7 1 18 7 19 7 21 7 22 7 44 7 45 7 54 7 55 7 59 Auto comp ted apes RE 3 124 Alto TAS EP ES 2 77 3 117 3 118 Automatic Fuel 2 47 2 49 3 95 3 102 7 9 7 30 Automatic Weather 7 46 7 56 AVIGOM sente knee Rer 7 1 7 7 7 20 7 22 7 50 7 58 B BARO C Seth dete cede dete URUNAN 2 32 2 37 3 76 3 82 3 85 6 1 2 78 Bearing eR eee 1 1 2 20 2 27 2 56 3 55 3 93 6 1 bU Bugs 1 4 3 1 5 5 2 2 3 61 C CALG 2 44 2 45 2 51 3 132 Calculation dninni dna II 2 30 2 51 3 85 3 133 CDI 5 2 18 2 75 3 37 3 54 CDU 1 1 1 8 2 55 2 57 2 75 2 77 2 79 3 1 3 16 3 41 3 46 3 74 3 81 3 86 3 89 3 91 3 93 3 112 3 113 3 123 3 127 5 2 6 2 7 1 7 2 2 27 2 28 2 30 6 2 Circling Type 3 32 3 38 Closest
251. on DIRECT TO VNAV WAYPOINT AS LATERAL WAYPOINT This procedure enables the pilot to proceed Direct To a waypoint both vertically and laterally by means of a Vertical Path Descent If the current To waypoint is the desired VNAV Direct To waypoint go to Step 4 1 Line Select Key on NAVIGATION Page 1 DEPRESS to posi tion the cursor over the TO waypoint field Type in the desired waypoint and press ENT or Key DEPRESS A DIRECT TO Page appears with the cursor over the current TO way point DIRECT 1 2 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired way point Figure 3 132 Figure 3 132 NOTE Active Flight Plans containing more than 18 waypoints will display the remaining waypoints on subsequent pages Press key again or NXT Key to access remaining pages A Random Waypoint may also be used See DIRECT TO Random Waypoint 3 ENT Key DEPRESS CDU screen automatically advances to NAVIGATION Page 1 NOTE If an offset waypoint was selected the system first displays the OFFSET WPT Page Verify data and DEPRESS ENT The DIRECT Page will again be displayed with the cursor over the Offset Waypoint Press ENT The display automatically NAVIGATION 1 4 advances to NAVIGATION Page 1 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over TO Waypoint on NAVIGATION Page 1 Figure 3 133 Figure 3 133 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 81 System Operation 5 VNAV Key DEP
252. on or Omega receiver has failed The rubidium frequency standard in the RPU has failed GNS X Flight Management System 2 19 Page Display Definitions THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 2 80 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation SECTION 3 SYSTEM OPERATION PRE DEPARTURE POWER ON OFF AND PARALLAX ADJUSTMENT 1 ON Key DEPRESS momentarily The SELF TEST Page Figure 3 1 will be dis played for approximately 30 seconds During the time the SELF TEST message is displayed the system is performing internal self tests If the system was turned OFF last by the removal of air Figure 3 1 craft power the system will turn ON automatically when aircraft power is applied 2 BRT Key Adjust as required The display will initially come on at 75 of full bright DEPRESS and hold the BRT Key to dim the display Release the BRT Key DEPRESS and hold again to brighten the display To attain 100 brightness depress and hold BRT Key again until the display no longer gets brighter NOTE The display may be changed instantaneously to 75 of full bright from any brightness level by momentarily depressing the ON Key 3 Parallax Adjustment If the Line Select Keys do not align with the line select prompts on the screen DEPRESS the BRT Key If the screen begins to dim release the BRT Key then depress again and hold while momentarily pressing the B Key then the P Key Using the U Up or D Down
253. or paral SH lax adjustment of the Line ail Select Keys e NOTE The illumination of the noar front panel and keyboard is nor az JO WNP mally controlled through the air craft panel lighting control ELOOO aee B ele MESSAGE KEY ANNUNCIA 22 ET TOR MSG E la The MSG annunciator will flash e to alert the operator that mes ei sage needs to be viewed on eu ue one of the SYSTEM MES SAGES or SENSOR em DOQ SAGES Pages Saisie MIRE all 20 0 1 4 GNS X1 Flight Management System Gan Description Depressing the MSG Key will display the message page The newest message will be indicated with a flashing asterisk to the left of the message If the message requires some action be taken by the operator the MSG annunciator will remain on steadily until the action is completed If no action is required the MSG annunciator will extin guish when the message page is exited
254. ormation may be observed XPDR ADF Rev 1 Page Display Definitions TUNE 3 4 Figure 2 67a TUNE 3 4 Figure 2 67b TUNE 4 4 Figure 2 68 Juv9s GNS XL Flight Management System 2 57 Page Display Definitions HOLDING PATTERN SECTION HOLD KEY HOLDING PATTERN PAGE This page is accessed by depressing the HOLD Key when the cursor is positioned over a Waypoint Identifier HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 Page 1 of 1 AT The Holding Fix and country HOLDING PATTERN 171 name or airport ident Figure 2 69 HOLDING PATTERN ENTRY AND STATUS MESSAGE If the entry course to the holding fix can be deter mined the entry procedure will be annunciated after all the holding pattern parame ters are entered DIRECT ENTRY indicates the system will use a direct entry to the holding pattern See Figure 2 70 for Direct Entry pattern TEARDROP ENTRY indicates the system will use a teardrop entry to the holding pattern See Figure 2 71 for Teardrop Entry pattern PARALLEL ENTRY indicates the system will use a parallel entry to the holding pattern See Figure 2 72 for Parallel Entry pattern Figure 2 69 Rev 0 2 58 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions Entry Course Outbound End Turn Point Holding Course Outbound End Turn Point Holding Course Entry Course Direct Entry Pattern Figure 2 70 Rev 0 di GNS X Flight Management
255. ound the TO INTCPT field changes to TO the FAF Rev 1 Te GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 41 System Operation NOTE When flying the approach on a transition that specifies NoPT and a PT waypoint is depicted on the flight plan it will be necessary to do a DIRECT TO the next waypoint beyond the PT waypoint to avoid flying the Procedure Turn NOTE When a Procedure NAVIGATION 1 4 Turn is initiated the out bound course is displayed on the NAVIGATION 1 Page If the course arrow does not automatically slew to the outbound course it must be manually set to the outbound course so that the CDI sensing is correct Figure 3 68 indicates a right Figure 3 68 turn to 350 is upcoming See the following diagram and Figures 3 70 through 3 73 as the air craft sequences through the turn IAF Rev 1 3 42 GNS Xi Flight Management System 70 98 System Operation NAVIGATION 1 4 PROCEDURE TURN NX LEFT INTCPT DIS 2 5 ETE DTK GS WIND Figure 3 70 NAVIGATION 1 74 PROCEDURE TURN NX LEFT INTRCPT DIS 5 2 ETE INBOUND CRS GS WIND Figure 3 71 NAVIGATION PROCEDURE TURN NX MAL1RC DIS ETE TNBOUND CRS GS WIND Figure 3 72 NAVIGATION 1 4 FR DRK lt DIS DTK LS WIND Figure 3 73 Rev 1 Jul 98 GNS X Flight Management System 3 43 System Operation NOTE If aircraft is configured for dual systems no XFILL prompt will be displ
256. ow1 1 2 43 2 44 2 46 2 47 2 49 3 95 3 102 3 103 3 105 7 5 7 9 7 30 Fuel Plan Eius 1 2 2 46 2 65 3 99 3 101 3 103 3 104 Ee 2 42 2 47 3 95 3 100 3 103 FUNCIONS deed ined he PRODR UIS 1 2 2 1 2 69 3 36 3 96 3 100 G 7 1 7 2 7 46 7 47 7 57 7 60 Glide 2 12 2 33 2 37 3 75 6 3 GPS 1 1 2 20 2 29 2 31 2 45 2 49 2 51 2 75 2 78 3 15 3 37 3 39 3 104 3 110 3 112 3 113 3 121 3 122 3 130 6 3 6 5 GPS MIME ret RERUM Riiie eR 2 30 3 104 GRAD 2 5 5 PETITS 2 34 6 2 Groundspeed 2 11 2 14 2 17 2 34 2 40 2 44 2 46 2 48 2 72 2 74 2 77 3 15 3 98 3 104 3 127 6 3 7 5 7 6 2 9 3 14 3 37 3 39 3 41 3 44 3 46 3 75 3 83 Guidelines 2 67 7 39 7 42 Hsfield atc ARES RR en 2 74 2 77 3 119 er ee ee ae eee 6 3 Heading 0 2 9 2 53 3 16 3 37 3 48 3 57 3 61 Headwind 0 2 eee eee Ie 2 18 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS Xi Flight Management System r5 QN PEDIS 2 31 6 3 Holding 1 5 2 4 2 8 2 10 2 13 2 15 2 17 2 19 2 33 2 58 2 62 2 64 2 76 3 33 3 52 3 63 6 3 7 8 Holding 2 10 2 15 2 17 2 58 2 62 3 66 3 68 Holding Pattern 1 5 2 4 2 8 2 10 2
257. position cursor over station iden tifier to be deselected Figure 3 191 6 BACK Key DEPRESS Figure 3 192 DESE Figure 3 191 LECT will appear to inform the pilot of the SUBSECTION pending change SUBSECTION 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to DESELECT station To restore a deselected station DESELECT a Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the sta tion identifier to be Figure 3 192 restored Rev 0 3 120 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation b BACK Key DEPRESS RESTORE will appear to inform the pilot of the pending change c ENT Key DEPRESS to restore the station SENSOR DESELECTION The deselection of a position sensor on NAVIGATION Page 4 com pletely eliminates the sensor s contribution to the composite blended position This is only recommended if the pilot can determine which position keeping sensor is inaccurate or by flying over a known location and then comparing the sensor position against the known position To Deselect a Sensor 1 NAV Key DEPRESS until NAVIGATION Page 4 is displayed 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over sensor to be deselected 3 BACK Key DEPRESS OUT will appear to NAVIGATION 4 4 inform the pilot of the pending change Figure 3 193 4 ENT Key DEPRESS OUT will remain in the sensor field and DESE LECTED appears beside the corresponding sensor on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page
258. proceed to the next step Figure 3 59b 3 DESTINATION identifier VERIFY or INSERT valid ident Figure 3 59b 4 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 3 59c If the pair is valid and has only one VIA the ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN page is now dis played with the waypoints of the pair added Rev 2 COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION Figure 3 59a COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION Figure 3 59b COMPANY ROUTES 1 1 KCOF KEFD ORIGIN DESTINRTION gt Figure 3 59c Apr 00 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 36 1 System Operation COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION ROUTE NOT FOUND Figure 3 59d COMPANY ROUTES ORIGIN DESTINATION ACTIVE FPL FULL 5 f the selected city pair Figure 3 59e has more than one VIA the first one will be dis COMPANY ROUTES 1 1 played Figure 3 59f ORIGIN KCOF 6 Use the PRV NXT or DESTINATION KSMY BACK keys to scroll COUIA NES through the list of VIAs Figure 3 59g 7 ENT Key DEPRESS The ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN page is now dis _ played with the waypoints Figure 3 59f of the pair added COMPANY ROUTES n ORIGIN KCOF DESTINATION KSMY Figure 3 590 2 3 36 2 GNS X Flight Management System System Operation Note In order to execute approaches with a specific aircraft installa tion the installation must meet the standards set forth by the govern ing certification agency Consult the Aircraft F
259. qr d on o a qur dn dads dos 7 3 NO EPIEAVAID tice 3 7 ek Ee E hr beh 3 8 0 1 8 GNS XL Flight Management System Oct 96 NO SIDS AVAILABLE 2 5 3 19 NOSIDSAVAIADIG 2 5 3 19 NO SIGMBETS 7 12 7 32 NO STARS 2 6 3 28 222222220555 br he E Inr RR ER RR C S 2 67 6 5 kgs 3 84 testbeds e editar ose dde Pac PO aed 3 3 NONSIRS REUS 2 74 3 3 2 4 3 8 3 61 Non Standard 2 62 E 3 42 NOTAMS Un dul 7 13 2 13 2 14 2 17 2 19 3 46 3 67 6 5 0 Oceanic Remote Operation 2 30 2 49 2 50 2 72 3 10 3 15 3 130 3 131 Offset s 1 3 2 11 2 13 2 19 2 33 2 37 2 41 2 65 2 70 3 8 3 51 3 54 3 73 3 74 3 79 3 82 3 84 3 100 3 107 3 112 3 114 3 116 3 118 3 123 3 127 3 130 2 22 2 24 OPTIONS 3 34 3 47 3 66 3 79 7 10 Outer 2 68
260. r port identifier This procedure should be used when an approach at a different airport is desired 1 Line Select Key DE PRESS to position cur sor over APPROACH field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page TAF MAP 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to PT display APPROACH Page 3 Line Select Key DE PRESS to position cursor Figure 3 59 over ERASE Figure 3 59 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to erase APPROACH and return to the FLIGHT PLAN Page WPTS OF APPROACH Rev 0 One GNS XL Flight Management System 3 35 System Operation DELETING AN APPROACH WAYPOINT 1 Display the appropriate FPL Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the APPROACH waypoint identifier to be deleted 3 BACK Key DEPRESS A DELETE prompt will appear adja cent to the waypoint 4 ENT Key DEPRESS NOTE When an APPROACH is modified by adding or deleting way points including waypoints between the fence and the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint the sequence of waypoints is no longer identified as an APPROACH and the system will not enter the Approach Mode An APPROACH CANCELED message will be displayed anytime a waypoint is deleted or added to an APPROACH procedure on the Active Flight Plan NOTE Anytime a Direct To the MAP is performed and an approach is either armed or active APPROACH CANCELED message will appear The approach functions will be disabled and the CDI scaling will return to the TERMINAL sensitivity of 1N
261. ration date An automatic leg change will not occur upon reaching the TO waypoint Message annun ciator will not illuminate most of the time Rev 2 2 76 GNS X Flight Management System Apr 00 Page Display Definitions ADVISORY continued System Message Explanation NO NAV POS gt 1 7 NM POS WARN 2 8 NM POS WARN 3 8 NM POWER OFF POS The system is not navigating Message annunciator will not illuminate Based on the signal strength or geometry the VPU sensor quality may be such that the composite position may have more than 1 7 nm error and may not be suitable for naviga tion in the terminal areas Based on the signal strength or geometry the VPU or VLF sensor quality may be such that the composite position may have more than 2 8 nm error and may not be suitable for enroute navigation on J V routes Based on the signal strength or geometry the VPU or VLF sensor quality may be such that the composite position may have more than 3 8 nm error and may not be suitable for enroute navigation on J V or Random routes The system has lost power in flight for more than 7 seconds and the OFF waypoint is available Reviewing the OFF waypoint page removes this message SENSOR MISCOMPARE The difference between the CDU composite STRG INVALID TAS FAIL USING MAN HDG Rev 0 Oct 96 blended position and a sensor position exceeds a predetermined amount The system has stopped computin
262. rder for the SEND MESSAGE field to appear Figure 7 76 8 ENT Key DEPRESS The message will be downlinked and the AFIS MENU Page will TO FROM and Figure 7 76 field information of SEND MESSAGE Page will be used in downlink message NOTE DATA LINK DISABLED will appear in the SEND MES SAGE field if the downlink is disabled Wait for DATA CENT AK message if sending multiple requests Rev 0 7 42 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 AFIS MESSAGES REVIEW 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page AFIS MENU 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over Option 7 DISPL AFIS MSG Figure 7 77 3 ENT Key DEPRESS DIS PLAY AFIS MSG Page appears 4 MESSAGE REVIEW Figure 7 78 5 AFIS PRV or BACK Key DEPRESS Subsequent message pages appear or old AFIS MENU Page returns with cursor positioned over Option 8 Figure 7 77 DISPLAY AFIS MSG 1 1 NOTE Messages will remain in the system until the system is Figure 7 78 powered off SELECTING OPERATING MODES FOR AFIS USERS EQUIPPED WITH SATELLITE DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AUTO REPORTING When the system is initialized the Automatic Reporting and Auto Wx update function will retain the status at aircraft shutdown The follow ing procedures allow the function to be turned OFF and back ON Rev 0 ie GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 43 TURNING AUTO REPORT AU
263. received via the data link Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 13 DATE TIME Actual day and time of the issue of the wind informa tion This field may be blank if transferred from disk The number is read 12th day 2356 ZULU Figure 7 21 Wind data available to review includes e Flight Level e Wind Direction True North Wind Velocity Knots WINDS ALOFT Temperature Degrees Celsius Figure 7 21 RECALL AFIS FPL PAGE This page is accessed by RECALL AFIS FPL selecting Option 5 on the AFIS MENU Page This page allows the pilot to recall previously computed AFIS Flight Plan and Weather requests from the Global Data Center via the data link FPL A Global Data Center generated Flight Plan number FIgUIG 7 26 Entered as an alpha character followed by four numeric digits If FPL is entered other entries are not required Figure 7 22 RECRLL RFIS FPL DATE Issue date of recalled AFIS Flight Plan ETD Estimated time of depar ture in GMT of recalled AFIS Flight Plan FR Origin of recalled AFIS Flight Plan TO Destination of recalled AFIS Flight Plan Figure 7 23 Figure 7 23 Rev 0 1 14 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 TRANSMIT REQUEST When cursor is on this field and ENT is pressed the recall request is sent to the Global Data Center via data link Figure 7 22 DATA LINK DISABLED Aircraft equipped with the Antenna S
264. respective fields change to reflect the updated information AFIS FLT PLAN 3 4 Figure 7 50 9 AFIS or NXT Key DEPRESS to display AFIS FLT PLAN Page 4 NOTE DEPRESSING PRV or BACK Key will display AFIS FLT PLAN Page 3 AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 4 Figure 7 50 10 Performance Bias Data REVIEW Figure 7 51 11 AFIS or NXT Key AFIS FLT PLAN 4 4 DEPRESS to return to AFIS MENU Page where the cursor will be positioned over Option 2 NOTE Pressing the BACK or PRV Key throughout the Flight Plan Pages will cause the previ ous Flight Plan Page to appear Figure 7 51 Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 31 SIGMETS REVIEW UPDATE 1 2 NOTE If no SIGMETS have been recorded on the disk a page appears displaying the message NO SIGMETS ON DISK If there are no SIGMETS via a Flight Plan update the display first SIGMETS Page AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 2 SIGMETS ENT Key DEPRESS to Figure 7 52 or 7 53 Fig TU message reads NO SIGMETS Depress AFIS PRV or BACK Figure 7 52 Key to return to AFIS MENU Page 4 POSITION cursor over FROM field TO FROM Identifier VERIFY or INSERT ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor will automatically move to the TO Identifier field TO Identifier VERIFY or INSERT ENTER Key DEPRESS RFIS SIGMETS The cursor will automatically TO move to TRA
265. roach plate The system may not give vertical guidance to the interim waypoint Pilots are responsible for procedural compli ance NOTE If the MAP is abeam or beyond the threshold or the approach is a circling approach no altitude constraints will be displayed at the MAP from the database Constraints may be entered manually When the Approach is flown the system will provide guidance along the final approach course to the Missed Approach Point When initially executing a missed approach procedure use the FMS Heading Mode or manually fly the procedure to ensure prop er track and turn direction NOTE A fence separates the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint from the MAP the last waypoint of the Approach No Auto Leg change waypoint sequencing will occur to waypoints beyond the fence once the airplane passes the MAP Rev 1 Jul 98 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 37 System Operation At the MAP the pilot must manually or via the HDG Mode maneuver the aircraft to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint If after the missed approach an approach at a different airport is desired erase the current approach procedure before selecting a procedure at the new airport This will insure proper waypoint sequencing on the Active Flight Plan LOADING A GPS GPS OVERLAY APPROACH 1 FPL Key DEPRESS until the ACTIVE FPL Page appears Figure 3 60 ACTIVE FPL 1 1 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position S t
266. rsor on to the FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page over the desired flight plan number and pressing ENT NOTE If necessary use the PRV or NXT Key to cycle through all available FLIGHT PLAN LIST Pages If the desired flight plan does not appear a new flight plan may be created See Building Flight Plans If AFIS is installed in the system the display will automatically advance to the AFIS Flight Plan Page Here a flight plan may be selected from the disc that has been inserted in the AFIS DTU prior to turning on the system Refer to Section 7 Rev 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 5 System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 3 6 GNS Xi Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation BUILDING FLIGHT PLANS FPL CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN 1 NOTE If all 56 Flight Plans are used NO FPL AVAIL will appear in the field Any of the stored flight plans may be erased to allow additional entries The procedure is described under Modifying A FPL Key DEPRESS to display Stored FLIGHT PLAN LIST Page if required DEPRESS to position cursor on blank line and display the NEXT FPL number Figure 3 7 If several Flight Plans are displayed position cursor anywhere on the page then depress the BACK Key to show NEXT FPL number available Figure 3 7 FLIGHT PLAN 5 1 1 lt lt DEPART ARRIVE SELECT Z Flight Plan APPROACH ERASE 3 ENT Key DE PRESS to
267. rsor over the STAR waypoint identifier that will follow the new entry on the Flight Plan page Figure 3 50 DEPART I 2 Waypoint Ident INSERT ENT Key DEPRESS twice Figure 3 50 NOTE previously indented STAR waypoints ACTIVE FPL 2 3 move over one space to the left on the screen and are treated as normal waypoints in the Flight Plan Figure 3 51 DEPART DELETING WAYPOINTS ARRIVE OF A STAR APPROACH 1 Line Select Key Figure 3 51 DEPRESS to position cursor over the STAR waypoint identifier to be deleted on the Flight Plan page 2 BACK Key DEPRESS A DELETE prompt will appear adja cent to the waypoint to be deleted 3 ENT Key DEPRESS The waypoint will be erased and the waypoints of the STAR will move left one space These way points will be treated as non procedure waypoints in the flight plan Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 31 System Operation ENTERING AN APPROACH ON A STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cur sor over APPROACH field on the ACTIVE FPL page Figure 3 52 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to display APPROACH Page Figure 3 53 3 APPROACH Airport identifier VERIFY or INSERT valid ident NOTE If there are no APPROACHes associated with the Approach Airport the message NO APPROACH AVAIL appears and the airport ident field flashes Depress FPL Key to return to Active Flight Plan 4 Line Sel
268. s GPS SUBSECTION 2 3 Page 2 of 3 Pressing the NEXT Key will display the second GPS SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed See Figure 2 36 HPE Horizontal Position Error dis 0005159 2 3 played in nautical miles as a measure of GPS accuracy POS UNCERT Estimated Position Uncertainty in nautical miles when GPS is in navigation mode Figure 2 36 Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X Flight Management System 2 29 Page Display Definitions GPS TIME GPS time in hours minutes and seconds The advisory time is dis played when at least one satellite is being tracked other wise the time field displays dashes NOTE GPS TIME may vary several seconds from GMT due to leap second input of UTC STATE The GPS receiver state can be one of the following Dashes Idle or no mode data INITIALIZE The receiver is updated with initial position and time information SKY SEARCH No almanac is available The system searches for any satellite in the visible table based on the internal or external time data and position and then assigns channels in order received ACQUISITION Constellation selection and channel assignments are being done Carrier and code lock are in progress TRANSITION receiver is transitioning from one state such as ACQUISITION to another state such as NAVIGA TION NAVIGATION The GPS receiver is in navigation mode and has at least a two dimensional position fix DR The system
269. s Figure 3 199 HDG VERIFY or INSERT ENT Key DEPRESS Rev 0 NAVIGATION 3 4 Figure 3 198 NAVIGATION 3 4 Figure 3 199 Oct 96 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 125 System Operation NOTE In some cases MAN will appear in the HDG field and the SYSTEM MESSAGES Page will display USING MAN HDG mes sage LOSS OF POWER IN FLIGHT THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE USED IN A REMOTE AREA WHERE NAVAIDS ARE UNAVAILABLE AND THERE IS REASON TO BELIEVE THE SENSORS CONTRIBUTING TO THE COMPOSITE POSITION MAY BE IN ERROR The procedure allows the pilot to initialize enroute when the aircraft has sustained a loss of power for more than 7 seconds The Power Off Waypoint HOFF provides a snapshot of system data at the moment power was lost To Initialize when power is restored NOTE When power returns system performs Self Test and displays the INITIALIZATION Page 1 DATE and GMT VERIFY or ENT current DATE and ES POSITION FIX GMT if required 2 ENT Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over the POS field if required NOTE The coordinates are a rolling display of the real time blended position of the sensors being updated 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to accept real time position 4 HOLD Key DEPRESS 5 Power Off Waypoint IDENT INSERT OFF Figure 3 200 6 ENT Key DEPRESS 7 MINUTES OFF LAST TK LAST GS VERIFY and RECORD for future 3 201 3
270. s tem will automatically select the SATCOM mode for transmit and receive 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to dis lm play AFIS MENU Page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over Option 8 OPERATING MODES ENT Key DEPRESS 4 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over OFF option of SAT NETWORK field Figure 7 102 5 BACK Key DEPRESS ON appears in the cursor Figure 7 103 NOTE The ACTIVE LINK infor mation at the bottom of the page indicates the network that is being serviced at that time 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to turn satellite network on SAT satellite LINK CONTROL Page appears with cursor over AUTO Figure 7 104 DEPRESS ENT Key to cursor through option fields and return to AFIS AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT UHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 102 AFIS OPERATING MODES AUTO REPORT AUTO WX UPDT UHF NETWORK SAT NETWORK PRINTER CTRL ACTIVE LINK Figure 7 103 AFIS OPERATING MODES SAT LINK CONTROL SAT COM REGION LINK Figure 7 104 OPERATING MODES Page or proceed to Step 7 7 52 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation TURNING AUTO 7 Line Select Key DEPRESS until MAN ESI GCSE TEE Do appears in the cursor T SRT LINK CONTROL EE 8 ENT Key DEPRESS SRT COM Cursor moves to REGION field 9 BACK Key DEPRESS LINK until desired region appears in cursor either W Atlan
271. sage title or blank title field Figure 7 74 4 MESSAGE TITLE VERIFY or ENTER A new title may be entered with a maximum of 18 characters PPM MENU To change an existing title type characters over the old Title The BACK Key can be used to delete charac ters one at a time Figure 7 74 NOTE Whenever a title is changed or erased the preprogrammed message associaled with the title will be erased also 5 ENT Key DEPRESS The preprogrammed message associat ed with that title will appear If no message has been pro grammed the display will be blank Insert message as required up to 7 lines of text Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 7 41 EDITING ENTERING A PREPROGRAMMED MESSAGE 6 TEXT EDIT or ENTER using the following guidelines a Entering a character causes the character at the cursor posi tion and all the characters to the right to be shifted one position b The BACK Key may be used to delete characters one at a time from right to left c The SP Key may be used as a spacer to sepa rate words d The PRV Key may be used to move the cursor one space to the left The NXT Key may be used to move the cursor one space to the right PPM MENU Figure 7 75 CONTINUE SENDING MESSAGE 7 NXT Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the SEND MESSAGE field It ES PREPROGRAMMED MSG will be necessary to press ETA CHANGE the ENT Key after seven lines of text in o
272. se all altitude constraints except the altitude constraint at the current lateral TO Waypoint VNAV DATA 1 1 Page 1 of 1 NOTE This page is accessed by using the Line Select Key to place the cursor over the DATA prompt on VNAV Page and pressing ENT Key CRUISE ALT Manually entered cruise altitude in feet or Flight Level FL Any alti tude entered greater than the transition level is converted and dis played as flight level rounded off to the nearest hundred feet An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero Figure 2 46 NOTE In a climb when the aircraft is within 200ft of the Preselect Altitude the CRUISE ALT changes to the same value as the PRE SEL ALT Rev 0 2 38 GNS Xi Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions The field also goes to dashes during a descent digital systems only when the aircraft is 200ft lower than the CRUISE ALT and the Preselect is set to a lower value If the PRESEL is analog the altitude value will remain in the CRUISE ALT field When the aircraft is within 200ft of the PRESEL ALT the CRUISE ALT changes again to the same value as the PRESEL ALT TRANS LEVEL Transition Level used to determine the altitude at UNRU DATA 1 1 which the system converts altitudes to Flight Levels This field defaults to FL180 if the pilot does not enter a value Figure 2 46 DEFAULT FPA The FPA defaults to the 3 0 unless it is manually entered The
273. sing GPS as the sole navi gation source an FDE pre diction to determine sufficient S GPS availability must be per Figure 3 19 Rev 3 3 14 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 02 System Operation formed prior to departure Refer to the Special Procedures section for instructions on performing the FDE prediction procedure BEFORE TAXI IRS EQUIPPED The Inertial Reference System IRS should be aligned and placed in the Navigation Mode using the IRS manufacturer s operating instruc tions 1 MSG Key DEPRESS for IRS Sensor Messages SENSOR MESSAGES Page will show IRS ALIGN during align ment sequence When the IRS is in normal Navigation Mode no IRS messages will be displayed 2 IRS Status VERIFY NAV Observe that no IRS messages appear on the SENSOR MESSAGES Page RUNWAY LINE UP IRS EQUIPPED Provided an accurate alignment position was entered and the IRS was placed in the Navigation Mode prior to taxi no further action is required IRS VLF RPU GPS AND OR VPU EQUIPPED On the ground the system will navigate deriving composite position and groundspeed from the GPS or IRS provided the IRS was aligned and placed into the Navigation Mode prior to taxi All other sensors VLF and VPU will enter the Primary Navigation Mode auto matically at 50 kts IRS groundspeed or weight off wheels provided they have sufficient stations to begin navigation Momentarily depressing HOLD Key then ENT and ENT again wil
274. sired track to be inter cepted to the Missed Approach Procedure way HEADING VECTOR point Figure 3 86 ENT Key DEPRESS TWICE The NAVIGA TION Page will dis MAP played with the HDG and DTK displayed in yellow The autopilot may now be re engaged if required to fly to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint Figure 3 86 HEADING VECTOR 1 1 Figure 3 85 It is recommended that the ETA field on NAVIGATION Page 1 be changed to ALT during approach procedures for a display of the altitude constraints at the current TO waypoint To change the field from ETA to ALT perform the following 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the ETA field BACK Key DEPRESS E ALT will be displayed in E the cursor Figure 3 87 ENT Key DEPRESS to change the field to altitude Figure 3 87 Rev 1 Tut GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 49 System Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Rev 0 3 50 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation ENROUTE DIRECT TO ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT function enables the pilot to fly direct to any lateral waypoint on the Active Flight Plan without reinserting the waypoint identifier NOTE Ifa Direct To the MAP on the active flight plan is initiated the selected Approach Procedure will be canceled as indicated by the waypoints of the approach no longer being indented and a MSG 1 Key DEPRESS A D
275. splay Definitions DR ULF SUBSECTION 2 4 The number of times the VLF Omega Sensor has been in DR since first enter ing the VLF primary naviga tion mode This information is not displayed if the system has never been in DR Figure 2 26 DR TIME Figure 2 26 The total number of minutes the VLF Omega Sensor has been in DR since the operator last man ually verified position This information is not displayed if the system has never been in DR Figure 2 26 VLF RCVD The number of U S Naval Communication stations being received by the VLF Omega Sensor Figure 2 26 USED The number of communication stations being used for navigation Figure 2 26 OMEGA RCVD The number of Omega stations being received by the VLF Omega Sensor Figure 2 26 USED The number of Omega stations being used for navigation Figure 2 26 NOTE A maximum of eight stations in any combination can be used for navigation Rev 0 2 22 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions VLF SUBSECTION 3 4 Page 3 of 4 Pressing the NXT Key again will display the third VLF SUBSECTION Page and the following can be observed Column 1 Figure 2 27 VLF COMM Stations WSH Jim Creek Washington AUS Northwest Cape Australia ANT Anthorne England MNE Cutler Maine ULF SUBSECTION 3 4 HAW Lualualei Hawaii e Yosami Japan GBR Rugby England or ANN Annapolis Maryland Fi
276. st to the system shut down position Dashes will be displayed when the cursor is placed over the position POS field POS Displays the last system position at shut down Dashes are dis played when the cursor is over the IDENT field PART NUMBER AND SOFTWARE MODIFICATION STATUS The bottom line of the display shows the unit part number and the software level of the unit NOTE This page cannot be recalled once DATE GMT and POS have been entered In order to display this again the system must be turned off and then turned back on FLIGHT PLAN SECTION FPL KEY Upon pressing the FPL Key the FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 1 Page will be displayed and the following can be observed NOTE The FLIGHT PLAN LIST page will be automatically displayed if the ENT key is depressed at least three times while on the initializa tion page FLIGHT PLAN PAGES NOTE If AFIS equipped the first page displayed after system initial ization will be the AFIS FPL LIST page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN LIST page NOTE If the data base contains company routes the first page dis played after system initialization will be the COMPANY ROUTES page in lieu of the FLIGHT PLAN LIST page If both AFIS and Company Routes are present the COMPANY ROUTES page is dis played first FLIGHT PLAN LIST 1 1 Page 1 of 1 The FLIGHT PLAN LIST page will be displayed automatically after system initialization If the initialization airport matches a departure airport on the
277. stem 3 89 System Operation The PRESET frequency displayed on the control head is not neces sarily the PRESET frequency displayed on the CDU Each may be entered independently Depending on the system configuration the cursor can appear over the PRESET field for either COMM 1 or COMM 2 TUNING NAVs Keyboard Method If Station Identifier Is Used 1 3 90 TUNE Key DEPRESS until NAV TUNE Page is displayed Figure 3 144 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor opposite the desired radio NAV 1 or NAV 2 Station Identifier INSERT or VERIFY entry Figure 3 145 ENT Key DEPRESS The new frequency is dis played immediately and is annunciated with KEY adjacent to the frequency field If the identifier is not found immediately the IDENT field will go to dashes until the station is located in the database Once located the identifi er will be displayed and the KEY annunciation will shift to the identifier line Figure 3 146 TUNE 2 3 Figure 3 144 TUNE 2 3 Figure 3 145 TUNE 2 3 Figure 3 146 Rev 0 GNS Xz Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation NOTE NAV tuning is designed to enhance the VPU VORTAC Position Unit The VPU will only use VOR DME or DME only navaids includes TACAN and ILS therefore only VOR DME or DME only navaids will be displayed In areas where a VOR only and a DME only are on the same frequency and within line of sight of the aircraft
278. system power up FUEL USED will remain dashes until auto fuel flow is detected 2 Line Select Key PLAN 6 8 DEPRESS to place the cursor over flashing weight AIRCRAFT WEIGHT field Figure 3 171 3 BASIC OP WT VERI FY or INSERT 4 ENT Key DEPRESS PAYLOAD VERIFY or INSERT ENT Key DEPRESS 7 FUEL ON BOARD VERIFY or INSERT 8 ENT Key DEPRESS E MEERN NOTE VERIFY INPUTS field disappears and a GROSS WT value replaces dashes and weight fields no longer blink Figure 3 172 VERIFY FUEL message replaces VERIFY INPUTS Figure 3 172 message when MAN fuel flow is being used and FUEL ON BOARD has not been verified or updated on PLAN Page 1 or 6 All blinking weight fields must be verified or values inserted using the ENT Key for GROSS WT field to display information Figure 3 171 PLRN 6 8 Rev 1 re GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 105 System Operation RESETTING FUEL USED 1 PLAN Key DEPRESS to display aircraft weight page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over FUEL USED The field will display ZERO Figure 3 172a NOTE To leave the FUEL USED field without changing the value depress the line select key when the field displays ZERO The cur sor will be removed from the page 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to reset fuel used to zero PLAN 6 8 AIRCRAFT WEIGHT Figure 3 172a Rev 1 3 106 GNS X Flight Management System Jul98 System Operation SPECIAL
279. t System Oct 96 System Operation EDITING ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS The following pages allow the pilot to edit altitude constraints for way points on the VNAV WAYPOINT Page VNAV pages referred to as VNAV FPL Pages One of the three following options may be used OPTION 1 Using the VNAV Page OPTION 2 Using the VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Pages OPTION 3 Using the VNAV WAYPOINT Page Option 1 Using VNAV Page 1 VNAV Key DEPRESS to display VNAV 1 2 UNRU 1 2 Page The altitude con straint may be changed on this page if the cur rent TO waypoint has a constraint programmed Type the new altitude in the altitude field adjacent to the TOWPT parameters associated with the former con Figure 3 129 straint will remain unchanged i e FPA A B G or OFFSET Figure 3 129 2 ENT Key DEPRESS Option 2 Using VNAV FPL WAYPOINT Page 1 VNAV Key DEPRESS to display the VNAV 2 2 Page NOTE More VNAV Pages will be available if the active flight plan has several pages of waypoints UNRU 2 2 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired waypoint altitude Figure 3 130 Figure 3 130 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 79 System Operation 3 Altitude Constraint INSERT new altitude constraint followed by A at or above or B at or below if applicable Any altitude value entered greater than the Transition Level value on the data page is converted and displayed as FL fl
280. t be erased The Active Flight Plan is automatically erased upon system shut down Rev 1 2 12 GNS X Flight Management System Jul98 Page Display Definitions NAVIGATION SECTION NAV KEY Upon pressing the NAV Key the NAVIGATION 1 4 Page will be dis played and the following can be observed NAVIGATION PAGES NOTE If AFIS is installed in the system the NAV section will consist of five pages NAVIGATION 1 4 Page 1 of 4 FR The FROM waypoint identifier is displayed on the left If the system has a valid ground speed the time of departure or time overhead at that way point displayed on the right This line can also display DIRECT HOLD PROCE DURE TURN DME ARC or PSEUDO VORTAC Figure 2 17 TO The TO waypoint identifier is displayed on the left If the system has a valid ground speed the ETA at that waypoint is displayed on the right The TO field may also display AR HP or PT if the waypoint indicates a DME ARGC Holding Pattern or Procedure Turn The ETA field can be changed to display constraint altitude and waypoint offset distance if an altitude constraint has been programmed at the current TO way point by placing the cursor over this field and dressing the BACK Key Figure 2 17 See Section 3 for the procedure NX NAVIGATION 1 4 Figure 2 17 This line is normally blank Figure 2 18 except during Waypoint Alert 30 seconds prior to crossing the TO waypoint In this case the next NX waypo
281. t power for more than 7 seconds refer to Special Procedure Loss of Power In Flight for ini tialization procedure POWER ON Five minutes minimum prior to reaching known point 1 ONKey DEPRESS BRT Key ADJUST as required 3 DATE and GMT VERIFY If DATE or GMT is incorrect it may be updated as described in the INITIALIZATION Page proce dures 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to place the cursor over POS field 5 POS Coordinates VERIFY displayed NOTE POS coordinate accuracy is not critical on this step as an update will follow 6 ENT Key DEPRESS 7 Manual TAS INSERT if required If necessary refer to the pro cedure for Manual TAS Entry under Special Procedures Enter Primary Navigation Mode Prior to reaching known point NOTE This step is automatic with weight off wheels or at 150 knots Auto TAS 8 RDY MSG VERIFY If the system enters the Primary Navigation Mode automatically VERIFY POSITION is displayed on the SYSTEM MESSAGE Page and Step 9 and 10 are not required 9 HOLD Key DEPRESS 10 ENT Key DEPRESS TWICE Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 117 System Operation Position Update A position update must be performed to give the system an accurate starting position An update may be accomplished over a known point or by using an offset If necessary refer to the procedure for Position Check and Update 11 HOLD Key DEPRESS over known point 12 IDENT or Known Po
282. te system position coordinates at the moment the HOLD Key was depressed in degrees minutes and hundredths of minutes Figure 2 74 IDENT The alphanumeric designator of the reference waypoint used to check or update position Figure 2 74 FIX POSITION FIX The actual coordinates of the reference point in degrees minutes and hundredths of minutes Figure 2 74 Figure 2 74 Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 63 Page Display Definitions DIF The difference between the composite position and the FIX or other sensor position in degrees minutes and hundredths of minutes Figure 2 74 NOTE Position coordinates of individual sensors and the difference between those sensor positions and the composite system position may be displayed by moving the cursor over the FIX field and depressing the BACK Key The composite position may be updated to the most accurate sensor by pressing the BACK Key until the desired sensor appears then pressing the ENT Key twice DIRECT TO SECTION amp KEY DIRECT TO PAGES DIRECT 1 2 Page 1 of 2 This display is accessed through the B key and presents a listing of all Active Flight Plan waypoints on as many pages as is appropriate to display all of the waypoints The cursor may be positioned over any desired identifier ahead of or behind the aircraft to proceed DIRECT Figure 2 75 A new waypoint may be added to the flight plan to proceed direct T
283. th and speed in knots Figure 2 19 XFILL RUTO Figure 2 19 XFILL If the aircraft is configured for dual systems the XFILL prompt will appear on line 10 indicating the systems contain dissimilar data Rev 0 2 14 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions NOTE XFILL will not appear when DME ARC ARC Intercept Procedure Turn or Holding Pattern are in progress on the system performing the procedure AUTO The leg change mode AUTO or MAN may be selected if the cursor is over this field using the BACK Key Figure 2 19 If AUTO is selected the system will sequence to the next leg on the FPL If MAN is selected the system will not sequence to the next leg on the FPL and fly the current track NAVIGATION 1 4 with a Holding Pattern Procedure Turn Heading or Heading Intercept Programmed HOLD Indicates that a Holding NAVIGATION 1 4 Procedure has been initiated and is displayed 30 seconds prior to crossing the HP way point Figure 2 20 RIGHT or LEFT Indicates the programmed turn direction around the holding pattern as entered on the HOLD Page Figure 2 20 MANUAL or AUTO Indicates the programmed exit mode as entered on the Hold Page Selecting MANUAL initiates a continuous hold at the fix until some action is taken by the pilot to exit the hold Selecting AUTO will cause the aircraft to EXIT HOLD the next time the aircraft passes over the fix Figure 2 21 If AUTO
284. the Global Data Center via data link Figure 7 18 DATA LINK DISABLED Aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to Figure 7 18 ground data link VHF or satel lite network must also be enabled TRRNSMIT REGUEST Rev 1 1 12 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation JuV98 TERMINAL WX DATA PAGES These pages are accessed by selecting a terminal weather identifier on the TERMINAL WEATHER Menu Page TERMINAL WEATHER 1 3 They allow review of Terminal Weather by identifier as trans ferred from disk or received by the Global Data Center via the data link DATE Issue date of actual weather This field may be blank Figure 7 19 if transferred from disk Weather available for review includes SA Sequence Reports Terminal Forecasts e Notices to Airmen PIREPS Pilot Reports WINDS ALOFT PAGES The AFIS WINDS ALOFT Menu Page is accessed by AFIS WINDS ALOFT selecting Option 4 on the AFIS MENU Page The WIND identifiers represent VOR airport waypoint Lat Lon or VORTAC locations for which associated weather data is available TRANSMIT REQUEST WINDS ALOFT DATA PAGES Figure 7 20 These pages are accessed by selecting a wind identifier on the WINDS ALOFT MENU page They allow review of Winds Aloft data by VOR airport waypoint Lat Lon or VORTAC identifier as transferred from disk or
285. the Missed Approach Fix Rev 0 2 8 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions Indicates Final Approach Course Alignment Fix Separates the missed approach procedure waypoint from the rest of the approach When the approach is flown the system will continue to provide guidance along the final approach course and beyond the MAP until the pilot manually sequences to the missed approach way point by using a DIRECT TO or HEADING mode procedure Figure 2 11 No Auto Leg changes will occur beyond the last waypoint prior to the fence This type of fence will not cause waypoints of the active flight plan to be deleted prior to the fence if a waypoint beyond the fence is selected using the function SELECT Used to select the defined APPROACH Figure 2 11 ERASE Used to erase an APPROACH Figure 2 11 AIRWAY Page Enroute Airways may be manually entered on a Flight Plan Page by preceding the route or airway ident with a pound sign e g J Jet Airway VOR Airway UG Upper Green or Red Airway The preceding waypoint on the Flight Plan must be part of the Airway being entered in order for the Airway to be accepted This waypoint will normally be the From waypoint on the AIRWAY Waypoint Page AIRWAY AIRWAY Airway identifier Figure 2 12 FR Starting point on airway Figure 2 12 TO Ending point on airway as selected by the operator Figure 2 12
286. the bottom of the screen ARRIVAL Arrival airport identifier This field prefills if the last waypoint on the flight plan is an airport or run way or can be manually ARRIVAL entered Figure 2 8 RUNWAY Arriving runway This field prefills if the last waypoint on the flight plan is a runway or can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the RUNWAY field Figure 2 8 Figure 2 8 Rev 0 2 6 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions TRANSITION The Transition waypoint may be prefilled or selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSI TION field STAR The Standard Terminal Arrival STAR can be selected from a list made available by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to the STAR field WAYPOINTS OF STAR The waypoints that constitute the STAR Figure 2 9 SELECT Used to select the defined STAR Figure 2 9 ERASE Used to erase a STAR Figure 2 9 Foure 23 ARRIVAL APPROACH Page Accessed by pressing the Line Select Key adjacent to APPROACH on the FLIGHT PLAN Page With the cursor over APPROACH press ENT NOTE Each field will prefill if there is only one choice for that partic ular field or Approach Airport field will flash if no Approach is avail able and a NO APPROACH AVAILABLE message will appear at the bottom of the screen APCH Approach airport ident
287. the cursor is over each field This field is only dis played after the system is turned on and will be dis played in place of the LAST INPUT field on line 6 Figure 2 51 Figure 2 51 LAST INPUT The time in hours and minutes since the above three quantities were verified This field only appears if fuel flow is input manually Figure 2 51 NOTE This field displays VERIFY INPUTS at system turn on since REMAINING and RESERVE are stored in non volatile memory dur ing system shut down HOURS The hours and minutes of fuel remaining until the reserve fuel quanti ty is reached Figure 2 50 Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid RANGE The nautical mile range available until the reserve fuel quantity is reached Figure 2 50 Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid Rev 0 One GNS XL Flight Management System 2 43 Page Display Definitions NM LB The number of nautical miles for each pound or kilogram of fuel consumed Figure 2 50 Fuel flow and ground speed must be valid PLAN 2 8 Page 2 of 8 TRIP PLAN Pressing the PLAN Key again will display the PLAN 2 8 Page This page may be used to monitor the Active Flight Plan progress or a stored flight plan may be loaded on this page for planning purposes TRIP PLAN PLAN 2 8 The flight plan selected will TRIP PLAN be designated by an A for the Active Flight Plan a number 1 to 56 for a stored flight plan or dashes if no active Flight Pl
288. the following can be observed TUNING PAGES TUNE 1 4 Page 1 of 4 COMM NOTE If the system is configured for two or less communications radios the tune section will display only three pages COMM 1 or COMM 2 The information for each TUNE 1 4 Comm radio Figure 2 66 ACTIVE NOTE If the frequency cur rently tuned and displayed on the respective control head appears briefly but turns to dashes the system interface does not provide a return frequency input Figure 2 66 MAN in this field indicates the frequency was manually entered via the control head Figure 2 66 If the MAN field is blank the system was tuned via the CDU keyboard PRESET The pilot can enter and store a frequency in this field through the key board Figure 2 66 TRANSFER The displayed PRESET frequency can be transferred to ACTIVE when the ENT key is depressed The control head will reflect this change Figure 2 66 TUNE 2 4 Page 2 of 4 COMM The same information from the first page is displayed here for addi tional COMM radios Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 2 55 Page Display Definitions TUNE 3 4 Page 3 of 4 NAV Pressing the TUNE Key again will display this page and the following information may be observed NAV 1 or NAV 2 The station identifier to which the respective NAV receiver is tuned KEY will be displayed when the frequency or identifier of the station has been entered using th
289. tic E Atlantic Pacific or Fi 7 1 Indian Figure 7 105 10 ENT Key DEPRESS to REGION select region Cursor AFIS OPERATING MODES moves to LINK field T SRT LINK CONTROL Figure 7 106 SAT COW NOTE All other regions are now considered OFF PERLON 11 ENT Key DEPRESS to LINK ACTIVATE the SAT net work link as operational and return to AFIS OPERATING Fi 7 106 MODES Page MIS NOTE When in MAN mode the ACTIVE LINK will display NONE until the aircraft is within the boundaries of the selected region RETURNING TO AUTO 12 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over MAN field 13 BACK Key DEPRESS until AUTO appears in cursor 14 ENT Key DEPRESS to select AUTO option Cursor moves to the LINK field 15 ENT Key DEPRESS to ACTIVATE the SAT network link as operational and return to AFIS OPERATING MODES Page Rev 0 ie GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 53 PRINTER CTRL The AFIS DMU has two RS 232 printer interfaces Users may print messages or weather to either or both printer ports Automatic print ing is also available Controls for these options as well as Auto Form Feed control are accessed on the PRINTER CONTROL page Auto Form Feed currently applies to the 0211 and the 2011 DMUs Access the PRINTER CONTROL page by line selecting the PRINT ER CTRL field on the OPERATING MODES page and pressing ENTER MESSAGE DEST The Message Destination field is used to
290. tical miles 99 to 99 range a lf the offset is prior to the waypoint enter the range value and a prefills as a default or b enter a then the range value to indicate the offset is beyond the waypoint 7 ENTKey DEPRESS Cursor moves to FPA field 8 Flight Path Angle VERIFY or INSERT in degrees and tenths 0 1 to 6 0 range NOTE Direct Flight Path Angle prefills if it is within the valid range and an ALT is programmed Figure 3 138 9 ENT Key DEPRESS to accept waypoint entries and return to VNAV Page 1 CREATING VNAV PROFILE WAYPOINTS VNAV profile waypoints TOC TOD and PRESL are used to provide a prediction of the position of the aircraft on the vertical flight path These are non enterable waypoints computed by the system based on current ground speed and vertical speed of Climb Top of Climb Altitude is obtained from either the CRUISE ALT entered by the pilot on the VNAV DATA Page or from the Altitude Preselector setting if available When the aircraft arrives at the pre selected altitude the system will automatically set cruise altitude to the pre selected altitude which will then provide a TOD prediction If vertical climb constraints are programmed TOC will automatically appear as the Vertical To Waypoint when the aircraft laterally passes within 1 mile the last vertical waypoint on the active flight plan that has a climb constraint Once the aircraft has crossed the f
291. time Figure 7 9 enroute in hours and minutes from the FROM waypoint to the TO waypoint as transferred from the disk or updated through the data link HOLDING FUEL Projected fuel required for Holding Time as trans ferred from disk or received via the data link HOLDING TIME The holding time in hours and minutes as trans ferred from disk or received via the data link TO FUEL Projected fuel required from TO waypoint to alternate air port as transferred from disk or received via the data link TO TIME The estimated time enroute in hours and minutes from TO waypoint to alternate airport as transferred from disk or received via the data link RESERVE FUEL Projected reserve fuel at TO waypoint as trans ferred from the disk or received via the data link RESERVE TIME Projected flight time remaining at TO waypoint to consume the displayed RESERVE FUEL TOTALS Sum of planned enroute and reserve fuel and sum of planned enroute and reserve time Rev 0 7 8 GNS X Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 AFIS FLT PLAN PAGE 2 AFIS FLT PLAN 2 4 WEIGHTS FLIGHT LEVEL AND ROUTE RAMP WT Planned ramp weight in Ibs prior to starting engines as transferred from disk or received via the data link Figure 7 10 GROSS WT Sum of basic operating weight payload and Figure 7 10 fuel remaining as calculated by GNS XL Figure 7 11 NOTE RAMP WT changes to GROSS WT if there is an auto matic FUEL FLOW input
292. tion GPS and IRS sen sors are not updated Only IRS velocities are required to contribute to the composite position If Update Not Desired 3 PLAN FPL TUNE VNAV HDG or Key DEPRESS to cancel the position fix Using An Offset This procedure is used to cross check or update the system using an offset from a known point such as VORTAC Radial and Distance Record Radial and Distance at the same time as performing Step 1 NOTE Overflying a predetermined radial and distance is not neces sary 1 HOLD Key DEPRESS 2 Offset Waypoint IDENT INSERT NOTE If necessary refer to the procedure for Creating An Offset Waypoint 3 ENT Key DEPRESS Rev 0 3 112 GNS Xi Flight Management System System Operation Recorded Radial INSERT ENT Key DEPRESS Recorded Distance INSERT NM and tenths ENT Key DEPRESS Waypoint Coordinates VERIFY for reasonabili MEL ty Figure 3 181 9 ENT Key DEPRESS The DIF display shows the direction and dis tance in degrees min utes and hundredths of minutes from the FIX position to the composite position Figure 3 182 Figure 3 181 10 ENT Key DEPRESS if position update desired a R ok ENTER POSITION FIX If System Updated The VLF RPU sensor and the VPU interfaced to the updated CDU are updated as well as the composite position GPS and IRS sen sors are not updated Only IRS velocities are
293. to wx update OFF 7 44 Returning to AUTO REPORT auto wx update 7 45 Auto Weather Update 7 46 xiii Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System Table of Contents Turning AUTO WX OFF 7 46 Returning to AUTO WX 7 47 VHF and Satellite Network Operating Modes 7 48 Turning VHF Network OFF 7 48 Turning VHF Network 7 49 Turning AUTO to MAN or OFF 7 50 Returning to AUTO 7 50 Turning Satellite Network OFF 7 51 Turning Satellite Network ON 7 52 Turning AUTO to MAN 7 53 Returning to AUTO gan iseten beet haat aes 7 53 PRINTER GT RE seins tu cet Sa be ib pa FOU SOR 7 54 Message DEST eta cues b ree eiie enim 7 54 Weather DEST t bo tob ep t toss 7 54 AUTO Form Feed 7 55 Auto Print 86 7 56 AUTO Print WX Los us eo Sete act vx Ep CR RES 1 56 PRINTING PROCEDURES 7 57 Printing Flight Plans 7 57 Printing Messages
294. try code will be displayed in this field in parenthesis green Figure 3 106 3 HOLD Key DEPRESS to display HOLDING PATTERN Page with cur sor over the INBOUND CRS field Figure 3 106 4 INBOUND CRS VERI FY or INSERT NOTE A verified Inbound Course programs a DIRECT ENTRY pro cedure The system Defaults to the inbound course between the pre vious WPT on the FPL and the waypoint at which the hold is desired If a Direct TO Leg is displayed on the NAV pages the inbound course defaults to the leg between the aircrafts present position and the cur rent TO waypoint When an inserted Inbound Course value is beyond the DIRECT ENTRY parameters then a TEARDROP or PARALLEL pattern is programmed HOLDING PATTERN 1 1 Figure 3 106 Rev 0 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 63 System Operation When a Holding Procedure is initiated the inbound course is dis played on NAVIGATION Page 1 If the CDI needle does not auto matically slew to the inbound course manually set the CDI needle to the inbound course so that the course needle sensing is correct A T adjacent to the value displayed in the INBOUND CRS field indi cates the course is referenced to true north 5 ENT Key DEPRESS The type of entry is dis played Cursor moves to the LEG TIME field Figure 3 107 6 LEG TIME VERIFY or INSERT valid range 1 0 to 9 9 min 7 f Holding Pattern is complete proceed to Step 11 If Optional Entr
295. tus Same as discussed for NAVIGATION 1 4 Rev 0 5 Oct 96 GNS Xi Flight Management System 2 17 Page Display Definitions WIND NAVIGATION 2 4 The first field displays head wind tailwind in knots with an up arrow 7 for tailwind or a down arrow J for headwind The second field displays the crosswind component in knots with a right pointing arrow gt for left cross wind or a left pointing arrow lt for a right crosswind Figure 2 22 Figure 2 22 ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at the last waypoint on the Active Flight Plan prior to a fence or A fence is a discontinu ity in the flight plan No data is computed beyond the fence and there is no Auto Leg change across the fence Figure 2 22 FUEL Estimated fuel remaining at destination Figure 2 22 TKE The Track Angle Error as defined as the difference between the desired track and the actual track in degrees R right and L left are displayed to show the direction of error in relation to the desired track XTK The crosstrack distance is the lateral displacement of the aircraft in nautical miles and tenths left or right of the desired track 125 NM maximum TRMNL APRCH or ENRTE is displayed to indicate the current CDI sensitivity A parenthesis around any of these indicates the displayed sensitivity has been selected manually See Section 3 for operating procedures Figure 2 22 Scaling for the TRMNL APPR and ENRTE
296. ulation If no Descent Reference Waypoint with FPA and crossing altitude is programmed the system will use the arrival airport and elevation ARP Reference Point not a runway and the default FPA to fix Top of Descent as long as the active flight plan is not an AFIS flight plan NOTE The default FPA may be used to establish TOD but no Vertical Deviation Valid will occur until the FPA is actually loaded from the VNAV WPT Page Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 3 85 System Operation One minute prior to arriving at TOD the system issues the VNAV WPT ALERT message and the discrete waypoint light will flash for 10 seconds then go steady NOTE Changing CRUISE ALT on the CDU to a lower altitude should only be done after the aircraft has departed cruise altitude or TOD at the current cruise altitude will be lost Pre Selected Altitude Intercept Point SPRESL When the system has an input from an Altitude Pre selector and the aircraft is flying toward this altitude a profile waypoint HPRESL appears on the VNAV Page PRESL however never becomes the Vertical To Waypoint When the Pre selector input is valid ETE and RANGE to PRESL can be found on the VNAV DATA Page NOTE With certain types of Pre Selectors installed analog it may be necessary to manually enter a CRUISE ALT when the PRESEL ALT is set higher than the cruise altitude The system does not read analog Pre selector output until the aircraft s baro is w
297. update or it was manually set inactive before shutdown Pressing the BACK Key with the cursor over the inactive field can display one of the following NOTE When VNAV Mode is inactive all external VNAV outputs are disabled including VERT DEV EFIS altitude constraints at waypoints and VNAV WPT ALERT annunciation Rev 0 2 32 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 CLIMB Indicates climb required to cruise altitude or to next altitude restriction Figure 2 38 e CRUISE Indicates holding altitude while enroute to Top of Descent TOD point Figure 2 39 PATH DESCENT Indicates descent via programmed Flight Path Angle Vertical Deviation will be enabled on the Vertical Deviation needle and the VERT DEV field is active The VERT DEV field will not be displayed if there is no vertical path programmed Figure 2 40 DESCENT Indicates non path or Air Mass descent to altitude restriction LEVEL Indicates aircraft should fly level to next con straint TO Waypoint Vertical TO waypoint with con straint altitude and applicable waypoint offset Letters pre ceding or following the altitude constraint have the following meaning FL Flight Level A At or Above B At or Below G Glide Path and a blank space At constraint ACTUAL Page Display Definitions UNRU 1 3 CLIMB 5566 FL350 RANGE 300 4 ETE FPM UP 400 CLIMB GRAD 97 NM DATA
298. ur sor over Leg Identifiers Figure 7 42 NOTE ACTUAL data fields become dashes F REM field becomes F REQ and ETA field NRUIGRTION 5 5 becomes ETE 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to PLRN review Planned data for future legs of the Active AFIS Flight Plan 5 BACK or PRV Key DEPRESS to review Planned data for previous Figure 7 43 Figure 7 42 Rev 0 1 28 GNS X1 Flight Management System AFIS Operation Oct 96 legs of the AFIS Flight Plan 6 Line Select Key DEPRESS to remove cursor from page and return to Current Leg Progress NOTE f the current leg displayed does not agree with a planned AFIS leg the PLAN fields display dashes Figure 7 43 If AFIS Flight Plan is updated via the data link new values will appear Refer to Updating AFIS Flight Plan for update procedure AFIS MENU REVIEWING AFIS FLIGHT PLAN DATA 1 AFIS Key DEPRESS to display AFIS MENU Page PS CO O0 0l ECO NJ 2 Line Select Key Place cur sor over menu Option 1 AFIS FLT PLAN Figure 7 44 Figure 7 44 3 ENT Key DEPRESS a AFIS FLT PLAN 1 4 AFIS FLIGHT PLAN PAGE 1 FUEL TIME 4 REVIEW fuel and time data Figure 7 45 If the Flight Plan has been updated the FROM identifier origin air port will be changed to UPDATE Figure 7 46 Fuel and time data change as a result of the updated informa 7 45 tion The TOTALS reflect the changes in the TO and AFIS FLT PLAN 1 4 RESERVE fields FU
299. ure 3 105 8 Enter the inbound final approach course in the DTK field if required 9 ENT Key DEPRESS Twice to return to Navigation Page 1 NAVIGATION Page 1 will be displayed with the TO waypoint the FAF and waypoint previous to the FAF in the FR field if no manual DTK was entered The system will now intercept the Final Approach course and sequence to the MAP NOTE If an intercept is programmed to a FAF that is part of a Procedure Turn the DTK must be manually entered This will cause PSEUDO VORTAC to be displayed on NAV Page 1 Rev 1 3 62 GNS Xi Flight Management System JuV98 System Operation PROGRAMMING A HOLDING PATTERN WARNING When entering PTs or HP airspace the FMS may not constrain the airplane from violating maneuvering airspace Pilots are responsible for procedural compliance This procedure enables the pilot to program a Holding Pattern HP at a specific waypoint An HP is automatically programmed from the database when it is part of an Arrival or Approach procedure NOTE No HP can be programmed at an ARC end point on the final Approach course manually 1 FPL or 9 Key DEPRESS to display applicable page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over desired waypoint NOTE On NAVIGATION Pages only the TO Waypoint can be selected and on the Active Flight Plan Page a Holding Pattern cannot be programmed at the FR or TO Waypoint NOTE If WPT is a duplicate WPT the coun
300. ure 3 27 3 BACK Key DEPRESS to return to Flight Plan Page Figure 3 27 4 3 90 GNS X1 Flight Management System Now04 System Operation NOTE SELECT will not appear as an option since a SID already exists in the Flight Plan EDITING A SID FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE 1 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over the DEPART field on the FLIGHT PLAN Page ENT Key DEPRESS Line Select Key adjacent to SID field DEPRESS to position cursor over the first SID identifier on the list NOTE A list will only appear if the TRANSITION RUN WAY are compatible with other SIDs Figure 3 28 4 Line Select Key adjacent to the TRANSITION field DEPRESS to position cursor over the current TRANSITION waypoint on the list Figure 3 29 5 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position the cursor over the desired TRANSITION Figure 3 30 Rev 4 DEPARTURE Figure 3 28 DEPARTURE Figure 3 29 DEPARTURE Figure 3 30 Now04 GNS XL Flight Management System 3 21 System Operation 6 ENT Key DEPRESS to select desired TRANSI DEPARTURE TION The system will automatically load the compatible SID associat WAYPOINTS OF SID ed with the selected TRANSITION Figure 3 31 7 ENT Key DEPRESS to select a new SID and insert the new SID into Figure 3 31 the flight plan NOTE The RUNWAY can also be edited without changing the origi nal SID if the SID TRANSITION
301. ut down 7 ENT Key DEPRESS 8 Default Flight Path Angle DEFAULT FPA INSERT or VERIFY in degrees and tenths 0 1 to 6 0 range UNRU DATA 1 1 3 121 NOTE Field defaults to 3 0 if pilot does not enter value Anytime FPA is entered the value will remain in non volatile memory even after the system is shut down If configured altitude preselector information will be displayed at the bottom of the screen If the aircraft is in a climb or descent distance and ETA information to the preselected altitude will be displayed Figure 3 119 9 ENT Key DEPRESS to return to VNAV Page 1 CREATING CHANGING VNAV WAYPOINTS Vertical navigation constraints can only be programmed for waypoints on the Active Flight Plan and though all Active Flight Plan waypoints are displayed on VNAV Pages new waypoints must be added to the Active Flight Plan before they appear on the VNAV Flight Plan way point pages Rev 0 3 72 GNS X1 Flight Management System System Operation After initial leg selection on NAV page 1 1 FPL or Key DEPRESS to display applicable page 2 Line Select Key DEPRESS to position cursor over desired way point NOTE On NAVIGATION Pages only the TO Waypoint can be selected If the waypoint is selected from either the NAV or Direct pages Direct FPA information pages will be displayed on the last line of the screen Figure 3 123 3 VNAV Key DEPRESS t
302. ver the EXCLUDE SATS QTY x field on PLAN 7 8 Page and EXCLUDEB Sars ETST pressing ENT gt EXCLUDE SATS LIST CLEAR ALL The designated satellite num ber being excluded from the FDE prediction is listed here tes SAT Figure 2 60 The desired satellite being excluded from FDE prediction is entered by pressing the Line Select Key by this field and entering the number of the satellite Press ENT to add the satellite to the list Entering a number already listed and pressing ENT will remove the number from the list Pressing the Line Select Key next to CLEAR ALL and press ing ENT will remove all satellites from the exclusion list Rev 0 1 GNS X Flight Management System 2 51 Page Display Definitions PLAN 8 8 Page 8 of 8 FDE COMPUTATION COMPUTING STANDBY This display will flash while FDE prediction is being cal culated See Figures 2 61 COMPLETE The number displayed is the percentage of calculation completed When the FDE prediction is complete the system will dis play either FDE and NAV are available or unavailable Normal calculation time is from ten to twenty minutes See Figures 2 62 and 2 63 PLRN 8 8 FDE COMPUTATION CANCEL COMPUTE Figure 2 61 PLAN 8 8 FDE COMPUTATION Figure 2 62 PLAN 8 8 FDE COMPUTATION Figure 2 63 2 52 GNS Xi Flight Management System Rev 0 Oct 96 Page Display Definitions HEADING SECTION HDG KEY Upon pressi
303. ver the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint if required 3 ENT Key DEPRESS to sequence to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint NOTE If the direction the airplane will turn is in question and the turn direction may not be in accordance with the missed approach proce dure manually turn the airplane toward the missed approach fix then perform the to procedure OPTION 2 Heading to intercept a course to the Missed Approach Procedure waypoint 1 HDG Key DEPRESS The HEADING VECTOR HERDING UECTOR 1 1 Page appears with the cursor over the HEAD ING field Type in the appropriate heading using a preceding R or L to establish the turn direction i e L150 Figure 3 83 2 ENT Key DEPRESS Figure 3 83 The cursor moves to the Heading Mode field and HEADING VECTOR 1 1 HDG SELECT is in the cursor Figure 3 84 NOTE Prior to step 3 the enter key may be pressed with the cursor over HDG select field so that the air plane can begin the intercept process Repeat the proce dure from step1 to complete the HDG intercept procedure Figure 3 84 3 BACK Key DEPRESS until INTERCEPT is displayed c Rev 1 3 48 GNS Xi Flight Management System JuV98 System Operation ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor moves to the TO field Figure 3 85 BACK Key DEPRESS until the Missed Approach fas Procedure waypoint is dis played ENT Key DEPRESS The cursor moves to the DTK field Type in the de
304. w identifier 7 71 GNS XL Flight Management System Table of Contents THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK xvi 0 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Description SECTION 1 DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW The GNS X Flight Management System is an integrated system designed to give the pilot centralized control for the navigation sen sors computer based flight planning fuel management and radio management The 6 has a full color flat panel LCD display alpha numeric and function keys a Global Positioning Sensor GPS and a navigation data base All these are housed in a panel pedestal mounted Control Display Unit CDU aircraft interface requirements are accomplished through the GNS XL The system supports analog and digital inputs in any com bination Specific aircraft requirements are programmed into a Configuration Module This module mounts directly to the rear con nector thus remaining in the aircraft This allows hardware to be easily moved between aircraft types without changing system config uration The following is a summary of the digital and analog inter faces DIGITAL ANALOG AFIS Altitude Air Data Computer Altitude Rate EFIS Cross Track Deviation Fuel Flow Discretes Inertial Navigation Sensor Dual VOR DME Inertial Reference Sensor Fuel Flow VOR DME ADF XPDR COMM Heading Radio Tuning HSI Course amp Bearing RPU VLF Omega Roll Steering
305. waypoint field to inform 88 the pilot of the pending DEPART change Figure 3 9 ARRIVE SELECT 8 APPROACH ERASE 3 ENT Key DEPRESS The waypoint is deleted Figure 3 9 and the cursor is dis played over the next way point Figure 3 10 FLIGHT PLAN 6 FLIGHT PLAN 6 NOTE Deleting a waypoint lt from either a SID STAR or Approach Procedure will lt invalidate that procedure as indicated by the waypoints of 35 733 the procedure no longer Willis SELECT being indented RPPRORCH ERRSE To remove a waypoint from non volatile memory it must Figure 3 10 be deleted from all Stored Flight Plans This does not include database waypoints ADDING A WAYPOINT A waypoint may be added anywhere in a Flight Plan sequence except prior to the current TO waypoint if the ACTIVE FPL Page is displayed Rev 0 pun GNS XL Flight Management System 3 9 System Operation 1 Line Select Key DE PRESS to position the cur sor over the waypoint iden tifier that will follow the new entry Figure 3 11 2 Waypoint Identifier INSERT Figure 3 12 ENT Key DEPRESS 4 Waypoint Coordinates VERIFY or INSERT 5 ENT Key DEPRESS The new waypoint is added to the Flight Plan sequence and the cursor is over the waypoint fol lowing the new entry Figure 3 13 NOTE Adding a waypoint to a SID STAR or Approach Procedure will invalidate that procedure as indicated by the waypoints no lo
306. will display the up angle between the aircraft s present altitude and the altitude constraint that was entered If an FPA is programmed to a direct FPA up waypoint it will be a DN descent FPA and an ambi guity will be displayed on the VNAV waypoint page To program a Path Descent 8 Flight Path Angle FPA UNAU WAYPOINT 1 1 INSERT or VERIFY valid range is 0 1 to 6 0 Figure 3 124 NOTE The FPA value field prefills with the default DEF value programmed on the VNAV DATA Page if this waypoint was accessed from the FPL Page If accessed from the NAV or Page the FPA field prefills with the DIR value If an FPA is manually entered the FPA type field changes to MAN With the cursor over the FPA value Depressing the BACK Key will cycle through all or some of the following DEF DB AUTO DIR MAN To cancel the FPA INSERT 0 and press ENT Key The field changes to dashes indicating no FPA is programmed the vertical deviation output is invalid and no vertical deviation information will be displayed on the CDU or the ADI HSI Figure 3 124 Rev 0 3 74 GNS X1 Flight Management System System Operation 9 ENT Key DEPRESS to load or verify the FPA value NOTE When a descent FPA is programmed at a waypoint a G appears next to the altitude constraint indicating a Glide Path and ver tical deviation guidance and information will be available REVIEWING VNAV WAYPO
307. witching Unit must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link VHF or satellite network must also be enabled SEND AFIS MESSAGE PAGE This page is accessed by selecting Option 6 on the AFIS MENU Page T 1 indicate that pressing the Line Select Key adjacent the arrow will move the cursor in the direction of the arrow PPM Preprogrammed messages that can be stored in non volatile memory selected and sent without being re entered TO Receiver of message FROM Sender s identification name or tail number Receiver s address See Table A 1 for possible address varia tions and the method in which the Global Data Center processes the message MESSAGE TEXT Fifteen lines of text entry available Text must be flight related when using the VHF network operating mode SEND MESSAGE When cur sor is over this field and ENT is pressed the message is sent via the data link Figure 7 24 DATA LINK DISABLED Aircraft equipped with the Antenna Switching Unit must DEPRESS momentary AFIS annunciator to enable the air to ground data link VHF or satel lite network must also be enabled Figure 7 24 SEND MESSRGE Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS XL Flight Management System AFIS Operation 1 15 Phone number GDC will deliver message verbally to given number AtS equipped aircraft GDC will deliver message to aircraft specified followed by phone number GDC will deliver message to PC at give
308. yed as flight level rounded off to the nearest hundred feet An altitude less than 1000 feet must be entered with a preceding zero Altitudes below sea level are limited to 1000 feet The following may appear in the altitude field FL Flight Level Preceding the Altitude Value At or Above Following the Altitude Value B At or Below Following the Altitude Value Blank space At Following the Altitude Value NOTE If the destination airport or runway is manually entered or if the airport runway is loaded from the database the airport elevation will be displayed in the altitude field If the flight plan is loaded through AFIS the airport elevation will not be available EST CROSSING Altitude trajectory computed by the system to the Vertical TO Waypoint based on cur rent groundspeed and Vertical speed Figure 2 47 This field is displayed for the active vertical waypoint UNRU WAYPOINT 1 1 Figure 2 47 Rev 0 2 40 GNS X1 Flight Management System Oct 96 Page Display Definitions PLAN CROSSING System determined crossing based on programmed con straints and flight path angles for descent Figure 2 48 This field is displayed for other than the Active Vertical Waypoint and will be dis played in place of EST CROSSING OFFSET Pilot entered value in nautical miles 99 to 99 range where a posi tive entry indicates an offset beyond the waypoint and a negative entry is prior to the
309. ypoints in the Flight Plan Figure 3 34 lt ACTIVE FPL 1 1 lt lt To Delete a Waypoint DEPART ARRIVE 4 Line Select Key APPROACH DEPRESS to position the cursor over the way point to be deleted on Figure 3 34 the Flight Plan page 5 BACK Key DEPRESS A DELETE prompt will appear adja cent to the waypoint to be deleted 6 ENT Key DEPRESS The waypoint will be deleted and the way points of the SID will be treated as non procedure waypoints in the flight plan Rev 0 Oct 96 GNS X1 Flight Management System 3 23 System Operation ENTERING AN AIRWAY FROM ANY STORED FPL OR THE ACTIVE FPL PAGE Enroute Airways include high altitude jet routes and low altitude and colored airways 1 Line Select Key DE PRESS to position cursor directly below the starting waypoint of the desired airway on the Flight Plan page Figure 3 35 2 Airway ident INSERT Use Option 1 if the destination waypoint is unknown Option 2 to enter the known destination way point Option 1 a Key DEPRESS then enter the airway identifier Figure 3 36 b ENT Key DE PRESS Figure 3 37 NOTE If the waypoint above the cursor is not a waypoint on the selected airway the airway identifier will blink The appropriate airway or way point identifier must be entered The Flight Plan should always be checked for duplicate way points and the appropriate waypoints delete
310. ystem will not automatically sequence to the next waypoint on the active flight plan To sequence to the next waypoint in the flight plan use the Direct To function or place the cursor over MAN Press the BACK Key and AUTO will be displayed Press the ENT Key and the system will return to the automatic leg change mode Rev 0 3 56 GNS X Flight Management System Oct 96 System Operation USING HEADING VECTOR This procedure enables the pilot to program and fly a specific head ing vector as well as program an automatic intercept of a specified leg PROGRAMMING A HEADING VECTOR 1 HDG Key DEPRESS to HEADING VECTOR 1 1 display HEADING VEC TOR Page with cursor over the HDG field 2 Heading INSERT desired Heading in whole degrees preceded by R or L if applicable to indi cate a turn direction Figure 3 96 NOTE or L should be used for a heading change greater than 180 from the HERDING UECTOR 1 1 present heading A T in the HDG and DTK fields indi 7 cates the system is operating in the true heading mode EMEHDG SELECT 2 3 ENT Key DEPRESS lt The cursor advances to Heading Mode field Figure 3 97 4 ENT Key DEPRESS to Figure 3 97 select Heading Select Mode and return to NAV Figure 3 96 IGATION Page 1 F NAVIGATION 1 4 FR PAXTO NOTE HDG SELECT and the programmed heading are sn displayed on NAVIGATION Page 1 indicating the aircraft is in Heading Sele
311. ystems 3 3 Option 2 Using the POS field 3 5 BUILDING FLIGHT PLANS FPL 3 7 iv Rev 0 GNS Xz Flight Management System Oct 96 Table of Contents CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN 3 7 To Delete a Waypoint 3 8 MODIFYING A FLIGHT PLAN 3 8 To Access The Desired Flight Plan 3 8 Deleting A Waypoint 3 9 ADDING A WAYPOINT 3 9 ADDING OCEANIC WAYPOINTS 3 10 USING DUPLICATE WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS 3 11 REVIEWING WAYPOINT DATA COORDINATES 3 12 To Access The Desired Flight Plan 3 12 ERASING A STORED FLIGHT PLAN 3 12 FLIGHT PLAN FPL SELECTION 3 13 INITIAL LEG SELECTION 3 14 BEFORE TAXI IRS EQUIPPED 3 15 RUNWAY LINE UP IRS EQUIPPED 3 15 IRS VLF RPU GPS AND OR VPU EQUIPPED 3 15 VLF RPU AND OR EQUIPPED ONLY 3 15 5105 STARs APPROACHES AND ENROUTE AIRWAYS 3 16 ENTERING A SID ON THE ACTIVE FPL 3 18 REVIEWING A S

Honeywell GNS-XL GPS Receiver User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents